Division
Section Title
Pages
SPECIFICATIONS GROUP
General Requirements Subgroup
DIVISION 01 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
011000
SUMMARY
013100
PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION
015000
TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS
017300
EXECUTION
017700
CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES
4
8
3
8
5
Facility Construction Subgroup
DIVISION 02 - EXISTING CONDITIONS
024119
SELECTIVE DEMOLITION
5
DIVISION 03 - CONCRETE
033000
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
14
DIVISION 07 - THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION
079201
INTERIOR JOINT SEALANTS
6
DIVISION 08 - OPENINGS
081113
HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES
081416
FLUSH WOOD DOORS
087100
FINISH HARDWARE
6
4
10
DIVISION 09 - FINISHES
092216
NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING
092900
GYPSUM BOARD
093013
CERAMIC TILING
095113
ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS
096513
RESILIENT BASE AND ACCESSORIES
096813
TILE CARPETING
099123
INTERIOR PAINTING
5
5
7
6
3
4
6
DIVISION 10 - SPECIALTIES
102113.19
PLASTIC TOILET COMPARTMENTS
102800
TOILET, BATH, AND LAUNDRY ACCESSORIES
3
3
KIB DISTRICT OFFICE
RESTROOM IMPROVEMENTS
5-1
DIVISION 12 - FURNISHINGS
123661.16
SOLID SURFACING COUNTERTOPS
4
Facility Services Subgroup
DIVISION 22 - PLUMBING
220700
PLUMBING INSULATION
7
DIVISION 23 - HEATING, VENTILATING, AND AIR CONDITIONING (HVAC)
230593
TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC
230700
HVAC INSULATION
230994
SEQUENCE OF OPERATIONS FOR EXHAUST FANS
233100
HVAC DUCTS AND CASINGS
233400
HVAC FANS
12
4
1
5
2
DIVISION 26 - ELECTRICAL
260500
BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS
260519
LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES
260526
GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
260529
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
260533
RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
260548
VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
260553
IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
260943
NETWORK LIGHTING CONTROLS
262726
WIRING DEVICES
262816
ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS
262913
ENCLOSED CONTROLLERS
265100
INTERIOR LIGHTING
6
8
6
4
10
6
6
8
6
8
12
8
DIVISION 27 - COMMUNICATIONS
270526
GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS
270533
CONDUITS AND BACKBOXES FOR COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS
270553
IDENTIFICATION FOR COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS
271500
COMMUNICATIONS HORIZONTAL CABLING
6
8
4
12
DIVISION 28 - ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY
283111
DIGITAL, ADDRESSABLE FIRE-ALARM SYSTEM
10
END OF TABLE OF CONTENTS
KIB DISTRICT OFFICE
RESTROOM IMPROVEMENTS
5-2
SECTION 011000 - SUMMARY
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
Section Includes:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
B.
Related Requirements:
1.
1.3
Project information.
Work covered by Contract Documents.
Phased construction.
Access to site.
Coordination with occupants.
Work restrictions.
Specification and drawing conventions.
Miscellaneous provisions.
Section 015000 "Temporary Facilities and Controls" for limitations and procedures
governing temporary use of Owner's facilities.
PROJECT INFORMATION
A.
Project Identification: Kodiak Island Borough School District Offices, Restroom Improvements
1.
B.
Project Location: Kodiak High School, Kodiak, Alaska.
Owner: Kodiak Island Borough, 710 Mill Bay Road, Kodiak Alaska 99615.
1.
Owner's Representative: Jeff Hansell, Director of Facilities 907-481-2288.
C.
Architect: Jensen Yorba Lott, Inc., 522 W. 10th Street, Juneau Alaska 99801. 907-586-1070.
D.
Architect's Consultants: The Architect has retained the following design professionals who
have prepared designated portions of the Contract Documents:
1.
Mechanical and Electrical Engineers: PDC Inc., Anchorage, 907-743-3200
KIB DISTRICT OFFICE
RESTROOM IMPROVEMENTS
SUMMARY
011000 - 1
1.4
WORK COVERED BY CONTRACT DOCUMENTS
A.
The Work of Project is defined by the Contract Documents and consists of the following:
1.
B.
Type of Contract:
1.
1.5
The work includes renovation to approximately 1,500 sf of office and restroom space to
renovate an existing restroom and create a new restroom in existing office space. Work
includes replacement of all finishes, fixtures and related equipment including mechanical
and electrical work. Work also includes installation of new doors and new door
hardware.
Project will be constructed under a single prime contract.
ACCESS TO SITE
A.
General: Contractor shall have limited use of Project site for construction operations as
required for Work.
B.
Use of Site: Limit use of Project site to work in building areas and areas within the Contract
limit. Do not disturb portions of Project site beyond areas in which the Work is indicated.
1.
Driveways, Walkways and Entrances: Keep driveways, parking areas, loading areas, and
entrances serving premises clear and available to Owner, Owner's employees, and
emergency vehicles at all times. Do not use these areas for parking or storage of
materials except where shown.
a.
b.
c.
C.
1.6
Schedule deliveries outside normal school hours except as approved by Owner.
Schedule deliveries to minimize space and time requirements for storage of
materials and equipment on-site.
Make deliveries using routes and site access points shown on drawings. Use
alternate routes only with prior Owner approval.
Condition of Existing Building: Maintain portions of existing building affected by construction
operations in a weathertight condition throughout construction period. Repair damage caused
by construction operations.
COORDINATION WITH OCCUPANTS
A.
Full Owner Occupancy: Owner will occupy the premises during entire construction period,
with the exception of building areas under construction. Cooperate with Owner during
construction operations to minimize conflicts and facilitate Owner usage. Perform work in
areas normally occupied by students outside schools hours, normally established as between
7:00 A.M. and 3:00 P.M. and only with prior approval of Owner. Maintain existing exits unless
otherwise indicated.
1.
Maintain access to existing walkways, corridors, and other adjacent occupied or used
facilities. Do not close or obstruct walkways, corridors, or other occupied or used
KIB DISTRICT OFFICE
RESTROOM IMPROVEMENTS
SUMMARY
011000 - 2
2.
B.
Owner Limited Occupancy of Completed Areas of Construction: Owner reserves the right to
occupy and to place and install equipment in completed portions of the Work, prior to
Substantial Completion of the Work, provided such occupancy does not interfere with
completion of the Work. Such placement of equipment and limited occupancy shall not
constitute acceptance of the total Work.
1.
1.7
facilities without written permission from Owner and approval of authorities having
jurisdiction.
Notify Owner not less than 72 hours in advance of activities that will affect Owner's
operations.
On occupancy, Owner will assume responsibility for maintenance and custodial service
for occupied portions of Work.
WORK RESTRICTIONS
A.
B.
Work Restrictions, General: Comply with restrictions on construction operations.
1.
Comply with limitations on use of public streets and with other requirements of
authorities having jurisdiction.
2.
Comply with limits of activities and use of school property. School property is defined as
the area enclosed by Egan Way to the west, Upper Mill Bay Road to the north, Powell
Avenue to the east and Rezanof Drive to the south.
On-Site Work Hours: Limit work in the building between 7:00A.M. and 10:00 P.M., Monday
through Friday, unless otherwise indicated.
1.
2.
C.
Existing Utility Interruptions: Do not interrupt utilities serving facilities occupied by Owner or
others unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after providing temporary
utility services according to requirements indicated:
1.
2.
3.
D.
Weekend Hours: Same as weekdays.
Early Morning Hours or noisy activity: Observe Kodiak Island Borough and City of
Kodiak noise regulations.
Notify Owner not less than 72 hours days in advance of proposed utility interruptions.
Obtain Owner's written permission before proceeding with utility interruptions.
Utility interruptions are limited to those hours outside normal school hours or weekends.
Noise, Vibration, and Odors: Coordinate operations that may result in high levels of noise and
vibration, odors, or other disruption to Owner occupancy with Owner.
1.
2.
Notify Owner not less than 72 hours in advance of proposed disruptive operations.
Obtain Owner's written permission before proceeding with disruptive operations.
E.
Nonsmoking Building: Smoking is not permitted on school property.
F.
Controlled Substances: Use of tobacco products and other controlled substances on school
property or within 100 feet of school property is not permitted.
KIB DISTRICT OFFICE
RESTROOM IMPROVEMENTS
SUMMARY
011000 - 3
G.
Employee Identification: Provide identification tags for Contractor personnel working on
Project site. Require personnel to use identification tags at all times.
H.
Firearms: Firearms are not permitted on school property.
I.
Employee Screening: Comply with requirements of Authorities having Jurisdiction for drug
and background screening of Contractor personnel working on School Property.
1.8
1.
Maintain list of approved screened personnel with Owner's representative.
2.
Convicted sex offenders are not permitted on school property or within 100 feet.
SPECIFICATION AND DRAWING CONVENTIONS
A.
Specification Content: The Specifications use certain conventions for the style of language and
the intended meaning of certain terms, words, and phrases when used in particular situations.
These conventions are as follows:
1.
2.
Imperative mood and streamlined language are generally used in the Specifications. The
words "shall," "shall be," or "shall comply with," depending on the context, are implied
where a colon (:) is used within a sentence or phrase.
Specification requirements are to be performed by Contractor unless specifically stated
otherwise.
B.
Division 01 General Requirements: Requirements of Sections in Division 01 apply to the Work
of all Sections in the Specifications.
C.
Drawing Coordination: Requirements for materials and products identified on Drawings are
described in detail in the Specifications. One or more of the following are used on Drawings to
identify materials and products:
1.
2.
Terminology: Materials and products are identified by the typical generic terms used in
the individual Specifications Sections.
Abbreviations: Materials and products are identified by abbreviations scheduled on
Drawings.
END OF SECTION 011000
KIB DISTRICT OFFICE
RESTROOM IMPROVEMENTS
SUMMARY
011000 - 4
SECTION 013100 - PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
Section includes administrative provisions for coordinating construction operations on Project
including, but not limited to, the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
General coordination procedures.
Requests for Information (RFIs).
Interpretation and clarification of Information (DC’s)
Project meetings.
B.
Each contractor shall participate in coordination requirements. Certain areas of responsibility
are assigned to a specific contractor.
C.
Related Requirements:
1.
1.3
Section 017300 "Execution" for procedures for coordinating general installation and
field-engineering services, including establishment of benchmarks and control points.
DEFINITIONS
A.
RFI: Request from Owner, Architect, or Contractor seeking information required by or
clarifications of the Contract Documents.
B.
DC: Response from Owner’s representative, or Architect, for interpretation or clarification of
the Contract Documents.
1.4
INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A.
Subcontract List: Prepare a written summary identifying individuals or firms proposed for each
portion of the Work, including those who are to furnish products or equipment fabricated to a
special design. Include the following information in tabular form:
1.
2.
3.
Name, address, and telephone number of entity performing subcontract or supplying
products.
Number and title of related Specification Section(s) covered by subcontract.
Drawing number and detail references, as appropriate, covered by subcontract.
KIB DISTRICT OFFICE
RESTROOM IMPROVEMENTS
PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION
013100 - 1
B.
1.5
Key Personnel Names: Within 15 days of starting construction operations, submit a list of key
personnel assignments, including superintendent and other personnel in attendance at Project
site. Identify individuals and their duties and responsibilities; list addresses and telephone
numbers, including home, office, and cellular telephone numbers and e-mail addresses. Provide
names, addresses, and telephone numbers of individuals assigned as alternates in the absence of
individuals assigned to Project.
GENERAL COORDINATION PROCEDURES
A.
Coordination: Coordinate construction operations included in different Sections of the
Specifications to ensure efficient and orderly installation of each part of the Work. Coordinate
construction operations, included in different Sections, that depend on each other for proper
installation, connection, and operation.
1.
2.
3.
B.
Coordination: Each contractor shall coordinate its construction operations with those of other
contractors and entities to ensure efficient and orderly installation of each part of the Work.
Each contractor shall coordinate its operations with operations, included in different Sections,
that depend on each other for proper installation, connection, and operation.
1.
2.
3.
C.
Schedule construction operations in sequence required to obtain the best results where
installation of one part of the Work depends on installation of other components, before
or after its own installation.
Coordinate installation of different components with other contractors to ensure
maximum performance and accessibility for required maintenance, service, and repair.
Make adequate provisions to accommodate items scheduled for later installation.
Prepare memoranda for distribution to each party involved, outlining special procedures
required for coordination. Include such items as required notices, reports, and list of attendees at
meetings.
1.
D.
Schedule construction operations in sequence required to obtain the best results where
installation of one part of the Work depends on installation of other components, before
or after its own installation.
Coordinate installation of different components to ensure maximum performance and
accessibility for required maintenance, service, and repair.
Make adequate provisions to accommodate items scheduled for later installation.
Prepare similar memoranda for Owner and separate contractors if coordination of their
Work is required.
Administrative Procedures: Coordinate scheduling and timing of required administrative
procedures with other construction activities and activities of other contractors to avoid conflicts
and to ensure orderly progress of the Work. Such administrative activities include, but are not
limited to, the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Preparation of Contractor's construction schedule.
Preparation of the schedule of values.
Installation and removal of temporary facilities and controls.
Delivery and processing of submittals.
Progress meetings.
KIB DISTRICT OFFICE
RESTROOM IMPROVEMENTS
PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION
013100 - 2
6.
7.
8.
1.6
Preinstallation conferences.
Project closeout activities.
Startup and adjustment of systems.
REQUESTS FOR INFORMATION (RFIs)
A.
General: Immediately on discovery of the need for additional information or interpretation of
the Contract Documents, Contractor shall prepare and submit an RFI in the form specified.
1.
2.
B.
Architect will return RFIs submitted to Architect by other entities controlled by
Contractor with no response.
Coordinate and submit RFIs in a prompt manner so as to avoid delays in Contractor's
work or work of subcontractors.
Content of the RFI: Include a detailed, legible description of item needing information or
interpretation and the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
Project name.
Project number.
Date.
Name of Contractor.
Name of Architect and Construction Manager.
RFI number, numbered sequentially.
RFI subject.
Specification Section number and title and related paragraphs, as appropriate.
Drawing number and detail references, as appropriate.
Field dimensions and conditions, as appropriate.
Contractor's suggested resolution. If Contractor's suggested resolution impacts the
Contract Time or the Contract Sum, Contractor shall state impact in the RFI.
Contractor's signature.
Attachments: Include sketches, descriptions, measurements, photos, Product Data, Shop
Drawings, coordination drawings, and other information necessary to fully describe items
needing interpretation.
a.
C.
RFI Forms: Software-generated form with substantially the same content as indicated above,
acceptable to Architect.
1.
D.
Include dimensions, thicknesses, structural grid references, and details of affected
materials, assemblies, and attachments on attached sketches.
Attachments shall be electronic files in Adobe Acrobat PDF format.
Architect's and Owner’s representative action: Architect and Owner’s representative will review
each RFI, determine action required, and respond. Allow seven working days for Architect's
response for each RFI. RFIs received by Architect after 1:00 p.m. will be considered as received
the following working day.
1.
The following Contractor-generated RFIs will be returned without action:
a.
Requests for approval of submittals.
KIB DISTRICT OFFICE
RESTROOM IMPROVEMENTS
PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION
013100 - 3
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
2.
3.
Architect's action may include a request for additional information, in which case
Architect's time for response will date from time of receipt of additional information.
Architect's action on RFIs that may result in a change to the Contract Time or the
Contract Sum may be eligible for Contractor to submit Change Proposal by Owner.
a.
E.
Project name.
Name and address of Contractor.
Name and address of Architect.
RFI number including RFIs that were returned without action or withdrawn.
RFI description.
Date the RFI was submitted.
Date Architect's and Construction Manager's response was received.
On receipt of Architect's and Owner’s representative action, update the RFI log and
immediately distribute the RFI response to affected parties. Review response and notify
Architect and Owner’s representative within seven days if Contractor disagrees with response.
1.
2.
1.7
If Contractor believes the RFI response warrants change in the Contract Time or
the Contract Sum, notify Architect and Construction Manager in writing within 10
days of receipt of the RFI response.
RFI Log: Prepare, maintain, and submit a tabular log of RFIs organized by the RFI number.
Submit log weekly. Software log with not less than the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
F.
Requests for approval of substitutions.
Requests for approval of Contractor's means and methods.
Requests for coordination information already indicated in the Contract
Documents.
Requests for adjustments in the Contract Time or the Contract Sum.
Requests for interpretation of Architect's actions on submittals.
Incomplete RFIs or inaccurately prepared RFIs.
Identification of related Minor Change in the Work, Construction Change Directive, and
Proposal Request, as appropriate.
Identification of related Field Order, Work Change Directive, and Proposal Request, as
appropriate.
DOCUMENT CLARFICATON (DCs)
A.
General: Immediately on discovery of the need for additional interpretation or clarification of
the Contract Documents, and if not possible to request interpretation at Project meeting. Prepare
and submit an DC in the form specified.
1.
2.
B.
DCs shall originate with Owner’s representative, Construction Manager, or Architect.
Coordinate and submit DCs in a prompt manner so as to avoid delays in Contractor's
work or work of subcontractors.
Content of the DC: Include a detailed, legible description of item needing information or
interpretation and the following as applicable:
KIB DISTRICT OFFICE
RESTROOM IMPROVEMENTS
PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION
013100 - 4
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
Project name.
Project number.
Date.
Name of Contractor.
Name of Architect and Project Manager.
DC number, numbered sequentially.
DC subject.
Specification Section number and title and related paragraphs, as appropriate.
Drawing number and detail references, as appropriate.
Field dimensions and conditions, as appropriate.
Description of issue and Architects’ suggested resolution(s). If suggested resolution(s)
impacts the Contract Time or the Contract Sum, Architect shall state impact in the DC.
Contractor's signature.
Attachments: Include sketches/drawings, descriptions, measurements, photos, Product
Data, Shop Drawings, coordination drawings, and other information necessary to fully
describe items needing interpretation.
a.
b.
C.
Supplementary sketches/drawings prepared by Architect or Project Manager shall
include dimensions, thicknesses, structural grid references, and details of affected
materials, assemblies, and attachments on attached sketches/drawings.
Architect or Project Manager may request assistance of contractor in providing
verification of conditions.
Contractor Action: Contractor will review and respond. Allow seven working days for
Contractor’s response for each DC. DCs received by Contractor after 1:00 p.m. will be
considered as received the following working day.
1.
Contractor’s action may include a request for additional information, in which case
Contractor’s time for response will date from time of receipt of additional information.
a.
2.
1.8
If Contractor believes the DC response warrants change in the Contract Time or
the Contract Sum, notify Owner’s representative in writing within 10 days of
receipt of the DC.
If Owner agrees that DCs results in a change to the Contract Time or the Contract Sum
Contractor will be directed to submit Change Proposal, or the Owner will produce a
Request for Proposal.
PROJECT MEETINGS
A.
General: Schedule and conduct meetings and conferences at Project site unless otherwise
indicated.
1.
2.
3.
Attendees: Inform participants and others involved, and individuals whose presence is
required, of date and time of each meeting. Notify Owner and Architect of scheduled
meeting dates and times.
Agenda: Prepare the meeting agenda. Distribute the agenda to all invited attendees.
Minutes: Entity responsible for conducting meeting will record significant discussions
and agreements achieved. Distribute the meeting minutes to everyone concerned,
including Owner and Architect, within three days of the meeting.
KIB DISTRICT OFFICE
RESTROOM IMPROVEMENTS
PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION
013100 - 5
B.
Preconstruction Conference:
Construction Manager will schedule and conduct a
preconstruction conference before starting construction, at a time convenient to Owner and
Architect, but no later than 15 days after execution of the Agreement.
1.
2.
Attendees: Authorized representatives of Owner, Architect, and their consultants;
Contractor and its superintendent; major subcontractors; suppliers; and other concerned
parties shall attend the conference. Participants at the conference shall be familiar with
Project and authorized to conclude matters relating to the Work.
Agenda: Discuss items of significance that could affect progress, including the following:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
i.
j.
k.
l.
m.
n.
o.
p.
q.
r.
s.
t.
u.
v.
w.
x.
3.
C.
Tentative construction schedule.
Critical work sequencing and long-lead items.
Designation of key personnel and their duties.
Lines of communications.
Procedures for processing field decisions and Change Orders.
Procedures for RFIs.
Procedures for testing and inspecting.
Procedures for processing Applications for Payment.
Distribution of the Contract Documents.
Submittal procedures.
Preparation of record documents.
Use of the premises and existing building.
Work restrictions.
Working hours.
Owner's occupancy requirements.
Responsibility for temporary facilities and controls.
Procedures for disruptions and shutdowns.
Construction waste management and recycling.
Parking availability.
Office, work, and storage areas.
Equipment deliveries and priorities.
First aid.
Security.
Progress cleaning.
Minutes: Entity responsible for conducting meeting will record and distribute meeting
minutes.
Project Closeout Conference: Schedule and conduct a project closeout conference, at a time
convenient to Owner and Architect, but no later than 14 days prior to the scheduled date of
Substantial Completion.
1.
2.
3.
Conduct the conference to review requirements and responsibilities related to Project
closeout.
Attendees: Authorized representatives of Owner, Construction Manager, Architect, and
their consultants; Contractor and its superintendent; major subcontractors; suppliers; and
other concerned parties shall attend the meeting. Participants at the meeting shall be
familiar with Project and authorized to conclude matters relating to the Work.
Agenda: Discuss items of significance that could affect or delay Project closeout,
including the following:
KIB DISTRICT OFFICE
RESTROOM IMPROVEMENTS
PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION
013100 - 6
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
i.
j.
k.
4.
D.
Preparation of record documents.
Procedures required prior to inspection for Substantial Completion and for final
inspection for acceptance.
Submittal of written warranties.
Requirements for preparing operations and maintenance data.
Requirements for delivery of material samples, attic stock, and spare parts.
Requirements for demonstration and training.
Preparation of Contractor's punch list.
Procedures for processing Applications for Payment at Substantial Completion and
for final payment.
Submittal procedures.
Owner's partial occupancy requirements.
Responsibility for removing temporary facilities and controls.
Minutes: Entity conducting meeting will record and distribute meeting minutes.
Progress Meetings: Conduct progress meetings at weekly intervals.
1.
2.
3.
Coordinate dates of meetings with preparation of payment requests.
Attendees: In addition to representatives of Owner, Construction Manager, and Architect,
each contractor, subcontractor, supplier, and other entity concerned with current progress
or involved in planning, coordination, or performance of future activities shall be
represented at these meetings. All participants at the meeting shall be familiar with
Project and authorized to conclude matters relating to the Work.
Agenda: Review and correct or approve minutes of previous progress meeting. Review
other items of significance that could affect progress. Include topics for discussion as
appropriate to status of Project.
a.
Contractor's Construction Schedule: Review progress since the last meeting.
Determine whether each activity is on time, ahead of schedule, or behind schedule,
in relation to Contractor's construction schedule. Determine how construction
behind schedule will be expedited; secure commitments from parties involved to
do so. Discuss whether schedule revisions are required to ensure that current and
subsequent activities will be completed within the Contract Time.
1)
b.
Review schedule for next period.
Review present and future needs of each entity present, including the following:
1)
2)
3)
4)
5)
6)
7)
8)
9)
10)
11)
12)
Interface requirements.
Sequence of operations.
Status of submittals.
Deliveries.
Off-site fabrication.
Access.
Site utilization.
Temporary facilities and controls.
Progress cleaning.
Quality and work standards.
Status of correction of deficient items.
Field observations.
KIB DISTRICT OFFICE
RESTROOM IMPROVEMENTS
PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION
013100 - 7
13)
14)
15)
16)
17)
18)
4.
Status of RFIs.
Status of proposal requests.
Pending changes.
Status of Change Orders.
Pending claims and disputes.
Documentation of information for payment requests.
Minutes: Entity responsible for conducting the meeting will record and distribute the
meeting minutes to each party present and to parties requiring information.
a.
Schedule Updating: Revise Contractor's construction schedule after each progress
meeting where revisions to the schedule have been made or recognized. Issue
revised schedule concurrently with the report of each meeting.
END OF SECTION 013100
KIB DISTRICT OFFICE
RESTROOM IMPROVEMENTS
PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION
013100 - 8
SECTION 015000 - TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
Section includes requirements for temporary utilities, support facilities, and security and
protection facilities.
B.
Related Requirements:
1.
1.3
Section 011000 "Summary" for work restrictions and limitations on utility interruptions.
USE CHARGES
A.
Water and Sewer Service from Existing System: Water from Owner's existing water system is
available for use without metering and without payment of use charges. Provide connections
and extensions of services as required for construction operations.
B.
Electric Power Service from Existing System: Electric power from Owner's existing system is
available for use without metering and without payment of use charges. Provide connections
and extensions of services as required for construction operations.
1.4
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Electric Service: Comply with NECA, NEMA, and UL standards and regulations for temporary
electric service. Install service to comply with NFPA 70.
B.
Tests and Inspections: Arrange for authorities having jurisdiction to test and inspect each
temporary utility before use. Obtain required certifications and permits.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MATERIALS
A.
Dust-Control Adhesive-Surface Walk-off Mats: Provide mats minimum 36 by 60 inches (914
by 1624 mm).
KIB DISTRICT OFFICE
RESTROOM IMPROVEMENTS
TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS
015000 - 1
2.2
EQUIPMENT
A.
Fire Extinguishers: Portable, UL rated; with class and extinguishing agent as required by
locations and classes of fire exposures.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
TEMPORARY UTILITY INSTALLATION
A.
General: Install temporary service or connect to existing service.
1.
B.
Arrange with utility company, Owner, and existing users for time when service can be
interrupted, if necessary, to make connections for temporary services.
Sewers and Drainage: Provide temporary utilities to remove effluent lawfully.
1.
Connect temporary sewers to municipal system as directed by authorities having
jurisdiction.
C.
Water Service: Install water service and distribution piping in sizes and pressures adequate for
construction.
D.
Water Service: Connect to Owner's existing water service facilities. Clean and maintain water
service facilities in a condition acceptable to Owner. At Substantial Completion, restore these
facilities to condition existing before initial use.
1.
E.
Toilets: Use of Owner's existing toilet facilities will be permitted, as long as facilities are
cleaned and maintained in a condition acceptable to Owner. At Substantial Completion,
restore these facilities to condition existing before initial use.
Isolation of Work Areas in Occupied Facilities: Prevent dust, fumes, and odors from entering
occupied areas.
1.
Prior to commencing work, isolate the HVAC system in area where work is to be
performed according to coordination drawings.
a.
b.
2.
3.
F.
Disconnect supply and return ductwork in work area from HVAC systems
servicing occupied areas.
Maintain negative air pressure within work area using HEPA-equipped airfiltration units, starting with commencement of temporary partition construction,
and continuing until removal of temporary partitions is complete.
Maintain dust partitions during the Work. Use vacuum collection attachments on dustproducing equipment. Isolate limited work within occupied areas using portable dustcontainment devices.
Perform daily construction cleanup and final cleanup using approved, HEPA-filterequipped vacuum equipment.
Ventilation and Humidity Control: Provide temporary ventilation required by construction
activities for curing or drying of completed installations or for protecting installed construction
KIB DISTRICT OFFICE
RESTROOM IMPROVEMENTS
TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS
015000 - 2
from adverse effects of high humidity. Select equipment that will not have a harmful effect on
completed installations or elements being installed. Coordinate ventilation requirements to
produce ambient condition required and minimize energy consumption.
G.
Electric Power Service: Connect to Owner's existing electric power service. Maintain equipment
in a condition acceptable to Owner.
H.
Lighting: Provide temporary lighting with local switching that provides adequate illumination
for construction operations, observations, inspections, and traffic conditions.
3.2
SUPPORT FACILITIES INSTALLATION
A.
Parking: Use designated areas of Owner's existing parking areas for construction personnel.
B.
Project Signs: Provide Project signs as indicated. Unauthorized signs are not permitted.
C.
Waste Disposal Facilities: Provide waste-collection containers in sizes adequate to handle waste
from construction operations. Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.
Comply with progress cleaning requirements in Section 017300 "Execution."
D.
Lifts and Hoists: Provide facilities necessary for hoisting materials and personnel.
1.
3.3
Truck cranes and similar devices used for hoisting materials are considered "tools and
equipment" and not temporary facilities.
SECURITY AND PROTECTION FACILITIES INSTALLATION
A.
Protection of Existing Facilities: Protect existing vegetation, equipment, structures, utilities, and
other improvements at Project site and on adjacent properties, except those indicated to be
removed or altered. Repair damage to existing facilities.
B.
Temporary Egress: Maintain temporary egress from existing occupied facilities as indicated and
as required by authorities having jurisdiction.
C.
Temporary Enclosures: Provide temporary enclosures for protection of construction, in progress
and completed, from exposure, foul weather, other construction operations, and similar
activities. Provide temporary weathertight enclosure for building exterior.
D.
Temporary Partitions: Provide floor-to-ceiling dustproof partitions to limit dust and dirt
migration and to separate areas occupied by Owner from fumes and noise.
END OF SECTION 015000
KIB DISTRICT OFFICE
RESTROOM IMPROVEMENTS
TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS
015000 - 3
SECTION 017300 - EXECUTION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
Section includes general administrative and procedural requirements governing execution of the
Work including, but not limited to, the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
B.
Related Requirements:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
1.3
Installation of the Work.
Cutting and patching.
Progress cleaning.
Protection of installed construction.
Section 011000 "Summary" for limits on use of Project site.
Section 013300 "Submittal Procedures" for submitting surveys.
Section 017700 "Closeout Procedures" for submitting final property survey with Project
Record Documents, recording of Owner-accepted deviations from indicated lines and
levels, and final cleaning.
Section 024119 "Selective Demolition" for demolition and removal of selected portions
of the building.
Divisions 2 through 16 Sections for specific requirements and limitations applicable to
cutting and patching individual parts of the Work.
DEFINITIONS
A.
Cutting: Removal of in-place construction necessary to permit installation or performance of
other work.
B.
Patching: Fitting and repair work required to restore construction to original conditions after
installation of other work.
1.4
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Cutting and Patching: Comply with requirements for and limitations on cutting and patching of
construction elements.
KIB DISTRICT OFFICE
RESTROOM IMPROVEMENTS
EXECUTION
017300 - 1
1.
Structural Elements: Shore, brace, and support structural elements during cutting and
patching. Do not cut and patch structural elements in a manner that could change their
load-carrying capacity or increase deflection
2.
Operational Elements: Do not cut and patch operating elements and related components
in a manner that results in reducing their capacity to perform as intended or that results in
increased maintenance or decreased operational life or safety. Operational elements
include the following:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
i.
j.
k.
3.
Other Construction Elements: Do not cut and patch other construction elements or
components in a manner that could change their load-carrying capacity, that results in
reducing their capacity to perform as intended, or that results in increased maintenance or
decreased operational life or safety. Other construction elements include but are not
limited to the following:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
4.
B.
1.5
Primary operational systems and equipment.
Fire separation assemblies.
Air or smoke barriers.
Fire-suppression systems.
Mechanical systems piping and ducts.
Control systems.
Communication systems.
Fire-detection and -alarm systems.
Conveying systems.
Electrical wiring systems.
Operating systems of special construction.
Water, moisture, or vapor barriers.
Membranes and flashings.
Exterior curtain-wall construction.
Sprayed fire-resistive material.
Equipment supports.
Piping, ductwork, vessels, and equipment.
Noise- and vibration-control elements and systems.
Visual Elements: Do not cut and patch construction in a manner that results in visual
evidence of cutting and patching. Do not cut and patch exposed construction in a manner
that would, in Architect's opinion, reduce the building's aesthetic qualities. Remove and
replace construction that has been cut and patched in a visually unsatisfactory manner.
Cutting and Patching Conference: Before proceeding, meet at Project site with parties involved
in cutting and patching, including mechanical and electrical trades. Review areas of potential
interference and conflict. Coordinate procedures and resolve potential conflicts before
proceeding.
WARRANTY
A.
Existing Warranties: Remove, replace, patch, and repair materials and surfaces cut or damaged
during cutting and patching operations, by methods and with materials so as not to void existing
warranties.
KIB DISTRICT OFFICE
RESTROOM IMPROVEMENTS
EXECUTION
017300 - 2
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MATERIALS
A.
General: Comply with requirements specified in other Sections.
B.
In-Place Materials: Use materials for patching identical to in-place materials. For exposed
surfaces, use materials that visually match in-place adjacent surfaces to the fullest extent
possible.
1.
If identical materials are unavailable or cannot be used, use materials that, when installed,
will provide a match acceptable to Owner for the visual and functional performance of inplace materials.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
Existing Conditions: The existence and location of underground and other utilities and
construction indicated as existing are not guaranteed. Before beginning work, investigate and
verify the existence and location of underground utilities, mechanical and electrical systems,
and other construction affecting the Work.
B.
Examination and Acceptance of Conditions: Before proceeding with each component of the
Work, examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer or Applicator present where
indicated, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions
affecting performance.
1.
2.
3.
C.
3.2
Examine roughing-in for mechanical and electrical systems to verify actual locations of
connections before equipment and fixture installation.
Examine walls, floors, and roofs for suitable conditions where products and systems are
to be installed.
Verify compatibility with and suitability of substrates, including compatibility with
existing finishes or primers.
Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. Proceeding
with the Work indicates acceptance of surfaces and conditions.
PREPARATION
A.
Field Measurements: Take field measurements as required to fit the Work properly. Recheck
measurements before installing each product. Where portions of the Work are indicated to fit to
other construction, verify dimensions of other construction by field measurements before
fabrication. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delaying the
Work.
B.
Space Requirements:
Verify space requirements and dimensions of items shown
diagrammatically on Drawings.
KIB DISTRICT OFFICE
RESTROOM IMPROVEMENTS
EXECUTION
017300 - 3
C.
3.3
Review of Contract Documents and Field Conditions: Immediately on discovery of the need for
clarification of the Contract Documents caused by differing field conditions outside the control
of Contractor, submit a request for information to Architect according to requirements in
Section 013100 "Project Management and Coordination."
INSTALLATION
A.
General: Locate the Work and components of the Work accurately, in correct alignment and
elevation, as indicated.
1.
2.
3.
Make vertical work plumb and make horizontal work level.
Where space is limited, install components to maximize space available for maintenance
and ease of removal for replacement.
Conceal pipes, ducts, and wiring in finished areas unless otherwise indicated.
B.
Comply with manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations for installing products in
applications indicated.
C.
Install products at the time and under conditions that will ensure the best possible results.
Maintain conditions required for product performance until Substantial Completion.
D.
Conduct construction operations so no part of the Work is subjected to damaging operations or
loading in excess of that expected during normal conditions of occupancy.
E.
Sequence the Work and allow adequate clearances to accommodate movement of construction
items on site and placement in permanent locations.
F.
Templates: Obtain and distribute to the parties involved templates for work specified to be
factory prepared and field installed. Check Shop Drawings of other work to confirm that
adequate provisions are made for locating and installing products to comply with indicated
requirements.
G.
Attachment: Provide blocking and attachment plates and anchors and fasteners of adequate size
and number to securely anchor each component in place, accurately located and aligned with
other portions of the Work. Where size and type of attachments are not indicated, verify size
and type required for load conditions.
1.
2.
Mounting Heights: Where mounting heights are not indicated, mount components at
heights directed by Architect.
Coordinate installation of anchorages. Furnish setting drawings, templates, and
directions for installing anchorages, including sleeves, concrete inserts, anchor bolts, and
items with integral anchors, that are to be embedded in concrete or masonry. Deliver
such items to Project site in time for installation.
H.
Joints: Make joints of uniform width. Where joint locations in exposed work are not indicated,
arrange joints for the best visual effect. Fit exposed connections together to form hairline joints.
I.
Hazardous Materials: Use products, cleaners, and installation materials that are not considered
hazardous.
KIB DISTRICT OFFICE
RESTROOM IMPROVEMENTS
EXECUTION
017300 - 4
3.4
CUTTING AND PATCHING
A.
Cutting and Patching, General: Employ skilled workers to perform cutting and patching.
Proceed with cutting and patching at the earliest feasible time, and complete without delay.
1.
Cut in-place construction to provide for installation of other components or performance
of other construction, and subsequently patch as required to restore surfaces to their
original condition.
B.
Existing Warranties: Remove, replace, patch, and repair materials and surfaces cut or damaged
during installation or cutting and patching operations, by methods and with materials so as not
to void existing warranties.
C.
Temporary Support: Provide temporary support of work to be cut.
D.
Protection: Protect in-place construction during cutting and patching to prevent damage.
Provide protection from adverse weather conditions for portions of Project that might be
exposed during cutting and patching operations.
E.
Adjacent Occupied Areas: Where interference with use of adjoining areas or interruption of
free passage to adjoining areas is unavoidable, coordinate cutting and patching according to
requirements in Section 011000 "Summary."
F.
Existing Utility Services and Mechanical/Electrical Systems: Where existing services/systems
are required to be removed, relocated, or abandoned, bypass such services/systems before
cutting to prevent interruption to occupied areas.
G.
Cutting: Cut in-place construction by sawing, drilling, breaking, chipping, grinding, and similar
operations, including excavation, using methods least likely to damage elements retained or
adjoining construction. If possible, review proposed procedures with original Installer; comply
with original Installer's written recommendations.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
H.
In general, use hand or small power tools designed for sawing and grinding, not
hammering and chopping. Cut holes and slots neatly to minimum size required, and with
minimum disturbance of adjacent surfaces. Temporarily cover openings when not in use.
Finished Surfaces: Cut or drill from the exposed or finished side into concealed surfaces.
Concrete and Masonry: Cut using a cutting machine, such as an abrasive saw or a
diamond-core drill.
Mechanical and Electrical Services: Cut off pipe or conduit in walls or partitions to be
removed. Cap, valve, or plug and seal remaining portion of pipe or conduit to prevent
entrance of moisture or other foreign matter after cutting.
Proceed with patching after construction operations requiring cutting are complete.
Patching: Patch construction by filling, repairing, refinishing, closing up, and similar operations
following performance of other work. Patch with durable seams that are as invisible as
practicable. Provide materials and comply with installation requirements specified in other
Sections, where applicable.
1.
Inspection: Where feasible, test and inspect patched areas after completion to
demonstrate physical integrity of installation.
KIB DISTRICT OFFICE
RESTROOM IMPROVEMENTS
EXECUTION
017300 - 5
2.
Exposed Finishes: Restore exposed finishes of patched areas and extend finish
restoration into retained adjoining construction in a manner that will minimize evidence
of patching and refinishing.
a.
b.
3.
Floors and Walls: Where walls or partitions that are removed extend one finished area
into another, patch and repair floor and wall surfaces in the new space. Provide an even
surface of uniform finish, color, texture, and appearance. Remove in-place floor and wall
coverings and replace with new materials, if necessary, to achieve uniform color and
appearance.
a.
4.
5.
I.
3.5
Clean piping, conduit, and similar features before applying paint or other finishing
materials.
Restore damaged pipe covering to its original condition.
Where patching occurs in a painted surface, prepare substrate and apply primer and
intermediate paint coats appropriate for substrate over the patch, and apply final
paint coat over entire unbroken surface containing the patch. Provide additional
coats until patch blends with adjacent surfaces, or provide corner to corner finish.
Ceilings: Patch, repair, or rehang in-place ceilings as necessary to provide an even-plane
surface of uniform appearance.
Exterior Building Enclosure: Patch components in a manner that restores enclosure to a
weathertight condition and ensures thermal and moisture integrity of building enclosure.
Cleaning: Clean areas and spaces where cutting and patching are performed. Remove paint,
mortar, oils, putty, and similar materials from adjacent finished surfaces.
PROGRESS CLEANING
A.
General: Clean Project site and work areas daily, including common areas.
requirements strictly. Dispose of materials lawfully.
1.
2.
3.
Enforce
Comply with requirements in NFPA 241 for removal of combustible waste materials and
debris.
Do not hold waste materials more than seven days during normal weather or three days if
the temperature is expected to rise above 80 deg F.
Containerize hazardous and unsanitary waste materials separately from other waste.
Mark containers appropriately and dispose of legally, according to regulations.
a.
Use containers intended for holding waste materials of type to be stored.
B.
Site: Maintain Project site free of waste materials and debris.
C.
Work Areas: Clean areas where work is in progress to the level of cleanliness necessary for
proper execution of the Work daily.
1.
2.
Remove liquid spills promptly.
Where dust would impair proper execution of the Work, broom-clean or vacuum the
entire work area, as appropriate.
KIB DISTRICT OFFICE
RESTROOM IMPROVEMENTS
EXECUTION
017300 - 6
a.
Broom and vacuum clean interior areas prior to start of surface finishing, and
continue cleaning to eliminate dust.
D.
Installed Work: Keep installed work clean. Clean installed surfaces according to written
instructions of manufacturer or fabricator of product installed, using only cleaning materials
specifically recommended. If specific cleaning materials are not recommended, use cleaning
materials that are not hazardous to health or property and that will not damage exposed surfaces.
E.
Concealed Spaces: Remove debris from concealed spaces before enclosing the space.
1.
Remove debris and rubbish from pipe chases, plenums, attics, crawl spaces, and other
closed or remote spaces, prior to enclosing spaces.
F.
Exposed Surfaces in Finished Areas: Clean exposed surfaces and protect as necessary to ensure
freedom from damage and deterioration at time of Substantial Completion.
G.
During handling and installation, clean and protect construction in progress and adjoining
materials already in place. Apply protective covering where required to ensure protection from
damage or deterioration at Substantial Completion.
H.
Clean and provide maintenance on completed construction as frequently as necessary through
the remainder of the construction period. Adjust and lubricate operable components to ensure
operability without damaging effects.
I.
Limiting Exposures: Supervise construction operations to assure that no part of the
construction, completed or in progress, is subject to harmful, dangerous, damaging, or otherwise
deleterious exposure during the construction period.
3.6
STARTING AND ADJUSTING
A.
Start equipment and operating components to confirm proper operation.
malfunctioning units, replace with new units, and retest.
B.
Adjust equipment for proper operation. Adjust operating components for proper operation
without binding.
C.
Test each piece of equipment to verify proper operation. Test and adjust controls and safeties.
Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment.
3.7
Remove
PROTECTION OF INSTALLED CONSTRUCTION
A.
Provide final protection and maintain conditions that ensure installed Work is without damage
or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion.
B.
Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for temperature and relative humidity.
KIB DISTRICT OFFICE
RESTROOM IMPROVEMENTS
EXECUTION
017300 - 7
3.8
CORRECTION OF THE WORK
A.
Repair or remove and replace defective construction. Restore damaged substrates and finishes.
Comply with requirements under section "Cutting and Patching."
1.
Repairing includes replacing defective parts, refinishing damaged surfaces, touching up
with matching materials, and properly adjusting operating equipment.
B.
Restore permanent facilities used during construction to their specified condition.
C.
Remove and replace damaged surfaces that are exposed to view if surfaces cannot be repaired
without visible evidence of repair.
D.
Repair components that do not operate properly. Remove and replace operating components
that cannot be repaired.
E.
Remove and replace chipped, scratched, and broken glass or reflective surfaces.
END OF SECTION 017300
KIB DISTRICT OFFICE
RESTROOM IMPROVEMENTS
EXECUTION
017300 - 8
SECTION 017700 - CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for contract closeout, including,
but not limited to, the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
B.
Related Requirements:
1.
1.3
Substantial Completion procedures.
Final completion procedures.
Warranties.
Final cleaning.
Repair of the Work.
Section 017300 "Execution" for progress cleaning of Project site.
SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION PROCEDURES
A.
Contractor's List of Incomplete Items: Prepare and submit a list of items to be completed and
corrected (Contractor's punch list), indicating the value of each item on the list and reasons why
the Work is incomplete.
B.
Submittals Prior to Substantial Completion: Complete the following a minimum of 10 days
prior to requesting inspection for determining date of Substantial Completion. List items below
that are incomplete at time of request.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Certificates of Release: Obtain and submit releases from authorities having jurisdiction
permitting Owner unrestricted use of the Work and access to services and utilities.
Include occupancy permits, operating certificates, and similar releases.
Submit closeout submittals specified in other Division 01 Sections, including project
record documents, operation and maintenance manuals.
Submit closeout submittals specified in individual Sections, including specific warranties,
workmanship bonds, maintenance service agreements, final certifications, and similar
documents.
Submit maintenance material submittals specified in individual Sections, including tools,
spare parts, extra materials, and similar items, and deliver to location designated by
Owner. Label with manufacturer's name and model number where applicable.
Submit changeover information related to Owner's occupancy, use, operation, and
maintenance.
KIB DISTRICT OFFICE
RESTROOM IMPROVEMENTS
CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES
017700 - 1
C.
Procedures Prior to Substantial Completion: Complete the following a minimum of 7 days prior
to requesting inspection for determining date of Substantial Completion. List items below that
are incomplete at time of request.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
D.
Inspection: Submit a written request for inspection to determine Substantial Completion a
minimum of 7days prior to date the work will be completed and ready for final inspection and
tests. On receipt of request, Architect will either proceed with inspection or notify Contractor of
unfulfilled requirements. Architect will prepare the Certificate of Substantial Completion after
inspection or will notify Contractor of items, either on Contractor's list or additional items
identified by Architect, that must be completed or corrected before certificate will be issued.
1.
2.
1.4
Make final changeover of permanent locks and deliver keys to Owner. Advise Owner's
personnel of changeover in security provisions.
Complete startup and testing of systems and equipment.
Perform preventive maintenance on equipment used prior to Substantial Completion.
Terminate and remove temporary facilities from Project site, along with mockups,
construction tools, and similar elements.
Complete final cleaning requirements, including touchup painting.
Touch up and otherwise repair and restore marred exposed finishes to eliminate visual
defects.
Reinspection: Request reinspection when the Work identified in previous inspections as
incomplete is completed or corrected.
Results of completed inspection will form the basis of requirements for final completion.
FINAL COMPLETION PROCEDURES
A.
Submittals Prior to Final Completion: Before requesting final inspection for determining final
completion, complete the following:
1.
2.
3.
B.
Submit a final Application for Payment.
Certified List of Incomplete Items: Submit certified copy of Architect's Substantial
Completion inspection list of items to be completed or corrected (punch list), endorsed
and dated by Architect. Certified copy of the list shall state that each item has been
completed or otherwise resolved for acceptance.
Certificate of Insurance: Submit evidence of final, continuing insurance coverage
complying with insurance requirements.
Inspection: Submit a written request for final inspection to determine acceptance a minimum of
10 days prior to date the work will be completed and ready for final inspection and tests. On
receipt of request, Architect and Owner’s representative will either proceed with inspection or
notify Contractor of unfulfilled requirements. Architect will prepare a final Certificate for
Payment after inspection or will notify Contractor of construction that must be completed or
corrected before certificate will be issued.
1.
Reinspection: Request reinspection when the Work identified in previous inspections as
incomplete is completed or corrected.
KIB DISTRICT OFFICE
RESTROOM IMPROVEMENTS
CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES
017700 - 2
1.5
LIST OF INCOMPLETE ITEMS (PUNCH LIST)
A.
Organization of List: Include name and identification of each space and area affected by
construction operations for incomplete items and items needing correction including, if
necessary, areas disturbed by Contractor that are outside the limits of construction.
1.
2.
3.
Organize list of spaces in sequential order,.
Organize items applying to each space by major element, including categories for ceiling,
individual walls, floors, equipment, and building systems.
Include the following information at the top of each page:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
4.
1.6
Project name.
Date.
Name of Architect
Name of Contractor.
Page number.
Submit list of incomplete items.
SUBMITTAL OF PROJECT WARRANTIES
A.
Time of Submittal: Submit written warranties on request of Architect for designated portions of
the Work where commencement of warranties other than date of Substantial Completion is
indicated, or when delay in submittal of warranties might limit Owner's rights under warranty.
B.
Partial Occupancy: Submit properly executed warranties within 15 days of completion of
designated portions of the Work that are completed and occupied or used by Owner during
construction period by separate agreement with Contractor.
C.
Organize warranty documents into an orderly sequence based on the table of contents of Project
Manual.
1.
2.
3.
Bind warranties and bonds in heavy-duty, three-ring, vinyl-covered, loose-leaf binders,
thickness as necessary to accommodate contents, and sized to receive 8-1/2-by-11-inch
(215-by-280-mm) paper.
Provide heavy paper dividers with plastic-covered tabs for each separate warranty. Mark
tab to identify the product or installation. Provide a typed description of the product or
installation, including the name of the product and the name, address, and telephone
number of Installer.
Identify each binder on the front and spine with the typed or printed title
"WARRANTIES," Project name, and name of Contractor.
KIB DISTRICT OFFICE
RESTROOM IMPROVEMENTS
CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES
017700 - 3
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MATERIALS
A.
Cleaning Agents: Use cleaning materials and agents recommended by manufacturer or
fabricator of the surface to be cleaned. Do not use cleaning agents that are potentially hazardous
to health or property or that might damage finished surfaces.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
FINAL CLEANING
A.
General: Perform final cleaning. Conduct cleaning and waste-removal operations to comply
with local laws and ordinances and Federal and local environmental and antipollution
regulations.
B.
Cleaning: Employ experienced workers or professional cleaners for final cleaning. Clean each
surface or unit to condition expected in an average commercial building cleaning and
maintenance program. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions.
1.
Complete the following cleaning operations before requesting inspection for certification
of Substantial Completion for entire Project or for a designated portion of Project:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
i.
j.
k.
Clean Project site, yard, and grounds, in areas disturbed by construction activities,
including landscape development areas, of rubbish, waste material, litter, and other
foreign substances.
Remove tools, construction equipment, machinery, and surplus material from
Project site.
Vacuum carpet and similar soft surfaces, removing debris and excess nap; clean
according to manufacturer's recommendations if visible soil or stains remain.
Clean transparent materials, including mirrors and glass in doors and windows.
Remove glazing compounds and other noticeable, vision-obscuring materials.
Polish mirrors and glass, taking care not to scratch surfaces.
Remove labels that are not permanent.
Wipe surfaces of mechanical and electrical equipment and similar equipment.
Remove excess lubrication, paint and mortar droppings, and other foreign
substances.
Clean plumbing fixtures to a sanitary condition, free of stains, including stains
resulting from water exposure.
Replace disposable air filters and clean permanent air filters. Clean exposed
surfaces of diffusers, registers, and grills.
Clean ducts, blowers, and coils if units were operated without filters during
construction or that display contamination with particulate matter on inspection.
Clean light fixtures, lamps, globes, and reflectors to function with full efficiency.
Leave Project clean and ready for occupancy.
KIB DISTRICT OFFICE
RESTROOM IMPROVEMENTS
CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES
017700 - 4
3.2
REPAIR OF THE WORK
A.
Complete repair and restoration operations before requesting inspection for determination of
Substantial Completion.
B.
Repair or remove and replace defective construction. Repairing includes replacing defective
parts, refinishing damaged surfaces, touching up with matching materials, and properly
adjusting operating equipment. Where damaged or worn items cannot be repaired or restored,
provide replacements. Remove and replace operating components that cannot be repaired.
Restore damaged construction and permanent facilities used during construction to specified
condition.
1.
2.
Remove and replace chipped, scratched, and broken glass, reflective surfaces, and other
damaged transparent materials.
Touch up and otherwise repair and restore marred or exposed finishes and surfaces.
Replace finishes and surfaces that that already show evidence of repair or restoration.
a.
Do not paint over "UL" and other required labels and identification, including
mechanical and electrical nameplates. Remove paint applied to required labels and
identification.
END OF SECTION 017700
KIB DISTRICT OFFICE
RESTROOM IMPROVEMENTS
CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES
017700 - 5
SECTION 024119 - SELECTIVE DEMOLITION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
Section Includes:
1.
2.
B.
1.3
Demolition and removal of selected portions of building or structure.
Disconnecting, capping or sealing, and abandoning in place or removing site utilities as
indicated on the drawings.
Related Sections:
1.
Section 011000 "Summary" for restrictions on the use of the premises, Owner-occupancy
requirements, and phasing requirements.
2.
Section 015000 "Temporary Facilities and Controls" for temporary protection of existing
trees and plants that are affected by selective demolition.
3.
Section 017300 "Execution" for cutting and patching procedures.
DEFINITIONS
A.
Remove: Detach items from existing construction and legally dispose of them off-site unless
indicated to be removed and salvaged or removed and reinstalled.
B.
Remove and Salvage: Carefully detach from existing construction, in a manner to prevent
damage, and deliver to Owner ready for reuse.
C.
Remove and Reinstall: Detach items from existing construction, prepare for reuse, and reinstall
where indicated.
D.
Existing to Remain: Existing items of construction that are not to be permanently removed and
that are not otherwise indicated to be removed, removed and salvaged, or removed and
reinstalled.
1.4
MATERIALS OWNERSHIP
A.
Unless otherwise indicated, demolition waste becomes property of Contractor.
KIB DISTRICT OFFICE
RESTROOM IMPROVEMENTS
SELECTIVE DEMOLITION
024119 - 1
1.5
PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS
A.
Predemolition Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.
1.
2.
3.
4.
1.6
Inspect and discuss condition of construction to be selectively demolished.
Review and finalize selective demolition schedule and verify availability of materials,
demolition personnel, equipment, and facilities needed to make progress and avoid
delays.
Review requirements of work performed by other trades that rely on substrates exposed
by selective demolition operations.
Review areas where existing construction is to remain and requires protection.
FIELD CONDITIONS
A.
Owner will occupy portions of building immediately adjacent to selective demolition area.
Conduct selective demolition so Owner's operations will not be disrupted.
B.
Conditions existing at time of inspection for bidding purpose will be maintained by Owner as
far as practical.
C.
Notify Architect of discrepancies between existing conditions and Drawings before proceeding
with selective demolition.
A.
Hazardous Materials: It is not expected that hazardous materials will be encountered in the
Work.
1.
If suspected hazardous materials are encountered, do not disturb; immediately notify
Architect and Owner. Hazardous materials will be removed by Owner under a separate
contract.
B.
Storage or sale of removed items or materials on-site is not permitted.
C.
Utility Service: Maintain existing utilities indicated to remain in service and protect them
against damage during selective demolition operations.
1.
1.7
Maintain fire-protection facilities in service during selective demolition operations.
WARRANTY
A.
Existing Warranties: Remove, replace, patch, and repair materials and surfaces cut or damaged
during selective demolition, by methods and with materials so as not to void existing warranties.
Notify warrantor before proceeding. Existing warranties include the following:
KIB DISTRICT OFFICE
RESTROOM IMPROVEMENTS
SELECTIVE DEMOLITION
024119 - 2
PART 2 - EXECUTION
2.1
EXAMINATION
A.
Verify that utilities have been disconnected and capped before starting selective demolition
operations.
B.
Review record documents of existing construction provided by Owner. Owner does not
guarantee that existing conditions are same as those indicated in record documents.
C.
Survey existing conditions and correlate with requirements indicated to determine extent of
selective demolition required.
D.
When unanticipated mechanical, electrical, or structural elements that conflict with intended
function or design are encountered, investigate and measure the nature and extent of conflict.
Promptly submit a written report to Architect.
2.2
UTILITY SERVICES AND MECHANICAL/ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
A.
Existing Services/Systems to Remain:
protect them against damage.
1.
B.
Maintain services/systems indicated to remain and
Comply with requirements for existing services/systems interruptions specified in
Section 011000 "Summary."
Existing Services/Systems to Be Removed, Relocated, or Abandoned: Locate, identify,
disconnect, and seal or cap off indicated utility services and mechanical/electrical systems
serving areas to be selectively demolished.
1.
2.
3.
Owner will arrange to shut off indicated services/systems when requested by Contractor.
If services/systems are required to be removed, relocated, or abandoned, provide
temporary services/systems that bypass area of selective demolition and that maintain
continuity of services/systems to other parts of building.
Disconnect, demolish, and remove fire-suppression systems, plumbing, and HVAC
systems, equipment, and components indicated to be removed.
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
Piping to Be Removed: Remove portion of piping indicated to be removed and
cap or plug remaining piping with same or compatible piping material.
Piping to Be Abandoned in Place: Drain piping and cap or plug piping with same
or compatible piping material.
Equipment to Be Removed: Disconnect and cap services and remove equipment.
Equipment to Be Removed and Reinstalled: Disconnect and cap services and
remove, clean, and store equipment; when appropriate, reinstall, reconnect, and
make equipment operational.
Equipment to Be Removed and Salvaged: Disconnect and cap services and
remove equipment and deliver to Owner.
Ducts to Be Removed: Remove portion of ducts indicated to be removed and plug
remaining ducts with same or compatible ductwork material.
KIB DISTRICT OFFICE
RESTROOM IMPROVEMENTS
SELECTIVE DEMOLITION
024119 - 3
g.
2.3
Ducts to Be Abandoned in Place: Cap or plug ducts with same or compatible
ductwork material.
PREPARATION
A.
Temporary Facilities: Provide temporary barricades and other protection required to prevent
injury to people and damage to adjacent buildings and facilities to remain.
1.
2.
3.
4.
B.
2.4
Provide protection to ensure safe passage of people around selective demolition area and
to and from occupied portions of building.
Protect walls, ceilings, floors, and other existing finish work that are to remain or that are
exposed during selective demolition operations.
Cover and protect furniture, furnishings, and equipment that have not been removed.
Comply with requirements for temporary enclosures, dust control, heating, and cooling
specified in Section 015000 "Temporary Facilities and Controls."
Temporary Shoring: Provide and maintain shoring, bracing, and structural supports as required
to preserve stability and prevent movement, settlement, or collapse of construction and finishes
to remain, and to prevent unexpected or uncontrolled movement or collapse of construction
being demolished.
SELECTIVE DEMOLITION, GENERAL
A.
General: Demolish and remove existing construction only to the extent required by new
construction and as indicated. Use methods required to complete the Work within limitations of
governing regulations and as follows:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
Proceed with selective demolition systematically, from higher to lower level. Complete
selective demolition operations above each floor or tier before disturbing supporting
members on the next lower level.
Neatly cut openings and holes plumb, square, and true to dimensions required. Use
cutting methods least likely to damage construction to remain or adjoining construction.
Use hand tools or small power tools designed for sawing or grinding, not hammering and
chopping, to minimize disturbance of adjacent surfaces. Temporarily cover openings to
remain.
Cut or drill from the exposed or finished side into concealed surfaces to avoid marring
existing finished surfaces.
Do not use cutting torches until work area is cleared of flammable materials. At
concealed spaces, such as duct and pipe interiors, verify condition and contents of hidden
space before starting flame-cutting operations. Maintain fire watch and portable firesuppression devices during flame-cutting operations.
Maintain adequate ventilation when using cutting torches.
Remove decayed, vermin-infested, or otherwise dangerous or unsuitable materials and
promptly dispose of off-site.
Remove structural framing members and lower to ground by method suitable to avoid
free fall and to prevent ground impact or dust generation.
Locate selective demolition equipment and remove debris and materials so as not to
impose excessive loads on supporting walls, floors, or framing.
KIB DISTRICT OFFICE
RESTROOM IMPROVEMENTS
SELECTIVE DEMOLITION
024119 - 4
B.
2.5
Existing Items to Remain: Protect construction indicated to remain against damage and soiling
during selective demolition. When permitted by Architect, items may be removed to a suitable,
protected storage location during selective demolition and cleaned and reinstalled in their
original locations after selective demolition operations are complete.
SELECTIVE DEMOLITION PROCEDURES FOR SPECIFIC MATERIALS
A.
Concrete: Demolish in sections. Cut concrete full depth at junctures with construction to
remain and at regular intervals using power-driven saw, then remove concrete between saw
cuts.
B.
Masonry: Demolish in small sections. Cut masonry at junctures with construction to remain,
using power-driven saw, then remove masonry between saw cuts.
C.
Concrete Slabs-on-Grade: Saw-cut perimeter of area to be demolished, then break up and
remove.
D.
Resilient Floor Coverings:
Remove floor coverings and adhesive according to
recommendations in RFCI's "Recommended Work Practices for the Removal of Resilient Floor
Coverings."
2.6
DISPOSAL OF DEMOLISHED MATERIALS
A.
General: Except for items or materials indicated to be recycled, reused, salvaged, reinstalled, or
otherwise indicated to remain Owner's property, remove demolished materials from Project
site and legally dispose of them in an EPA-approved landfill.
1.
2.
3.
Do not allow demolished materials to accumulate on-site.
Remove and transport debris in a manner that will prevent spillage on adjacent surfaces
and areas.
Remove debris from elevated portions of building by chute, hoist, or other device that
will convey debris to grade level in a controlled descent.
B.
Burning: Do not burn demolished materials.
C.
Disposal: Transport demolished materials off Owner's property and legally dispose of them.
2.7
CLEANING
A.
Clean adjacent structures and improvements of dust, dirt, and debris caused by selective
demolition operations. Return adjacent areas to condition existing before selective demolition
operations began.
END OF SECTION 024119
KIB DISTRICT OFFICE
RESTROOM IMPROVEMENTS
SELECTIVE DEMOLITION
024119 - 5
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
Section includes cast-in-place concrete, including formwork, reinforcement, concrete materials,
mixture design, placement procedures, and finishes, for the following:
1.
1.2
Slabs-on-grade.
DEFINITIONS
A.
1.3
Cementitious Materials: Portland cement alone or in combination with one or more of the
following: blended hydraulic cement, fly ash and other pozzolans, ground granulated blastfurnace slag, and silica fume; subject to compliance with requirements.
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
B.
Design Mixtures: For each concrete mixture. Submit alternate design mixtures when
characteristics of materials, Project conditions, weather, test results, or other circumstances
warrant adjustments.
1.
Indicate amounts of mixing water to be withheld for later addition at Project site.
C.
Steel Reinforcement Shop Drawings: Placing drawings that detail fabrication, bending, and
placement. Include bar sizes, lengths, material, grade, bar schedules, stirrup spacing, bent bar
diagrams, bar arrangement, splices and laps, mechanical connections, tie spacing, hoop spacing,
and supports for concrete reinforcement.
D.
Construction Joint Layout: Indicate proposed construction joints required to construct the
structure.
1.
1.4
Location of construction joints is subject to approval of the Architect.
INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A.
1.5
Floor surface flatness and levelness measurements indicating compliance with specified
tolerances.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Manufacturer Qualifications: A firm experienced in manufacturing ready-mixed concrete
products and that complies with ASTM C 94/C 94M requirements for production facilities and
equipment.
KIB DISTRICT OFFICE
RESTROOM IMPROVEMENTS
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
33000 - 1
B.
Source Limitations: Obtain each type or class of cementitious material of the same brand from
the same manufacturer's plant, obtain aggregate from single source, and obtain admixtures from
single source from single manufacturer.
C.
ACI Publications: Comply with the following unless modified by requirements in the Contract
Documents:
1.
2.
ACI 301, "Specifications for Structural Concrete," Sections 1 through 5.
ACI 117, "Specifications for Tolerances for Concrete Construction and Materials."
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
FORM-FACING MATERIALS
A.
Rough-Formed Finished Concrete: Plywood, lumber, metal, or another approved material.
Provide lumber dressed on at least two edges and one side for tight fit.
B.
Chamfer Strips: Wood, metal, PVC, or rubber strips, 3/4 by 3/4 inch, minimum.
C.
Rustication Strips: Wood, metal, PVC, or rubber strips, kerfed for ease of form removal.
D.
Form-Release Agent: Commercially formulated form-release agent that will not bond with,
stain, or adversely affect concrete surfaces and will not impair subsequent treatments of
concrete surfaces.
1.
E.
Form Ties: Factory-fabricated, removable or snap-off metal or glass-fiber-reinforced plastic
form ties designed to resist lateral pressure of fresh concrete on forms and to prevent spalling of
concrete on removal.
1.
2.
2.2
Formulate form-release agent with rust inhibitor for steel form-facing materials.
Furnish units that will leave no corrodible metal closer than 1 inch to the plane of
exposed concrete surface.
Furnish ties that, when removed, will leave holes no larger than 1 inch in diameter in
concrete surface.
STEEL REINFORCEMENT
A.
2.3
Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 615/A 615M, Grade 60, deformed.
REINFORCEMENT ACCESSORIES
A.
Bar Supports: Bolsters, chairs, spacers, and other devices for spacing, supporting, and fastening
reinforcing bars and welded wire reinforcement in place. Manufacture bar supports from steel
wire, plastic, or precast concrete according to CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice," of greater
compressive strength than concrete and as follows:
KIB DISTRICT OFFICE
RESTROOM IMPROVEMENTS
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
33000 - 2
2.4
CONCRETE MATERIALS
A.
Cementitious Material: Use the following cementitious materials, of the same type, brand, and
source, throughout Project:
1.
B.
Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type I, Type II, or Type I/II, gray.
Normal-Weight Aggregates: ASTM C 33, Class 3S coarse aggregate or better, graded. Provide
aggregates from a single source with documented service record data of at least 10 years'
satisfactory service in similar applications and service conditions using similar aggregates and
cementitious materials.
1.
2.
Maximum Coarse-Aggregate Size: 1 inch nominal.
Fine Aggregate: Free of materials with deleterious reactivity to alkali in cement.
C.
Lightweight Aggregate: ASTM C 330, 1-inch nominal maximum aggregate size.
D.
Water: ASTM C 94/C 94M and potable.
2.5
ADMIXTURES
A.
Air-Entraining Admixture: ASTM C 260.
B.
Chemical Admixtures: Provide admixtures certified by manufacturer to be compatible with
other admixtures and that will not contribute water-soluble chloride ions exceeding those
permitted in hardened concrete. Do not use calcium chloride or admixtures containing calcium
chloride.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
2.6
Water-Reducing Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type A.
Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type B.
Water-Reducing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type D.
High-Range, Water-Reducing Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type F.
High-Range, Water-Reducing and Retarding Admixture:
ASTM C 494/C 494M,
Type G.
Plasticizing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 1017/C 1017M, Type II.
VAPOR RETARDERS
A.
Sheet Vapor Retarder: ASTM E 1745, Class A. Include manufacturer's recommended adhesive
or pressure-sensitive tape.
1.
Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be
incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
Fortifiber Building Systems Group; Moistop Ultra 15.
Meadows, W. R., Inc.; Perminator 15 mil.
Raven Industries Inc.; Vapor Block 15.
Reef Industries, Inc.; Griffolyn 15 mil Green.
Stego Industries, LLC; Stego Wrap 15 mil Class A.
KIB DISTRICT OFFICE
RESTROOM IMPROVEMENTS
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
33000 - 3
2.7
CURING MATERIALS
A.
Evaporation Retarder: Waterborne, monomolecular film forming, manufactured for application
to fresh concrete.
1.
Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be
incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
Axim Italcementi Group, Inc.; CATEXOL CimFilm.
BASF Construction Chemicals - Building Systems; Confilm.
ChemMasters; SprayFilm.
Conspec by Dayton Superior; Aquafilm.
Dayton Superior Corporation; Sure Film (J-74).
Edoco by Dayton Superior; BurkeFilm.
Euclid Chemical Company (The), an RPM company; Eucobar.
B.
Absorptive Cover: AASHTO M 182, Class 2, burlap cloth made from jute or kenaf, weighing
approximately 9 oz./sq. yd. when dry.
C.
Moisture-Retaining Cover:
sheet.
D.
Water: Potable.
2.8
ASTM C 171, polyethylene film or white burlap-polyethylene
RELATED MATERIALS
A.
Expansion- and Isolation-Joint-Filler Strips: ASTM D 1751, asphalt-saturated cellulosic fiber
or ASTM D 1752, cork or self-expanding cork.
B.
Semirigid Joint Filler: Two-component, semirigid, 100 percent solids, epoxy resin with a
Type A shore durometer hardness of 80 per ASTM D 2240.
C.
Bonding Agent: ASTM C 1059/C 1059M, Type II, non-redispersible, acrylic emulsion or
styrene butadiene.
D.
Epoxy Bonding Adhesive: ASTM C 881, two-component epoxy resin, capable of humid curing
and bonding to damp surfaces, of class suitable for application temperature and of grade to suit
requirements, and as follows:
1.
2.9
Types I and II, non-load bearing, for bonding hardened or freshly mixed concrete to
hardened concrete.
REPAIR MATERIALS
A.
Repair Underlayment: Cement-based, polymer-modified, self-leveling product that can be
applied in thicknesses from 1/8 inch and that can be feathered at edges to match adjacent floor
elevations.
1.
Cement Binder: ASTM C 150, portland cement or hydraulic or blended hydraulic
cement as defined in ASTM C 219.
KIB DISTRICT OFFICE
RESTROOM IMPROVEMENTS
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
33000 - 4
2.
3.
4.
B.
Repair Overlayment: Cement-based, polymer-modified, self-leveling product that can be
applied in thicknesses from 1/4 inch and that can be filled in over a scarified surface to match
adjacent floor elevations.
1.
2.
3.
4.
2.10
A.
Cement Binder: ASTM C 150, portland cement or hydraulic or blended hydraulic
cement as defined in ASTM C 219.
Primer: Product of topping manufacturer recommended for substrate, conditions, and
application.
Aggregate: Well-graded, washed gravel, 1/8 to 1/4 inch or coarse sand as recommended
by topping manufacturer.
Compressive Strength: Not less than 5000 psi at 28 days when tested according to
ASTM C 109/C 109M.
CONCRETE MIXTURES, GENERAL
Prepare design mixtures for each type and strength of concrete, proportioned on the basis of
laboratory trial mixture or field test data, or both, according to ACI 301.
1.
B.
Primer: Product of underlayment manufacturer recommended for substrate, conditions,
and application.
Aggregate: Well-graded, washed gravel, 1/8 to 1/4 inch or coarse sand as recommended
by underlayment manufacturer.
Compressive Strength: Not less than 4100 psi at 28 days when tested according to
ASTM C 109/C 109M.
Use a qualified independent testing agency for preparing and reporting proposed mixture
designs based on laboratory trial mixtures.
Cementitious Materials: Limit percentage, by weight, of cementitious materials other than
portland cement in concrete as follows:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Fly Ash: 25 percent.
Combined Fly Ash and Pozzolan: 25 percent.
Ground Granulated Blast-Furnace Slag: 50 percent.
Combined Fly Ash or Pozzolan and Ground Granulated Blast-Furnace Slag: 50 percent
portland cement minimum, with fly ash or pozzolan not exceeding 25 percent.
Silica Fume: 10 percent.
C.
Limit water-soluble, chloride-ion content in hardened concrete to 0.15 percent by weight of
cement.
D.
Admixtures: Use admixtures according to manufacturer's written instructions.
1.
2.
3.
Use water-reducing high-range water-reducing or plasticizing admixture in concrete, as
required, for placement and workability.
Use water-reducing and retarding admixture when required by high temperatures, low
humidity, or other adverse placement conditions.
Use water-reducing admixture in pumped concrete, concrete for heavy-use industrial
slabs and parking structure slabs, concrete required to be watertight, and concrete with a
water-cementitious materials ratio below 0.50.
KIB DISTRICT OFFICE
RESTROOM IMPROVEMENTS
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
33000 - 5
2.11
A.
CONCRETE MIXTURES FOR BUILDING ELEMENTS
Slabs-on-Grade: Proportion normal-weight concrete mixture as follows:
1.
2.
3.
4.
B.
Concrete Toppings: Proportion normal-weight concrete mixture as follows:
1.
2.
3.
2.12
A.
2.13
A.
Minimum Compressive Strength: 4000 psi at 28 days.
Minimum Cementitious Materials Content: 470 lb/cu. yd..
Slump Limit: 4 inches, plus or minus 1 inch.
Air Content: Do not allow air content of trowel-finished floors to exceed 3 percent.
Minimum Compressive Strength: 4000 psi at 28 days.
Minimum Cementitious Materials Content: 470 lb/cu. yd..
Slump Limit: 4 inches, plus or minus 1 inch.
FABRICATING REINFORCEMENT
Fabricate steel reinforcement according to CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice."
CONCRETE MIXING
Ready-Mixed Concrete:
Measure, batch, mix, and deliver concrete according to
ASTM C 94/C 94M, and furnish batch ticket information.
1.
When air temperature is between 85 and 90 deg F, reduce mixing and delivery time from
1-1/2 hours to 75 minutes; when air temperature is above 90 deg F, reduce mixing and
delivery time to 60 minutes.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
FORMWORK
A.
Design, erect, shore, brace, and maintain formwork, according to ACI 301, to support vertical,
lateral, static, and dynamic loads, and construction loads that might be applied, until structure
can support such loads.
B.
Construct formwork so concrete members and structures are of size, shape, alignment,
elevation, and position indicated, within tolerance limits of ACI 117.
C.
Limit concrete surface irregularities, designated by ACI 347 as abrupt or gradual, as follows:
1.
Class B, 1/4 inch for rough-formed finished surfaces.
D.
Construct forms tight enough to prevent loss of concrete mortar.
E.
Fabricate forms for easy removal without hammering or prying against concrete surfaces.
Provide crush or wrecking plates where stripping may damage cast concrete surfaces. Provide
top forms for inclined surfaces steeper than 1.5 horizontal to 1 vertical.
KIB DISTRICT OFFICE
RESTROOM IMPROVEMENTS
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
33000 - 6
1.
2.
Install keyways, reglets, recesses, and the like, for easy removal.
Do not use rust-stained steel form-facing material.
F.
Set edge forms, bulkheads, and intermediate screed strips for slabs to achieve required
elevations and slopes in finished concrete surfaces. Provide and secure units to support screed
strips; use strike-off templates or compacting-type screeds.
G.
Provide temporary openings for cleanouts and inspection ports where interior area of formwork
is inaccessible. Close openings with panels tightly fitted to forms and securely braced to
prevent loss of concrete mortar. Locate temporary openings in forms at inconspicuous
locations.
H.
Chamfer exterior corners and edges of permanently exposed concrete.
I.
Form openings, chases, offsets, sinkages, keyways, reglets, blocking, screeds, and bulkheads
required in the Work. Determine sizes and locations from trades providing such items.
J.
Clean forms and adjacent surfaces to receive concrete. Remove chips, wood, sawdust, dirt, and
other debris just before placing concrete.
K.
Retighten forms and bracing before placing concrete, as required, to prevent mortar leaks and
maintain proper alignment.
L.
Coat contact surfaces of forms with form-release agent, according to manufacturer's written
instructions, before placing reinforcement.
3.2
EMBEDDED ITEMS
A.
Place and secure anchorage devices and other embedded items required for adjoining work that
is attached to or supported by cast-in-place concrete. Use setting drawings, templates,
diagrams, instructions, and directions furnished with items to be embedded.
1.
3.3
Install anchor rods, accurately located, to elevations required and complying with
tolerances in Section 7.5 of AISC's "Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and
Bridges."
REMOVING AND REUSING FORMS
A.
General: Formwork for sides of beams, walls, columns, and similar parts of the Work that does
not support weight of concrete may be removed after cumulatively curing at not less than 50
deg F for 24 hours after placing concrete. Concrete has to be hard enough to not be damaged by
form-removal operations and curing and protection operations need to be maintained.
B.
Clean and repair surfaces of forms to be reused in the Work. Split, frayed, delaminated, or
otherwise damaged form-facing material will not be acceptable for exposed surfaces. Apply
new form-release agent.
C.
When forms are reused, clean surfaces, remove fins and laitance, and tighten to close joints.
Align and secure joints to avoid offsets. Do not use patched forms for exposed concrete
surfaces unless approved by Architect.
KIB DISTRICT OFFICE
RESTROOM IMPROVEMENTS
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
33000 - 7
3.4
VAPOR RETARDERS
A.
Sheet Vapor Retarders: Place, protect, and repair sheet vapor retarder according to
ASTM E 1643 and manufacturer's written instructions.
1.
3.5
Lap joints 6 inches and seal with manufacturer's recommended tape.
STEEL REINFORCEMENT
A.
General: Comply with CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice" for placing reinforcement.
1.
Do not cut or puncture vapor retarder. Repair damage and reseal vapor retarder before
placing concrete.
B.
Clean reinforcement of loose rust and mill scale, earth, ice, and other foreign materials that
would reduce bond to concrete.
C.
Accurately position, support, and secure reinforcement against displacement. Locate and
support reinforcement with bar supports to maintain minimum concrete cover. Do not tack
weld crossing reinforcing bars.
D.
Set wire ties with ends directed into concrete, not toward exposed concrete surfaces.
3.6
JOINTS
A.
General: Construct joints true to line with faces perpendicular to surface plane of concrete.
B.
Construction Joints: Install so strength and appearance of concrete are not impaired, at
locations indicated or as approved by Architect.
1.
2.
C.
Contraction Joints in Slabs-on-Grade: Form weakened-plane contraction joints, sectioning
concrete into areas as indicated. Construct contraction joints for a depth equal to at least onefourth of concrete thickness as follows:
1.
3.7
Place joints perpendicular to main reinforcement. Continue reinforcement across
construction joints unless otherwise indicated. Do not continue reinforcement through
sides of strip placements of floors and slabs.
Use epoxy-bonding adhesive at locations where fresh concrete is placed against hardened
or partially hardened concrete surfaces.
Grooved Joints: Form contraction joints after initial floating by grooving and finishing
each edge of joint to a radius of 1/8 inch. Repeat grooving of contraction joints after
applying surface finishes. Eliminate groover tool marks on concrete surfaces.
CONCRETE PLACEMENT
A.
Before placing concrete, verify that installation of formwork, reinforcement, and embedded
items is complete and that required inspections have been performed.
KIB DISTRICT OFFICE
RESTROOM IMPROVEMENTS
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
33000 - 8
B.
Do not add water to concrete during delivery, at Project site, or during placement unless
approved by Architect.
C.
Deposit concrete continuously in one layer or in horizontal layers of such thickness that no new
concrete will be placed on concrete that has hardened enough to cause seams or planes of
weakness. If a section cannot be placed continuously, provide construction joints as indicated.
Deposit concrete to avoid segregation.
1.
2.
3.
D.
Deposit and consolidate concrete for floors and slabs in a continuous operation, within limits of
construction joints, until placement of a panel or section is complete.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
E.
Consolidate concrete during placement operations so concrete is thoroughly worked
around reinforcement and other embedded items and into corners.
Maintain reinforcement in position on chairs during concrete placement.
Screed slab surfaces with a straightedge and strike off to correct elevations.
Slope surfaces uniformly to drains where required.
Begin initial floating using bull floats or darbies to form a uniform and open-textured
surface plane, before excess bleedwater appears on the surface. Do not further disturb
slab surfaces before starting finishing operations.
Cold-Weather Placement: Comply with ACI 306.1 and as follows. Protect concrete work from
physical damage or reduced strength that could be caused by frost, freezing actions, or low
temperatures.
1.
2.
3.
3.8
Deposit concrete in horizontal layers of depth to not exceed formwork design pressures
and in a manner to avoid inclined construction joints.
Consolidate placed concrete with mechanical vibrating equipment according to ACI 301.
Do not use vibrators to transport concrete inside forms. Insert and withdraw vibrators
vertically at uniformly spaced locations to rapidly penetrate placed layer and at least 6
inches into preceding layer. Do not insert vibrators into lower layers of concrete that
have begun to lose plasticity. At each insertion, limit duration of vibration to time
necessary to consolidate concrete and complete embedment of reinforcement and other
embedded items without causing mixture constituents to segregate.
When average high and low temperature is expected to fall below 40 deg F for three
successive days, maintain delivered concrete mixture temperature within the temperature
range required by ACI 301.
Do not use frozen materials or materials containing ice or snow. Do not place concrete
on frozen subgrade or on subgrade containing frozen materials.
Do not use calcium chloride, salt, or other materials containing antifreeze agents or
chemical accelerators unless otherwise specified and approved in mixture designs.
FINISHING FLOORS AND SLABS
A.
General: Comply with ACI 302.1R recommendations for screeding, restraightening, and
finishing operations for concrete surfaces. Do not wet concrete surfaces.
B.
Scratch Finish: While still plastic, texture concrete surface that has been screeded and bullfloated or darbied. Use stiff brushes, brooms, or rakes to produce a profile amplitude of 1/4
inch in one direction.
KIB DISTRICT OFFICE
RESTROOM IMPROVEMENTS
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
33000 - 9
1.
C.
Float Finish: Consolidate surface with power-driven floats or by hand floating if area is small
or inaccessible to power driven floats. Restraighten, cut down high spots, and fill low spots.
Repeat float passes and restraightening until surface is left with a uniform, smooth, granular
texture.
1.
D.
E.
1.
Apply a trowel finish to surfaces indicated, exposed to view or to be covered with
resilient flooring, carpet, ceramic or quarry tile set over a cleavage membrane, paint, or
another thin-film-finish coating system.
2.
Finish and measure surface so gap at any point between concrete surface and an
unleveled, freestanding, 10-ft.- long straightedge resting on two high spots and placed
anywhere on the surface does not exceed 1/8 inch.
Trowel and Fine-Broom Finish: Apply a first trowel finish to surfaces indicated or where
ceramic or quarry tile is to be installed by either thickset or thin-set method. While concrete is
still plastic, slightly scarify surface with a fine broom.
Comply with flatness and levelness tolerances for trowel-finished floor surfaces.
Broom Finish: Apply a broom finish to exterior concrete platforms, steps, ramps, and
elsewhere as indicated.
1.
3.9
Apply float finish to surfaces indicated or to receive trowel finish.
Trowel Finish: After applying float finish, apply first troweling and consolidate concrete by
hand or power-driven trowel. Continue troweling passes and restraighten until surface is free of
trowel marks and uniform in texture and appearance. Grind smooth any surface defects that
would telegraph through applied coatings or floor coverings.
1.
F.
Apply scratch finish to surfaces indicated, to receive concrete floor toppings, or to
receive mortar setting beds for bonded cementitious floor finishes.
Immediately after float finishing, slightly roughen trafficked surface by brooming with
fiber-bristle broom perpendicular to main traffic route. Coordinate required final finish
with Architect before application.
MISCELLANEOUS CONCRETE ITEMS
A.
3.10
A.
Filling In: Fill in holes and openings left in concrete structures after work of other trades is in
place unless otherwise indicated. Mix, place, and cure concrete, as specified, to blend with inplace construction. Provide other miscellaneous concrete filling indicated or required to
complete the Work.
CONCRETE PROTECTING AND CURING
General: Protect freshly placed concrete from premature drying and excessive cold or hot
temperatures. Comply with ACI 306.1 for cold-weather protection and ACI 301 for hotweather protection during curing.
KIB DISTRICT OFFICE
RESTROOM IMPROVEMENTS
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
33000 - 10
B.
Evaporation Retarder: Apply evaporation retarder to unformed concrete surfaces if hot, dry, or
windy conditions cause moisture loss approaching 0.2 lb/sq. ft. x h before and during finishing
operations. Apply according to manufacturer's written instructions after placing, screeding, and
bull floating or darbying concrete, but before float finishing.
C.
Cure concrete according to ACI 308.1, by one or a combination of the following methods:
1.
Moisture Curing: Keep surfaces continuously moist for not less than seven days with the
following materials:
a.
b.
c.
2.
Moisture-Retaining-Cover Curing: Cover concrete surfaces with moisture-retaining
cover for curing concrete, placed in widest practicable width, with sides and ends lapped
at least 12 inches, and sealed by waterproof tape or adhesive. Cure for not less than
seven days. Immediately repair any holes or tears during curing period using cover
material and waterproof tape.
a.
b.
c.
3.11
Water.
Continuous water-fog spray.
Absorptive cover, water saturated, and kept continuously wet. Cover concrete
surfaces and edges with 12-inch lap over adjacent absorptive covers.
Moisture cure or use moisture-retaining covers to cure concrete surfaces to receive
floor coverings.
Moisture cure or use moisture-retaining covers to cure concrete surfaces to receive
penetrating liquid floor treatments.
Cure concrete surfaces to receive floor coverings with either a moisture-retaining
cover or a curing compound that the manufacturer certifies will not interfere with
bonding of floor covering used on Project.
JOINT FILLING
A.
Prepare, clean, and install joint filler according to manufacturer's written instructions.
B.
Remove dirt, debris, saw cuttings, curing compounds, and sealers from joints; leave contact
faces of joint clean and dry.
C.
Install semirigid joint filler full depth in saw-cut joints and at least 2 inches deep in formed
joints. Overfill joint and trim joint filler flush with top of joint after hardening.
3.12
CONCRETE SURFACE REPAIRS
A.
Defective Concrete: Repair and patch defective areas when approved by Architect. Remove
and replace concrete that cannot be repaired and patched to Architect's approval.
B.
Patching Mortar: Mix dry-pack patching mortar, consisting of one part portland cement to two
and one-half parts fine aggregate passing a No. 16 sieve, using only enough water for handling
and placing.
KIB DISTRICT OFFICE
RESTROOM IMPROVEMENTS
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
33000 - 11
C.
Repairing Formed Surfaces: Surface defects include color and texture irregularities, cracks,
spalls, air bubbles, honeycombs, rock pockets, fins and other projections on the surface, and
stains and other discolorations that cannot be removed by cleaning.
1.
2.
3.
D.
Immediately after form removal, cut out honeycombs, rock pockets, and voids more than
1/2 inch in any dimension to solid concrete. Limit cut depth to 3/4 inch. Make edges of
cuts perpendicular to concrete surface. Clean, dampen with water, and brush-coat holes
and voids with bonding agent. Fill and compact with patching mortar before bonding
agent has dried. Fill form-tie voids with patching mortar or cone plugs secured in place
with bonding agent.
Repair defects on surfaces exposed to view by blending white portland cement and
standard portland cement so that, when dry, patching mortar will match surrounding
color. Patch a test area at inconspicuous locations to verify mixture and color match
before proceeding with patching. Compact mortar in place and strike off slightly higher
than surrounding surface.
Repair defects on concealed formed surfaces that affect concrete's durability and
structural performance as determined by Architect.
Repairing Unformed Surfaces: Test unformed surfaces, such as floors and slabs, for finish and
verify surface tolerances specified for each surface. Correct low and high areas. Test surfaces
sloped to drain for trueness of slope and smoothness; use a sloped template.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Repair finished surfaces containing defects. Surface defects include spalls, popouts,
honeycombs, rock pockets, crazing and cracks in excess of 0.01 inch wide or that
penetrate to reinforcement or completely through unreinforced sections regardless of
width, and other objectionable conditions.
After concrete has cured at least 14 days, correct high areas by grinding.
Correct localized low areas during or immediately after completing surface finishing
operations by cutting out low areas and replacing with patching mortar. Finish repaired
areas to blend into adjacent concrete.
Correct other low areas scheduled to receive floor coverings with a repair underlayment.
Prepare, mix, and apply repair underlayment and primer according to manufacturer's
written instructions to produce a smooth, uniform, plane, and level surface. Feather
edges to match adjacent floor elevations.
Correct other low areas scheduled to remain exposed with a repair topping. Cut out low
areas to ensure a minimum repair topping depth of 1/4 inch to match adjacent floor
elevations.
Prepare, mix, and apply repair topping and primer according to
manufacturer's written instructions to produce a smooth, uniform, plane, and level
surface.
Repair defective areas, except random cracks and single holes 1 inch or less in diameter,
by cutting out and replacing with fresh concrete. Remove defective areas with clean,
square cuts and expose steel reinforcement with at least a 3/4-inch clearance all around.
Dampen concrete surfaces in contact with patching concrete and apply bonding agent.
Mix patching concrete of same materials and mixture as original concrete except without
coarse aggregate. Place, compact, and finish to blend with adjacent finished concrete.
Cure in same manner as adjacent concrete.
Repair random cracks and single holes 1 inch or less in diameter with patching mortar.
Groove top of cracks and cut out holes to sound concrete and clean off dust, dirt, and
loose particles. Dampen cleaned concrete surfaces and apply bonding agent. Place
patching mortar before bonding agent has dried. Compact patching mortar and finish to
match adjacent concrete. Keep patched area continuously moist for at least 72 hours.
KIB DISTRICT OFFICE
RESTROOM IMPROVEMENTS
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
33000 - 12
E.
3.13
A.
Perform structural repairs of concrete, subject to Architect's approval, using epoxy adhesive and
patching mortar.
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
Inspections:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
B.
Steel reinforcement placement.
Steel reinforcement welding.
Headed bolts and studs.
Verification of use of required design mixture.
Concrete placement, including conveying and depositing.
Curing procedures and maintenance of curing temperature.
Verification of concrete strength before removal of shores and forms from beams and
slabs.
Concrete Tests: Testing of composite samples of fresh concrete obtained according to
ASTM C 172 shall be performed according to the following requirements:
1.
2.
Testing Frequency: Obtain one composite sample for each day's pour of each concrete
mixture exceeding 5 cu. yd., but less than 25 cu. yd., plus one set for each additional 50
cu. yd. or fraction thereof.
Testing Frequency: Obtain at least one composite sample for each 100 cu. yd. or fraction
thereof of each concrete mixture placed each day.
a.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Slump: ASTM C 143/C 143M; one test at point of placement for each composite sample,
but not less than one test for each day's pour of each concrete mixture. Perform
additional tests when concrete consistency appears to change.
Air Content: ASTM C 231, pressure method, for normal-weight concrete;one test for
each composite sample, but not less than one test for each day's pour of each concrete
mixture.
Concrete Temperature: ASTM C 1064/C 1064M; one test hourly when air temperature is
40 deg F and below and when 80 deg F and above, and one test for each composite
sample.
Unit Weight: ASTM C 567, fresh unit weight of structural lightweight concrete; one test
for each composite sample, but not less than one test for each day's pour of each concrete
mixture.
Compression Test Specimens: ASTM C 31/C 31M.
a.
b.
8.
When frequency of testing will provide fewer than five compressive-strength tests
for each concrete mixture, testing shall be conducted from at least five randomly
selected batches or from each batch if fewer than five are used.
Cast and laboratory cure two sets of two standard cylinder specimens for each
composite sample.
Cast and field cure two sets of two standard cylinder specimens for each composite
sample.
Compressive-Strength Tests: ASTM C 39/C 39M; test one set of two laboratory-cured
specimens at 7 days and one set of two specimens at 28 days.
KIB DISTRICT OFFICE
RESTROOM IMPROVEMENTS
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
33000 - 13
a.
b.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
C.
3.14
A.
Test one set of two field-cured specimens at 7 days and one set of two specimens
at 28 days.
A compressive-strength test shall be the average compressive strength from a set of
two specimens obtained from same composite sample and tested at age indicated.
When strength of field-cured cylinders is less than 85 percent of companion laboratorycured cylinders, Contractor shall evaluate operations and provide corrective procedures
for protecting and curing in-place concrete.
Strength of each concrete mixture will be satisfactory if every average of any three
consecutive compressive-strength tests equals or exceeds specified compressive strength
and no compressive-strength test value falls below specified compressive strength by
more than 500 psi.
Additional Tests: Testing and inspecting agency shall make additional tests of concrete
when test results indicate that slump, air entrainment, compressive strengths, or other
requirements have not been met, as directed by Architect. Testing and inspecting agency
may conduct tests to determine adequacy of concrete by cored cylinders complying with
ASTM C 42/C 42M or by other methods as directed by Architect.
Additional testing and inspecting, at Contractor's expense, will be performed to determine
compliance of replaced or additional work with specified requirements.
Correct deficiencies in the Work that test reports and inspections indicate do not comply
with the Contract Documents.
Measure floor and slab flatness and levelness according to ASTM E 1155 within 24 hours of
finishing.
PROTECTION OF LIQUID FLOOR TREATMENTS
Protect liquid floor treatment from damage and wear during the remainder of construction
period. Use protective methods and materials, including temporary covering, recommended in
writing by liquid floor treatments installer.
END OF SECTION 033000
KIB DISTRICT OFFICE
RESTROOM IMPROVEMENTS
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
33000 - 14
SECTION 079201 - INTERIOR JOINT SEALANTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
Drawing and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
This Section includes joint sealants for the following locations:
1.
2.
3.
4.
1.3
Interior joints in vertical surfaces and horizontal nontraffic surfaces as indicated.
Perimeter joints between interior wall surfaces and frames of interior doors and
windows.
Perimeter joints of plumbing fixtures.
Acoustical joint sealant for sealing concealed perimeter joints of gypsum board
partitions to reduce sound transmission.
SYSTEM PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A.
Provide elastomeric joint sealants that have been produced and installed to establish and to
maintain watertight and airtight continuous seals without causing staining or deterioration of
joint substrates.
B.
Provide joint sealants for interior applications that have been produced and installed to
establish and maintain airtight continuous seals that are water resistant and cause no staining or
deterioration of joint substrates.
1.4
SUBMITTALS
A.
1.5
Product data from manufacturers for each joint sealant product required.
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A.
Deliver materials to Project site in original unopened containers or bundles with labels
indicating manufacturer, product name and designation, color, expiration period for use, pot
life, curing time, and mixing instructions for multi-component materials.
B.
Store and handle materials in compliance with manufacturer's recommendations to prevent their
deterioration or damage due to moisture, high or low temperatures, contaminants, or other
causes.
KIB DISTRICT OFFICE
RESTROOM IMPROVEMENTS
INTERIOR JOINT SEALANTS
079201 - 1
1.6
PROJECT CONDITIONS
A.
Environmental Conditions:
following conditions:
1.
2.
Do not proceed with installation of joint sealants under the
When ambient and substrate temperature conditions are outside the limits permitted by
joint sealant manufacturer.
When joint substrates are wet, dirty or dusty.
B.
Joint Width Conditions: Do not proceed with installation of joint sealants where joint widths
are less than allowed by joint sealant manufacturer for application indicated.
C.
Joint Substrate Conditions: Do not proceed with installation of joint sealants until
contaminants capable of interfering with their adhesion are removed from joint substrates.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MATERIALS, GENERAL
A.
VOC Content of Interior Sealants: Provide sealants and sealant primers for use inside the
weatherproofing system that comply with the following limits for VOC content when
calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Part 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24):
1.
2.
3.
Architectural Sealants: 250 g/L.
Sealant Primers for Nonporous Substrates: 250 g/L.
Sealant Primers for Porous Substrates: 775 g/L.
B.
Compatibility: Provide joint sealants, joint fillers, and other related materials that are
compatible with one another and with joint substrates under conditions of service and
application, as demonstrated by sealant manufacturer based on testing and field experience.
C.
Colors: Color of exposed joint sealants to match as closely as possible the finish color of
adjacent surface.
2.2
ELASTOMERIC JOINT SEALANTS
A.
Elastomeric Sealant Standard: Provide manufacturer's standard chemically curing elastomeric
sealants that comply with ASTM C 920 and other requirements indicated, including those
requirements referencing ASTM C 920 classifications for Type, Grade, Class, and Uses.
1.
B.
Additional Movement Capability: Where additional movement capability is specified,
provide products with the capability, when tested for adhesion and cohesion under
maximum cyclic movement per ASTM C 719, to withstand the specified percentage
change in the joint width existing at time of installation and remain in compliance with
other requirements of ASTM C 920 for Uses indicated.
Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the products specified.
KIB DISTRICT OFFICE
RESTROOM IMPROVEMENTS
INTERIOR JOINT SEALANTS
079201 - 2
2.3
SOLVENT-RELEASE-CURING JOINT SEALANTS
A.
Acrylic Latex: Manufacturer's standard one-part, siliconized acrylic sealant complying with
ASTM C-834.
1.
2.
Use in interior vertical and horizontal wall joints, door and window frames, millwork
joints not subject to water, and other interior joints where sealant is required but is not
indicated to be calked with another type of sealant as specified below or in other
specification sections.
Acceptable Products:
a.
b.
c.
B.
Silicone Sealant: Manufacturer's standard one part, neutral curing sanitary sealant complying
with ASTM C-920, Class 25.
1.
2.
Use around plumbing fixtures.
Acceptable Products:
a.
b.
c.
d.
C.
"786," Dow Corning.
"Sanitary SCS1700," GE.
"898," Pecora Corp.
"Tremsil 600", Tremco.
Silicone Sealant: Manufacturer's standard one part moisture curing sealant complying with
ASTM C-920, Class 25, Type S, Grade NS.
1.
2.
Use at exterior perimeter of windows, window frames and aluminum storefronts.
Acceptable Products:
a.
b.
c.
d.
2.4
"AC-20," Pecora Corp.
"Sonolac," Sonneborn Building Products.
"Tremflex 834," Tremco, Inc.
"795," Dow Corning.
"Construction SCS1000," GE.
"890," Pecora Corp.
"Spectrem 1," Tremco.
TAPE SEALANTS
A.
Tape Sealant: Manufacturer's standard, solvent-free, butyl-based tape sealant with a solids
content of 100 percent formulated to be nonstaining, paintable, and nonmigrating in contact
with nonporous surfaces with or without reinforcement thread to prevent stretch and packaged
on rolls with a release paper on one side.
B.
Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
1.
"Extru-Seal Tape," Pecora Corp.
KIB DISTRICT OFFICE
RESTROOM IMPROVEMENTS
INTERIOR JOINT SEALANTS
079201 - 3
2.
3.
4.
5.
2.5
"Shim-Seal Tape," Pecora Corp.
"PTI 606," Protective Treatments, Inc.
"Tremco 440 Tape," Tremco, Inc.
"MBT-35," Tremco, Inc.
JOINT SEALANT BACKING
A.
General: Provide sealant backings of material and type that are nonstaining; are compatible
with joint substrates, sealants, primers and other joint fillers; and are approved for applications
indicated by sealant manufacturer based on field experience and laboratory testing.
B.
Plastic Foam Joint Fillers: Preformed, compressible, resilient, nonstaining, nonwaxing,
nonextruding strips of flexible plastic foam of material indicated below and of size, shape, and
density to control sealant depth and otherwise contribute to producing optimum sealant
performance:
1.
Closed-cell polyethylene foam, nonabsorbent to liquid water and gas, non-outgassing in
unruptured state.
C.
Bond-Breaker Tape: Polyethylene tape or other plastic tape as recommended by sealant
manufacturer for preventing sealant from adhering to rigid, inflexible joint filler materials or
joint surfaces at back of joint where such adhesion would result in sealant failure. Provide
self-adhesive tape where applicable.
D.
Pre-compressed Foam Sealant Backer: Polyurethane foam impregnated with a waterproof
polymer sealing compound and a release agent on one face, pre-compressed and sized for 50%
compression when expanded in joint.
1.
Acceptable Products:
a.
2.6
"Polytite B"; Polytite Manufacturing Corp.
MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A.
Primer: Material recommended by joint sealant manufacturer where required for adhesion of
sealant to joint substrates indicated, as determined from preconstruction joint sealant-substrate
tests and field tests.
B.
Cleaners for Nonporous Surfaces: Chemical cleaners acceptable to manufacturers of sealants
and sealant backing materials, free of oily residues or other substances capable of staining or
harming in any way joint substrates and adjacent nonporous surfaces, and formulated to
promote optimum adhesion of sealants with joint substrates.
C.
Masking Tape: Non-staining, nonabsorbent material compatible with joint sealants and
surfaces adjacent to joints.
KIB DISTRICT OFFICE
RESTROOM IMPROVEMENTS
INTERIOR JOINT SEALANTS
079201 - 4
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
3.2
Examine joints indicated to receive joint sealants, with Installer present, for compliance with
requirements for joint configuration, installation tolerances, and other conditions affecting joint
sealant performance. Do not proceed with installation of joint sealants until unsatisfactory
conditions have been corrected.
PREPARATION
A.
Surface Cleaning of Joints: Clean out joints immediately before installing joint sealants to
comply with recommendations of joint sealant manufacturer and the following requirements:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Remove all foreign material from joint substrates that could interfere with adhesion of
joint sealant, including dust, paints (except for permanent, protective coatings tested
and approved for sealant adhesion and compatibility by sealant manufacturer), old joint
sealants, oil, grease, waterproofing, water repellents, water, surface dirt, and frost.
Clean concrete, masonry, unglazed surfaces of ceramic tile, and similar porous joint
substrate surfaces by brushing, grinding, blast cleaning, mechanical abrading, or a
combination of these methods to produce a clean, sound substrate capable of
developing optimum bond with joint sealants. Remove loose particles remaining from
above cleaning operations by vacuuming or blowing out joints with oil-free compressed
air.
Remove laitance and form release agents from concrete.
Clean metal, glass, glazed surfaces of ceramic tile, and other nonporous surfaces with
chemical cleaners or other means that do not stain, harm substrates, or leave residues
capable of interfering with adhesion of joint sealants.
B.
Joint Priming: Prime joint substrates where recommended by joint sealant manufacturer based
on preconstruction joint sealant-substrate tests or prior experience. Apply primer to comply
with joint sealant manufacturer's recommendations. Confine primers to areas of joint sealant
bond; do not allow spillage or migration onto adjoining surfaces.
C.
Masking Tape: Use masking tape where required to prevent contact of sealant with adjoining
surfaces that otherwise would be permanently stained or damaged by such contact or by
cleaning methods required to remove sealant smears. Remove tape immediately after tooling
without disturbing joint seal.
3.3
INSTALLATION OF JOINT SEALANTS
A.
General: Comply with joint sealant manufacturer's printed installation instructions applicable
to products and applications indicated, except where more stringent requirements apply.
B.
Sealant Installation Standard: Comply with recommendations of ASTM C 1193 for use of joint
sealants as applicable to materials, applications, and conditions indicated.
KIB DISTRICT OFFICE
RESTROOM IMPROVEMENTS
INTERIOR JOINT SEALANTS
079201 - 5
C.
Installation of Sealant Backings:
requirements:
1.
Install joint fillers of type indicated to provide support of sealants during application
and at position required to produce the cross-sectional shapes and depths of installed
sealants relative to joint widths that allow optimum sealant movement capability.
a.
b.
c.
2.
Install sealant backings to comply with the following
Do not leave gaps between ends of joint fillers.
Do not stretch, twist, puncture, or tear joint fillers.
Remove absorbent joint fillers that have become wet prior to sealant application
and replace with dry material.
Install bond breaker tape between sealants where backer rods are not used between
sealants and joint fillers or back of joints.
D.
Installation of Sealants: Install sealants by proven techniques that result in sealants directly
contacting and fully wetting joint substrates, completely filling recesses provided for each joint
configuration, and providing uniform, cross-sectional shapes and depths relative to joint widths
that allow optimum sealant movement capability. Install sealants at the same time sealant
backings are installed.
E.
Tooling of Non-sag Sealants: Immediately after sealant application and prior to time skinning
or curing begins, tool sealants to form smooth, uniform beads of configuration indicated, to
eliminate air pockets, and to ensure contact and adhesion of sealant with sides of joint.
Remove excess sealants from surfaces adjacent to joint. Do not use tooling agents that discolor
sealants or adjacent surfaces or are not approved by sealant manufacturer.
1.
3.4
Provide concave joint configuration per Figure 5A in ASTM C 1193, unless otherwise
indicated.
CLEANING
A.
3.5
Clean off excess sealants or sealant smears adjacent to joints as work progresses by methods
and with cleaning materials approved by manufacturers of joint sealants and of products in
which joints occur.
PROTECTION
A.
Protect joint sealants during and after curing period from contact with contaminating
substances or from damage resulting from construction operations or other causes so that they
are without deterioration or damage at time of Substantial Completion. If, despite such
protection, damage or deterioration occurs, cut out and remove damaged or deteriorated joint
sealants immediately so that and installations with repaired areas are indistinguishable from
original work.
END OF SECTION 079201
KIB DISTRICT OFFICE
RESTROOM IMPROVEMENTS
INTERIOR JOINT SEALANTS
079201 - 6
SECTION 081113 - INTERIOR HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
Section Includes:
1.
1.2
Standard hollow metal frames for interior usage.
SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
B.
Shop Drawings: Include elevations, door edge details, frame profiles, metal thicknesses,
preparations for hardware, and other details.
C.
Samples for Initial Selection: For units with factory-applied color finishes.
D.
Samples for Verification: For each type of exposed finish required.
E.
Schedule: Prepared by or under the supervision of supplier, using same reference numbers for
details and openings as those on Drawings.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MANUFACTURERS
A.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering
products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
Amweld Building Products, LLC.
Ceco Door Products; an Assa Abloy Group company.
Curries Company; an Assa Abloy Group company.
Firedoor Corporation.
Fleming Door Products Ltd.; an Assa Abloy Group company.
Habersham Metal Products Company.
Kewanee Corporation (The).
Mesker Door Inc.
Pioneer Industries, Inc.
Security Metal Products Corp.
Steelcraft; an Ingersoll-Rand company.
Windsor Republic Doors.
KIB DISTRICT OFFICE
RESTROOM IMPROVEMENTS
HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES
081113 - 1
2.2
MATERIALS
A.
Cold-Rolled Steel Sheet:
applications.
B.
Hot-Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1011/A 1011M, CS, Type B.
C.
Metallic-Coated Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B; with
minimum A40 (ZF120) metallic coating.
D.
Frame Anchors:
ASTM A 591/A 591M, Commercial Steel (CS), 40Z (12G) coating
designation; mill phosphatized.
1.
ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, CS, Type B; suitable for exposed
For anchors built into exterior walls, steel sheet complying with ASTM A 1008/A 1008M
or ASTM A 1011/A 1011M, hot-dip galvanized according to ASTM A 153/A 153M,
Class B.
E.
Inserts, Bolts, and Fasteners: Hot-dip galvanized according to ASTM A 153/A 153M.
F.
Grout: ASTM C 476, except with a maximum slump of 4 inches (102 mm), as measured
according to ASTM C 143/C 143M.
G.
Mineral-Fiber Insulation: ASTM C 665, Type I.
2.3
STANDARD HOLLOW METAL FRAMES
A.
General: Comply with ANSI/SDI A250.8.
B.
Interior Frames:
indicated.
1.
2.
3.
C.
2.4
Fabricated from cold-rolled steel sheet unless metallic-coated sheet is
Fabricate frames as face welded unless otherwise indicated.
Frames for Level 3 Steel Doors: 0.053-inch- (1.3-mm-) thick steel sheet.
Frames for Borrowed Lights: 0.053-inch- (1.3-mm-) thick steel sheet, or manufacturer’s
standard steel sheet, whichever is greater.
Hardware Reinforcement: ANSI/SDI A250.6.
FRAME ANCHORS
A.
Jamb Anchors:
1.
2.
3.
Masonry Type: Adjustable strap-and-stirrup or T-shaped anchors to suit frame size, not
less than 0.042 inch (1.0 mm) thick, with corrugated or perforated straps not less than 2
inches (50 mm) wide by 10 inches (250 mm) long; or wire anchors not less than 0.177
inch (4.5 mm) thick.
Stud-Wall Type: Designed to engage stud, welded to back of frames; not less than 0.042
inch (1.0 mm) thick.
Compression Type for Drywall Slip-on Frames: Adjustable compression anchors.
KIB DISTRICT OFFICE
RESTROOM IMPROVEMENTS
HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES
081113 - 2
4.
B.
Floor Anchors: Formed from same material as frames, not less than 0.042 inch (1.0 mm) thick,
and as follows:
1.
2.
2.5
Post-installed Expansion Type for In-Place Concrete or Masonry: Minimum 3/8-inch(9.5-mm-) diameter bolts with expansion shields or inserts. Provide pipe spacer from
frame to wall, with throat reinforcement plate, welded to frame at each anchor location.
Monolithic Concrete Slabs: Clip-type anchors, with two holes to receive fasteners.
Separate Topping Concrete Slabs: Adjustable-type anchors with extension clips,
allowing not less than 2-inch (50-mm) height adjustment. Terminate bottom of frames at
finish floor surface.
STOPS AND MOLDINGS
A.
2.6
Fixed Frame Moldings: Formed integral with hollow metal frames, a minimum of 5/8 inch (16
mm) high unless otherwise indicated.
ACCESSORIES
A.
Mullions and Transom Bars: Join to adjacent members by welding or rigid mechanical anchors.
B.
Ceiling Struts: Minimum 1/4-inch-thick by 1-inch- (6.4-mm-thick by 25.4-mm-) wide steel.
C.
Grout Guards: Formed from same material as frames, not less than 0.016 inch (0.4 mm) thick.
D.
Door silencers: Formed from rubberized material as recommended by door frame manufacturer.
2.7
FABRICATION
A.
Tolerances: Fabricate hollow metal work to tolerances indicated in SDI 117.
B.
Hollow Metal Frames: Where frames are fabricated in sections, provide alignment plates or
angles at each joint, fabricated of same thickness metal as frames.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Welded Frames: Weld flush face joints continuously; grind, fill, dress, and make smooth,
flush, and invisible.
Provide countersunk, flat- or oval-head exposed screws and bolts for exposed fasteners
unless otherwise indicated.
Grout Guards: Weld guards to frame at back of hardware mortises in frames to be
grouted.
Floor Anchors: Weld anchors to bottom of jambs and mullions with at least four spot
welds per anchor.
Jamb Anchors: Provide number and spacing of anchors as follows:
a.
Masonry Type: Locate anchors not more than 18 inches (457 mm) from top and
bottom of frame. Space anchors not more than 32 inches (813 mm) o.c. and as
follows:
1)
Two anchors per jamb up to 60 inches (1524 mm) high.
KIB DISTRICT OFFICE
RESTROOM IMPROVEMENTS
HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES
081113 - 3
2)
3)
4)
b.
Stud-Wall Type: Locate anchors not more than 18 inches (457 mm) from top and
bottom of frame. Space anchors not more than 32 inches (813 mm) o.c. and as
follows:
1)
2)
3)
4)
5)
c.
6.
3.
Single-Door Frames: Three door silencers.
Double-Door Frames: Two door silencers.
Locate hardware as indicated, or if not indicated, according to ANSI/SDI A250.8.
Reinforce doors and frames to receive non-templated, mortised and surface-mounted
door hardware.
Comply with applicable requirements in ANSI/SDI A250.6 and ANSI/DHI A115 Series
specifications for preparation of hollow metal work for hardware.
Stops and Moldings: Provide stops and moldings around glazed lites where indicated. Form
corners of stops and moldings with butted or mitered hairline joints.
1.
2.
3.
2.8
Post-installed Expansion Type: Locate anchors not more than 6 inches (152 mm)
from top and bottom of frame. Space anchors not more than 26 inches (660 mm)
o.c.
Hardware Preparation: Factory prepare hollow metal work to receive templated mortised
hardware according to the Door Hardware Schedule and templates furnished as specified in
Division 08 Section "Door Hardware."
1.
2.
D.
Three anchors per jamb up to 60 inches (1524 mm) high.
Four anchors per jamb from 60 to 90 inches (1524 to 2286 mm) high.
Five anchors per jamb from 90 to 96 inches (2286 to 2438 mm) high.
Five anchors per jamb plus 1 additional anchor per jamb for each 24 inches
(610 mm) or fraction thereof above 96 inches (2438 mm) high.
Two anchors per head for frames more than 42 inches (1066 mm) wide and
mounted in metal-stud partitions.
Door Silencers: Except on weather-stripped doors, drill stops to receive door silencers.
a.
b.
C.
Three anchors per jamb from 60 to 90 inches (1524 to 2286 mm) high.
Four anchors per jamb from 90 to 120 inches (2286 to 3048 mm) high.
Four anchors per jamb plus 1 additional anchor per jamb for each 24 inches
(610 mm) or fraction thereof above 120 inches (3048 mm) high.
Provide fixed frame moldings on outside of exterior and on secure side of interior doors
and frames.
Provide loose stops and moldings on inside of hollow metal work.
Coordinate rabbet width between fixed and removable stops with type of glazing and
type of installation indicated.
STEEL FINISHES
A.
Prime Finish: Apply manufacturer's standard primer immediately after cleaning and pretreating.
1.
Shop Primer: ANSI/SDI A250.10.
KIB DISTRICT OFFICE
RESTROOM IMPROVEMENTS
HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES
081113 - 4
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION
A.
Hollow Metal Frames: Comply with ANSI/SDI A250.11.
1.
Set frames accurately in position, plumbed, aligned, and braced securely until permanent
anchors are set. After wall construction is complete, remove temporary braces, leaving
surfaces smooth and undamaged.
a.
b.
c.
d.
2.
Floor Anchors: Provide floor anchors for each jamb and mullion that extends to floor,
and secure with post-installed expansion anchors.
a.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
Where frames are fabricated in sections because of shipping or handling
limitations, field splice at approved locations by welding face joint continuously;
grind, fill, dress, and make splice smooth, flush, and invisible on exposed faces.
Install door silencers in frames before grouting.
Remove temporary braces necessary for installation only after frames have been
properly set and secured.
Check plumbness, squareness, and twist of frames as walls are constructed. Shim
as necessary to comply with installation tolerances.
Floor anchors may be set with powder-actuated fasteners instead of post-installed
expansion anchors if so indicated and approved on Shop Drawings.
Metal-Stud Partitions: Solidly pack mineral-fiber insulation behind frames.
Concrete Walls: Solidly fill space between frames and concrete with grout. Take
precautions, including bracing frames, to ensure that frames are not deformed or damaged
by grout forces.
In-Place Concrete or Masonry Construction: Secure frames in place with post-installed
expansion anchors. Countersink anchors, and fill and make smooth, flush, and invisible
on exposed faces.
In-Place Gypsum Board Partitions: Secure frames in place with post-installed expansion
anchors through floor anchors at each jamb. Countersink anchors, and fill and make
smooth, flush, and invisible on exposed faces.
Ceiling Struts: Extend struts vertically from top of frame at each jamb to overhead
structural supports or substrates above frame unless frame is anchored to masonry or to
other structural support at each jamb. Bend top of struts to provide flush contact for
securing to supporting construction. Provide adjustable wedged or bolted anchorage to
frame jamb members.
Installation Tolerances: Adjust hollow metal door frames for squareness, alignment,
twist, and plumb to the following tolerances:
a.
b.
c.
d.
Squareness: Plus or minus 1/16 inch (1.6 mm), measured at door rabbet on a line
90 degrees from jamb perpendicular to frame head.
Alignment: Plus or minus 1/16 inch (1.6 mm), measured at jambs on a horizontal
line parallel to plane of wall.
Twist: Plus or minus 1/16 inch (1.6 mm), measured at opposite face corners of
jambs on parallel lines, and perpendicular to plane of wall.
Plumbness: Plus or minus 1/16 inch (1.6 mm), measured at jambs at floor.
KIB DISTRICT OFFICE
RESTROOM IMPROVEMENTS
HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES
081113 - 5
3.2
ADJUSTING AND CLEANING
A.
Final Adjustments: Check and readjust operating hardware items immediately before final
inspection. Leave work in complete and proper operating condition. Remove and replace
defective work, including hollow metal work that is warped, bowed, or otherwise unacceptable.
B.
Prime-Coat Touchup: Immediately after erection, sand smooth rusted or damaged areas of
prime coat and apply touchup of compatible air-drying, rust-inhibitive primer.
END OF SECTION 081113
KIB DISTRICT OFFICE
RESTROOM IMPROVEMENTS
HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES
081113 - 6
SECTION 081416 - FLUSH WOOD DOORS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
Drawing and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Solid-core doors with wood-veneer.
2. Factory finishing flush wood doors.
3. Factory fitting flush wood doors to frames and factory machining for hardware.
1.3
SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data (action): For each type of door indicated. Include factory-finishing specifications.
B.
Shop Drawings (action): Indicate location, size, and hand of each door; elevation of each kind of
door; construction details not covered in Product Data; location and extent of hardware blocking;
and other pertinent data.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
C.
1.4
Indicate dimensions and locations of mortises and holes for hardware.
Indicate dimensions and locations of cutouts.
Indicate requirements for veneer matching.
Indicate doors to be factory finished and finish requirements.
Indicate fire-protection ratings for fire-rated doors.
Samples (action): For factory-finished doors.
WARRANTY
A.
General: Warranties shall be in addition to, and not a limitation of, other rights the Owner’s
Representative may have under the Contract Documents
B.
Door Manufacturer's Warranty: Submit written agreement in door manufacturer's standard form
signed by an official of the door manufacturer, Installer and Contractor, agreeing to repair or
replace defective doors that have warped (bow, cup or twist) ¼ inch or more in any 3’6: by 7’
plane of door face; delaminated or that show telegraphing of core construction in face veneers;
telegraphing of stile, rail or core through face to cause surface variation in excess of 1/100 inch in
any 3 inch span or do not conform to tolerance limitations of referenced quality standards.
KIB DISTRICT OFFICE
RESTROOM IMPROVEMENTS
FLUSH WOOD DOORS
081416 - 1
1. Warranty shall also include reinstallation which may be required due to repair or replacement
of defective doors where defect was not apparent prior to hanging.
2. Warranty shall be in effect during following period of time after date of Substantial
Completion.
3. Solid Core Interior Doors: Warranty Period: Life of installation
C.
Contractor's Responsibilities: Replace or refinish doors to obtain approval or receive
manufacturer’s warranty where Contractor's work contributed to rejection or to voiding of
manufacturer's warranty.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
A.
MANUFACTURERS
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering
products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
2.2
A.
Algoma Hardwoods, Inc.
Ampco, Inc.
Eagle Plywood & Door Manufacturing, Inc.
Eggers Industries.
Graham; an Assa Abloy Group company.
Marlite.
Marshfield Door Systems, Inc.
Mohawk Flush Doors, Inc.; a Masonite company.
Oshkosh Architectural Door Company.
Vancouver Door Company.
VT Industries Inc.
DOOR CONSTRUCTION, GENERAL
WDMA I.S.1-A Performance Grade:
1. Heavy Duty unless otherwise indicated.
B.
Structural-Composite-Lumber-Core Doors:
1. Structural Composite Lumber: WDMA I.S.10.
a.
b.
2.3
A.
Screw Withdrawal, Face: 700 lbf (3100 N).
Screw Withdrawal, Edge: 400 lbf (1780 N).
VENEERED-FACED DOORS FOR TRANSPARENT FINISH
Interior Solid-Core Doors
1. Grade: Custom (Grade A faces).
2. Hardwood Veneer Species: White Ash or White birch or White poplar or White Maple. All
doors must be of the same species, and no heartwood shall be visible.
KIB DISTRICT OFFICE
RESTROOM IMPROVEMENTS
FLUSH WOOD DOORS
081416 - 2
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
2.4
Cut: Plain sliced (flat sliced).
Match between Veneer Leaves: Slip match.
Assembly of Veneer Leaves on Door Faces: Running match.
Pair and Set Match: Provide for doors hung in same opening or separated only by mullions.
Core: Either glued wood stave or structural composite lumber.
Construction: Five or seven plies. Stiles and rails are bonded to core, then entire unit
abrasive planed before veneering.
FABRICATION
A.
Factory fit doors to suit frame-opening sizes indicated. Comply with clearance requirements of
referenced quality standard for fitting unless otherwise indicated.
B.
Factory machine doors for hardware that is not surface applied.
2.5
A.
FACTORY FINISHING
General: Comply with referenced quality standard for factory finishing. Complete fabrication,
including fitting doors for openings and machining for hardware that is not surface applied,
before finishing.
1. Finish faces, all four edges, edges of cutouts, and mortises. Stains and fillers may be omitted
on top and bottom edges, edges of cutouts, and mortises.
B.
Finish doors at factory that are indicated to receive transparent finish. Field finish doors indicated
to receive opaque finish.
C.
Caution: Finish systems can vary among manufacturers. Require Samples for verification.
D.
Transparent Finish:
1. Grade: Custom.
2. Finish: AWI catalyzed polyurethane system.
3. Staining: To match existing doors, as selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.
4. Effect: Filled finish.
5. Sheen: Semigloss.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION
A.
Hardware: For installation, see Division 08 Section "Finish Hardware."
B.
Installation Instructions: Install doors to comply with manufacturer's written instructions and the
referenced quality standard, and as indicated.
KIB DISTRICT OFFICE
RESTROOM IMPROVEMENTS
FLUSH WOOD DOORS
081416 - 3
C.
Job-Fitted Doors: Align and fit doors in frames with uniform clearances and bevels; do not trim
stiles and rails in excess of limits set by manufacturer or permitted for fire-rated doors. Machine
doors for hardware. Seal edges of doors, edges of cutouts, and mortises after fitting and
machining.
1. Clearances: Provide 1/8 inch (3.2 mm) at heads, jambs, and between pairs of doors. Provide
1/8 inch (3.2 mm) from bottom of door to top of decorative floor finish or covering unless
otherwise indicated. Where threshold is shown or scheduled, provide 1/4 inch (6.4 mm) from
bottom of door to top of threshold unless otherwise indicated.
D.
Factory-Fitted Doors: Align in frames for uniform clearance at each edge.
E.
Factory-Finished Doors: Restore finish before installation if fitting or machining is required at
Project site.
END OF SECTION 081416
KIB DISTRICT OFFICE
RESTROOM IMPROVEMENTS
FLUSH WOOD DOORS
081416 - 4
SECTION 087100 - FINISH HARDWARE
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY:
A.
Section Includes: Finish Hardware for door openings, except as otherwise specified herein.
1.
2.
3.
4.
B.
Related Sections:
1.
2.
C.
Builders Hardware Manufacturing Association (BHMA)
NFPA 101 Life Safety Code
NFPA 80 -Fire Doors and Windows
ANSI-A156.xx- Various Performance Standards for Finish Hardware
UL10C – Positive Pressure Fire Test of Door Assemblies
ANSI-A117.1 – Accessible and Usable Buildings and Facilities
DHI /ANSI A115.IG – Installation Guide for Doors and Hardware
ICC – International Building Code
Intent of Hardware Groups
1.
2.
1.2
Division 8: Hollow Metal Doors and Frames.
Division 8: Wood Doors.
References: Comply with applicable requirements of the following standards. Where these
standards conflict with other specific requirements, the most restrictive shall govern.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
D.
Door hardware for steel (hollow metal) doors.
Door hardware for wood doors.
Door hardware for other doors indicated.
Keyed cylinders as indicated.
Should items of hardware not definitely specified be required for completion of the
Work, furnish such items of type and quality comparable to adjacent hardware and
appropriate for service required.
Where items of hardware aren’t definitely or correctly specified, are required for
completion of the Work, a written statement of such omission, error, or other discrepancy
to be submitted to Architect, prior to date specified for receipt of bids for clarification by
addendum; or, furnish such items in the type and quality established by this specification,
and appropriate to the service intended.
SUBSTITUTIONS:
A.
1.3
Comply with Division 1.
SUBMITTALS:
A.
Comply with Division 1.
KIB DISTRICT OFFICE
RESTROOM IMPROVEMENTS
FINISH HARDWARE
087100 - 1
B.
Special Submittal Requirements: Combine submittals of this Section with Sections listed below
to ensure the "design intent" of the system/assembly is understood and can be reviewed
together.
C.
Product Data: Manufacturer's specifications and technical data including the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
D.
Shop Drawings - Hardware Schedule: Submit 6 complete reproducible copy of detailed
hardware schedule in a vertical format.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
E.
Templates, wiring diagrams and "reviewed Hardware Schedule" of electrical terms to
electrical for coordination and verification of voltages and locations.
Samples: (If requested by the Architect)
1.
2.
G.
List groups and suffixes in proper sequence.
Completely describe door and list architectural door number.
Manufacturer, product name, and catalog number.
Function, type, and style.
Size and finish of each item.
Mounting heights.
Explanation of abbreviations and symbols used within schedule.
Detailed wiring diagrams, specially developed for each opening, indicating all electric
hardware, security equipment and access control equipment, and door and frame roughins required for specific opening.
Templates: Submit templates and "reviewed Hardware Schedule" to door and frame supplier
and others as applicable to enable proper and accurate sizing and locations of cutouts and
reinforcing.
1.
F.
Detailed specification of construction and fabrication.
Manufacturer's installation instructions.
Wiring diagrams for each electric product specified. Coordinate voltage with electrical
before submitting.
Submit 6 copies of catalog cuts with hardware schedule.
Provide 9001-Quality Management and 14001-Environmental Management for products
listed in Materials Section 2.2
1 sample of Lever and Rose/Escutcheon design, (pair).
3 samples of metal finishes
Contract Closeout Submittals: Comply with Division 1 including specific requirements
indicated.
1.
Operating and maintenance manuals: Submit 3 sets containing the following.
a.
b.
c.
d.
Complete information in care, maintenance, and adjustment, and data on repair and
replacement parts, and information on preservation of finishes.
Catalog pages for each product.
Name, address, and phone number of local representative for each manufacturer.
Parts list for each product.
KIB DISTRICT OFFICE
RESTROOM IMPROVEMENTS
FINISH HARDWARE
087100 - 2
2.
3.
4.
5.
1.4
Copy of final hardware schedule, edited to reflect, "As installed".
Copy of final keying schedule
As installed “Wiring Diagrams” for each piece of hardware connected to power, both low
voltage and 110 volts.
One set of special tools required for maintenance and adjustment of hardware, including
changing of cylinders.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Comply with Division 1.
1.
2.
3.
Statement of qualification for distributor and installers.
Statement of compliance with regulatory requirements and single source responsibility.
Distributor's Qualifications: Firm with 3 years experience in the distribution of
commercial hardware.
a.
b.
4.
5.
Installer's Qualifications: Firm with 3 years experienced in installation of similar
hardware to that required for this Project, including specific requirements indicated.
Regulatory Label Requirements: Provide testing agency label or stamp on hardware for
labeled openings.
a.
b.
6.
B.
1.5
Distributor to employ full time Architectural Hardware Consultants (AHC) for the
purpose of scheduling and coordinating hardware and establishing keying
schedule.
Hardware Schedule shall be prepared and signed by an AHC.
Provide UL listed hardware for labeled and 20 minute openings in conformance
with requirements for class of opening scheduled.
Underwriters Laboratories requirements have precedence over this specification
where conflict exists.
Single Source Responsibility: Except where specified in hardware schedule, furnish
products of only one manufacturer for each type of hardware.
Review Project for extent of finish hardware required to complete the Work. Where there is a
conflict between these Specifications and the existing hardware, notify the Architect in writing
and furnish hardware in compliance with the Specification unless otherwise directed in writing
by the Architect.
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A.
Packing and Shipping: Comply with Division 1.
1.
2.
3.
4.
B.
Deliver products in original unopened packaging with legible manufacturer's
identification.
Package hardware to prevent damage during transit and storage.
Mark hardware to correspond with "reviewed hardware schedule".
Deliver hardware to door and frame manufacturer upon request.
Storage and Protection: Comply with manufacturer's recommendations.
KIB DISTRICT OFFICE
RESTROOM IMPROVEMENTS
FINISH HARDWARE
087100 - 3
1.6
PROJECT CONDITIONS:
A.
Coordinate hardware with other work. Furnish hardware items of proper design for use on doors
and frames of the thickness, profile, swing, security and similar requirements indicated, as
necessary for the proper installation and function, regardless of omissions or conflicts in the
information on the Contract Documents.
B.
Review Shop Drawings for doors and entrances to confirm that adequate provisions will be
made for the proper installation of hardware.
1.7
WARRANTY:
A.
Refer to Conditions of the Contract
B.
Manufacturer’s Warranty:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Closers: Thrity years
Exit Devices: Five Years
Locksets & Cylinders: Life of Building
All other Hardware: Two years.
OWNER’S INSTRUCTION:
1.8
A.
1.9
Instruct Owner’s personnel in operation and maintenance of hardware units.
MAINTENANCE:
A.
Extra Service Materials: Deliver to Owner extra materials from same production run as products
installed. Package products with protective covering and identify with descriptive labels.
Comply with Division 1 Closeout Submittals Section.
1.
2.
3.
B.
Special Tools: Provide special wrenches and tools applicable to each different or special
hardware component.
Maintenance Tools: Provide maintenance tools and accessories supplied by hardware
component manufacturer.
Delivery, Storage and Protection: Comply with Owner’s requirements for delivery,
storage and protection of extra service materials.
Maintenance Service: Submit for Owner’s consideration maintenance service agreement for
electronic products installed.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MANUFACTURERS:
A.
The following manufacturers are approved subject to compliance with requirements of the
Contract Documents. Approval of manufacturers other than those listed shall be in accordance
with Division 1.
Item:
Hinges
KIB DISTRICT OFFICE
RESTROOM IMPROVEMENTS
Manufacturer:
Stanley
Approved:
Bommer, McKinney, Ives
FINISH HARDWARE
087100 - 4
Locksets
Cylinders
Exit Devices
Closers
Protection Plates
Door Stops
Flush Bolts
Threshold & Gasketing
2.2
Best
Best
Precision
LCN
Ives
Ives
Ives
National Guard
No Sub
No Sub
Von Duprin,
No Sub
Rixson, Trimco
Trimco, Rockwood
ABH, Trimco
Reese, K.N. Crowder
MATERIALS:
A.
Hinges: Shall be Five Knuckle Ball bearing hinges
1.
2.
3.
4.
B.
Template screw hole locations
Bearings are to be fully hardened.
Bearing shell is to be consistent shape with barrel.
Minimum of 2 permanently lubricated non-detachable bearings on standard weight hinge
and 4 permanently lubricated bearing on heavy weight hinges.
5.
Equip with easily seated, non-rising pins.
6.
Non Removable Pin screws shall be slotted stainless steel screws.
7.
Hinges shall be full polished, front, back and barrel.
8.
Hinge pin is to be fully plated.
9.
Bearing assembly is to be installed after plating.
10. Sufficient size to allow 180-degree swing of door
11. Furnish five knuckles with flush ball bearings
12. Provide hinge type as listed in schedule.
13. Furnish 3 hinges per leaf to 7 foot 6 inch height. Add one for each additional 30 inches in
height or fraction thereof.
14. Tested and approved by BHMA for all applicable ANSI Standards for type, size, function
and finish
15. UL10C listed for Fire rated doors.
Mortise Type Locks and Latches:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
Tested and approved by BHMA for ANSI A156.13, Series 1000, Operational Grade 1,
Extra-Heavy Duty, Security Grade 2 and be UL10C.
Furnish UL or recognized independent laboratory certified mechanical operational testing
to 4 million cycles minimum.
Provide 9001-Quality Management and 14001-Environmental Management.
Fit ANSI A115.1 door preparation
Functions and design as indicated in the hardware groups
Solid, one-piece, 3/4-inch (19mm) throw, anti-friction latchbolt made of self-lubricating
stainless steel
Deadbolt functions shall have 1 inch (25mm) throw bolt made of hardened stainless steel
Latchbolt and Deadbolt are to extend into the case a minimum of 3/8 inch (9.5mm) when
fully extended
Auxiliary deadlatch to be made of one piece stainless steel, permanently lubricated
Provide sufficient curved strike lip to protect door trim
Lever handles must be of forged or cast brass, bronze or stainless steel construction and
conform to ANSI A117.1. Levers that contain a hollow cavity are not acceptable
Lock shall have self-aligning, thru-bolted trim
KIB DISTRICT OFFICE
RESTROOM IMPROVEMENTS
FINISH HARDWARE
087100 - 5
13.
14.
15.
16.
17.
18.
C.
Levers to operate a roller bearing spindle hub mechanism
Mortise cylinders of lock shall have a concealed internal setscrew for securing the
cylinder to the lockset. The internal setscrew will be accessible only by removing the
core, with the control key, from the cylinder body.
Spindle to be designed to prevent forced entry from attacking of lever
Provide locksets with 7-pin removable and interchangeable core cylinders
Each lever to have independent spring mechanism controlling it
Core face must be the same finish as the lockset.
Exit Devices:
1.
2.
D.
Exit devices to meet or exceed BHMA for ANSI 156.3, Grade 1.
Exit devices to be tested and certified by UL or by a recognized independent laboratory
for mechanical operational testing to 10 million cycles minimum with inspection
confirming Grade 1 Loaded Forces have been maintained.
3.
Exit devices chassis to be investment cast steel, zinc dichromate.
4.
Exit devices to have stainless steel deadlocking ¾” through latch bolt.
5.
Exit devices to be equipped with sound dampening on touchbar.
6.
Non-fire rated exit devices to have cylinder dogging.
7.
Non-fire rated exit devices to have ¼” minimum turn hex key dogging.
8.
Touchpad to be “T” style constructed of architectural metal with matching metal end
caps.
9.
Touchbar assembly on wide style exit devices to have a ¼” clearance to allow for vision
frames.
10. All exposed exit device components to be of architectural metals and “true” architectural
finishes.
11. Provide strikes as required by application.
12. Fire exit hardware to conform to UL10C and UBC 7-2. UL tested for Accident Hazard.
13. Exit device to be heavy investment cast stainless steel. The strike is to be black powder
coated finish.
14. Exit devices to have field reversible handing.
15. Provide heavy duty vandal resistant lever trim with heavy duty investment cast stainless
steel components and extra strength shock absorbing overload springs. Lever shall not
require resetting. Lever design to match locksets and latchsets.
16. Provide 9001-Quality Management and 14001-Environmental Management.
17. Vertical Latch Assemblies to have gravity operation, no springs.
Door Closers shall:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
Tested and approved by BHMA for ANSI 156.4, Grade 1
UL10C certified
Provide 9001-Quality Management and 14001-Environmental Management.
Closer shall have extra-duty arms and knuckles
Conform to ANSI 117.1
Maximum 2 7/16 inch case projection with non-ferrous cover
Separate adjusting valves for closing and latching speed, and backcheck
Provide adapter plates, shim spacers and blade stop spacers as required by frame and
door conditions
Full rack and pinion type closer with 1½“ minimum bore
Mount closers on non-public side of door, unless otherwise noted in specification
Closers shall be non-handed, non-sized and multi-sized.
KIB DISTRICT OFFICE
RESTROOM IMPROVEMENTS
FINISH HARDWARE
087100 - 6
E.
Door Stops: Provide a dome floor or wall stop for every opening as listed in the hardware sets.
1.
2.
3.
4.
F.
Wall stop and floor stop shall be wrought bronze, brass or stainless steel.
Provide fastener suitable for wall construction.
Coordinate reinforcement of walls where wall stop is specified.
Provide dome stops where wall stops are not practical. Provide spacers or carpet riser for
floor conditions encountered
Over Head Stops: Provide concealed overhead when a wall stop cannot be used or when listed
in the hardware set.
1.
Concealed overhead stops shall be heavy duty stainless steel.
G.
Kickplates: Provide with four beveled edges ANSI J102, 10 inches high by width less 2 inches
on single doors and 1 inch on pairs of doors. Furnish oval-head countersunk screws to match
finish.
H.
Silencers: Furnish silencers on all interior frames, 3 for single doors, 2 for pairs. Omit where
any type of seals occur.
2.3
FINISH:
A.
Designations used in Schedule of Finish Hardware - 3.05, and elsewhere to indicate hardware
finishes are those listed in ANSI/BHMA A156.18 including coordination with traditional U.S.
finishes shown by certain manufacturers for their products
B.
Powder coat door closers to match other hardware, unless otherwise noted.
C.
Aluminum items shall be finished to match predominant adjacent material. Seals to coordinate
with frame color.
2.4
KEYS AND KEYING:
A.
Provide keyed brass construction cores and keys during the construction period. Construction
control and operating keys and core shall not be part of the Owner's permanent keying system or
furnished in the same keyway (or key section) as the Owner's permanent keying system.
Permanent cores and keys (prepared according to the accepted keying schedule) will be
furnished to the Owner.
B.
Cylinders, removable and interchangeable core system: Best CORMAX™ Patented 7-pin.
C.
Permanent keys and cores: Stamped with the applicable key mark for identification. These
visual key control marks or codes will not include the actual key cuts. Permanent keys will also
be stamped "Do Not Duplicate."
D.
Transmit Grand Masterkeys, Masterkeys and other Security keys to Owner by Registered Mail,
return receipt requested.
E.
Furnish keys in the following quantities:
1.
1 each Grand Masterkeys
KIB DISTRICT OFFICE
RESTROOM IMPROVEMENTS
FINISH HARDWARE
087100 - 7
2.
3.
4.
5.
4 each Masterkeys
2 each Change keys each keyed core
15 each Construction masterkeys
1 each Control keys
F.
The Owner, or the Owner's agent, will install permanent cores and return the construction cores
to the Hardware Supplier. Construction cores and keys remain the property of the Hardware
Supplier.
G.
Keying Schedule: Arrange for a keying meeting, and programming meeting with Architect
Owner and hardware supplier, and other involved parties to ensure locksets and locking
hardware, are functionally correct and keying and programming complies with project
requirements. Furnish 3 typed copies of keying and programming schedule to Architect.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
Verification of conditions: Examine doors, frames, related items and conditions under which
Work is to be performed and identify conditions detrimental to proper and or timely completion.
1.
3.2
Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
HARDWARE LOCATIONS:
A.
3.3
Mount hardware units at heights indicated in the following publications except as specifically
indicated or required to comply with the governing regulations.
1.
Recommended Locations for Builder’s Hardware for Standard Steel Doors and Frames,
by the Door and Hardware Institute (DHI).
2.
Recommended locations for Architectural Hardware for flush wood doors (DHI).
3.
WDMA Industry Standard I.S.-1A-04, Industry Standard for Architectural wood flush
doors.
INSTALLATION:
A.
Install each hardware item per manufacturer's instructions and recommendations. Do not install
surface mounted items until finishes have been completed on the substrate. Set units level,
plumb and true to line and location. Adjust and reinforce the attachment substrate as necessary
for proper installation and operation.
B.
Conform to local governing agency security ordinance.
C.
Install Conforming to ICC/ANSI A117.1 Accessible and Usable Building and Facilities.
1.
Adjust door closer sweep periods so that from the open position of 70 degrees, the door
will take at least 3 seconds to move to a point 3 inches from the latch, measured to the
landing side of the door.
KIB DISTRICT OFFICE
RESTROOM IMPROVEMENTS
FINISH HARDWARE
087100 - 8
D.
3.4
Installed hardware using the manufacturers fasteners provided. Drill and tap all screw holes
located in metallic materials. Do not use “Riv-Nuts” or similar products.
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL AND FINAL ADJUSTMENT
A.
Contractor/Installers, Field Services: After installation is complete, contractor shall inspect the
completed door openings on site to verify installation of hardware is complete and properly
adjusted, in accordance with both the Contract Documents and final shop drawings.
1.
Check and adjust closers to ensure proper operation.
2.
Check latchset, lockset, and exit devices are properly installed and adjusted to ensure
proper operation.
a.
b.
3.
3.5
Verify levers are free from binding.
Ensure latchbolts and dead bolts are engaged into strike and hardware is
functioning.
Report findings, in writing, to architect indicating that all hardware is installed and
functioning properly. Include recommendations outlining corrective actions for
improperly functioning hardware if required.
SCHEDULE OF FINISH HARDWARE:
Finish List
Code
AL
626
630
US26D
US32D
Description
Aluminum
Satin Chromium Plated
Satin Stainless Steel
Chromium Plated, Dull
Stainless Steel, Dull
Hardware Sets
SET #1
6
2
1
1
1
1
1
2
Hinges
Flush Bolt
Dust Proof Strike
Lockset
Overhead Door Stop
Wall Bumper
Astragal
Door Silencer
FBB179 4 1/2 X 4 1/2 NRP
FB358
DP2
45H-7D3H PATD
101S
WS401CVX
139 A 84"
SR64
US26D
US26D
US26D
630
US32D
US26D
SET #2
KIB DISTRICT OFFICE
RESTROOM IMPROVEMENTS
FINISH HARDWARE
087100 - 9
ST
IV
IV
BE
GL
IV
NA
IV
3
1
1
3
Hinges
Lockset
Wall Bumper
Door Silencer
SET #3
1 Exit Device
1 Rim Cylinder
1 Blank Strike
FBB179 4 1/2 X 4 1/2 NRP
45H-7AB3H PATD
WS401CVX
SR64
US26D
630
US26D
ST
BE
IV
IV
2108 X 4908C
12E-72 PATD
BS-161
630
626
630
PR
BE
DJ
US26D
630
626
AL
US32D
ST
PR
BE
LC
IV
IV
NOTE: Balance of Hardware Existing
SET #4
3
1
1
1
1
3
Hinges
Exit Device
Rim Cylinder
Closer
Kickplate
Door Silencer
FBB179 4 1/2 X 4 1/2 NRP
2108 X 4908C
12E-72 PATD
4040 XP CUSH
8400 10" x 2" LDW
SR64
END OF SECTION 087100
KIB DISTRICT OFFICE
RESTROOM IMPROVEMENTS
FINISH HARDWARE
087100 - 10
SECTION 092216 - NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
This Section includes non-load-bearing steel framing members for the following applications:
1.
2.
B.
Interior framing systems supports for partition walls and furring
Interior suspension systems supports for ceilings
Related Sections:
1.
Division 9 Sections “Gypsum Board” and “Tiling” for materials supported by nonstructural metal framing.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
NON-LOAD-BEARING STEEL FRAMING, GENERAL
A.
Framing Members, General: Comply with ASTM C 754 for conditions indicated.
1.
2.
2.2
Steel Sheet Components: Comply with ASTM C 645 requirements for metal, unless
otherwise indicated.
Protective Coating manufacturer's standard corrosion-resistant zinc coating, unless
otherwise indicated.
SUSPENSION SYSTEM COMPONENTS
A.
Tie Wire: ASTM A 641/A 641M, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper, 0.0625-inch- (1.59-mm-)
diameter wire, or double strand of 0.0475-inch- (1.21-mm-) diameter wire.
B.
Hanger Attachments to Concrete:
1.
Powder-Actuated Fasteners:
Suitable for application indicated, fabricated from
corrosion-resistant materials with clips or other devices for attaching hangers of type
indicated, and capable of sustaining, without failure, a load equal to 10 times that
imposed by construction as determined by testing according to ASTM E 1190 by an
independent testing agency.
KIB DISTRICT OFFICE
RESTROOM IMPROVEMENTS
NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING
092216 - 1
C.
Wire Hangers: ASTM A 641/A 641M, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper, 0.162-inch (4.12-mm)
diameter.
D.
Flat Hangers: Steel sheet, 1 by 3/16 inch (25.4 by 4.76 mm) by length indicated.
E.
Carrying Channels: Cold-rolled, commercial-steel sheet with a base-metal thickness of 0.0538
inch (1.37 mm) and minimum 1/2-inch- (12.7-mm-) wide flanges.
1.
F.
Depth: 2-1/2 inches (64 mm).
Furring Channels (Furring Members):
1.
2.
Cold-Rolled Channels: 0.0538-inch (1.37-mm) bare-steel thickness, with minimum 1/2inch- (12.7-mm-) wide flanges, 3/4 inch (19.1 mm) deep.
Steel Studs: ASTM C 645.
a.
b.
3.
Hat-Shaped, Rigid Furring Channels: ASTM C 645, 7/8 inch (22.2 mm) deep.
a.
2.3
Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: 20 gage 0.0346 inch (0.872mm).
Depth: 1-5/8 inches (41.3 mm), except as indicated otherwise on the drawings.
Minimum Base Metal Thickness: 0.0179 inch (0.45 mm).
STEEL FRAMING FOR FRAMED ASSEMBLIES
A.
Steel Studs and Runner Track: ASTM C 645.
1.
B.
Flat Strap and Backing Plate: Steel sheet for blocking and bracing in length required.
1.
C.
Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: 20 gauge (0.0330 inch, 0.872 mm, minimum); heavier
gauges as indicated on the drawings.
Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: 16 gage.
Hat-Shaped, Rigid Furring Channels: ASTM C 645.
1.
2.
3.
Minimum Base Metal Thickness: 0.0312 inch (0.79 mm).
Depth: 1-1/2 inches (38.1 mm), except as indicated otherwise on the Drawings.
Furring Channels for use with Sound Isolation Clips: Minimum 25 gauge with hemmed
edge detail, or 22 gauge without hemmed edges, with the following minimum
dimensions:
a.
b.
7/8 inch tall, and 1-1/4 inch and 2-1/2 inch minimum for narrow and wide widths
respectively.
Provide channel recommended by the Sound Isolation Clip manufacturer.
KIB DISTRICT OFFICE
RESTROOM IMPROVEMENTS
NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING
092216 - 2
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
Examine areas and substrates, with Installer present, and including welded hollow-metal frames,
cast-in anchors, and structural framing, for compliance with requirements and other conditions
affecting performance of the Work.
B.
Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2
PREPARATION
A.
3.3
Suspended Assemblies: Coordinate installation of suspension systems with installation of
overhead structure to ensure that inserts and other provisions for anchorages to building
structure have been installed to receive hangers at spacing required to support the Work and that
hangers will develop their full strength.
INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A.
Installation Standard: ASTM C 754.
1.
Gypsum Board Assemblies: Also comply with requirements in ASTM C 840 that apply
to framing installation.
B.
Install supplementary framing, and blocking to support fixtures, equipment services, heavy trim,
grab bars, toilet accessories, or similar construction.
C.
Install bracing at terminations in assemblies.
D.
Do not bridge building control and expansion joints with non-load-bearing steel framing
members. Frame both sides of joints independently.
3.4
INSTALLING SUSPENSION SYSTEMS
A.
Isolate suspension systems from building structure where they abut or are penetrated by
building structure to prevent transfer of loading imposed by structural movement.
B.
Suspend hangers from building structure as follows:
1.
Install hangers plumb and free from contact with insulation or other objects within ceiling
plenum that are not part of supporting structural or suspension system.
a.
2.
Splay hangers only where required to miss obstructions and offset resulting
horizontal forces by bracing, countersplaying, or other equally effective means.
Where width of ducts and other construction within ceiling plenum produces hanger
spacings that interfere with locations of hangers required to support standard suspension
KIB DISTRICT OFFICE
RESTROOM IMPROVEMENTS
NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING
092216 - 3
system members, install supplemental suspension members and hangers in the form of
trapezes or equivalent devices.
a.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
Size supplemental suspension members and hangers to support ceiling loads within
performance limits established by referenced installation standards.
Wire Hangers: Secure by looping and wire tying, either directly to structures or to
inserts, eye screws, or other devices and fasteners that are secure and appropriate for
substrate, and in a manner that will not cause hangers to deteriorate or otherwise fail.
Flat Hangers: Secure to structure, including intermediate framing members, by attaching
to inserts, eye screws, or other devices and fasteners that are secure and appropriate for
structure and hanger, and in a manner that will not cause hangers to deteriorate or
otherwise fail.
Do not attach hangers to steel roof deck.
Do not attach hangers to permanent metal forms. Furnish cast-in-place hanger inserts
that extend through forms.
Do not attach hangers to rolled-in hanger tabs of composite steel floor deck.
Do not connect or suspend steel framing from ducts, pipes, or conduit.
C.
Seismic Bracing: Sway-brace suspension systems with hangers used for support.
D.
Install Sound Isolation Clip assemblies for the support of gypsum board assemblies over
structure at spacing recommended by the clip manufacturer, and as indicated on the drawings.
E.
Grid Suspension Systems: Attach perimeter wall track or angle where grid suspension systems
meet vertical surfaces. Mechanically join main beam and cross-furring members to each other
and butt-cut to fit into wall track.
F.
Installation Tolerances: Install suspension systems that are level to within 1/8 inch in 12 feet (3
mm in 3.6 m) measured lengthwise on each member that will receive finishes and transversely
between parallel members that will receive finishes.
3.5
INSTALLING FRAMED ASSEMBLIES
A.
Install framing system components according to spacings indicated, but not greater than
spacings required by referenced installation standards for assembly types.
1.
2.
3.
Single-Layer Application: 16 inches o.c. unless otherwise indicated.
Multilayer Application: 16 inches o.c. unless otherwise indicated.
Tile Backing Panels: 16 inches o.c. unless otherwise indicated.
B.
Where studs are installed directly against exterior masonry walls or dissimilar metals at exterior
walls, install isolation strip between studs and exterior wall.
C.
Install tracks (runners) at floors and overhead supports. Extend framing full height to structural
supports or substrates above suspended ceilings, except where partitions are indicated to
terminate at suspended ceilings. Continue framing around ducts penetrating partitions above
ceiling.
KIB DISTRICT OFFICE
RESTROOM IMPROVEMENTS
NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING
092216 - 4
1.
2.
Slip-Type Head Joints: Where framing extends to overhead structural supports, install to
produce joints at tops of framing systems that prevent axial loading of finished
assemblies.
Door Openings: Screw vertical studs at jambs to jamb anchor clips on door frames;
install runner track section (for cripple studs) at head and secure to jamb studs.
a.
b.
c.
3.
D.
Other Framed Openings: Frame openings other than door openings the same as required
for door openings, unless otherwise indicated. Install framing below sills of openings to
match framing required above door heads.
Z-Furring Members:
1.
2.
3.
E.
Install two studs at each jamb, unless otherwise indicated.
Install cripple studs at head adjacent to each jamb stud, with a minimum 1/2-inch
(12.7-mm) clearance from jamb stud to allow for installation of control joint in
finished assembly where occurring.
Extend jamb studs through suspended ceilings and attach to underside of structure
or decking above.
Erect insulation (specified in Division 07 Section "Thermal Insulation") vertically and
hold in place with Z-furring members spaced 24 inches (610 mm) o.c.
Except at exterior corners, securely attach narrow flanges of furring members to wall
with concrete stub nails, screws designed for masonry attachment, or powder-driven
fasteners spaced 24 inches (600 mm) o.c.
At exterior corners, attach wide flange of furring members to wall with short flange
extending beyond corner; on adjacent wall surface, screw-attach short flange of furring
channel to web of attached channel. At interior corners, space second member no more
than 12 inches (300 mm) from corner and cut insulation to fit.
Installation Tolerance: Install each framing member so fastening surfaces vary not more than
1/8 inch (3 mm) from the plane formed by faces of adjacent framing.
END OF SECTION 092216
KIB DISTRICT OFFICE
RESTROOM IMPROVEMENTS
NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING
092216 - 5
SECTION 092900 - GYPSUM BOARD
PART 1 1.1
SUMMARY
A.
This Section includes the following:
1.
2.
B.
1.2
Interior gypsum board.
Interior tile backing panels.
Related Work
1.
Section 092216 – “Non-Structural Metal Framing” for non-structural framing and
suspension systems that support gypsum board panels.
2.
Section 093000 – “Tiling” for cementitious backer units installed as substrates for
ceramic tile.
SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
gYPSUM BOARD, GENERAL
A.
2.2
Size: Provide in maximum lengths and widths available that will minimize joints in each area
and that correspond with support system indicated.
INTERIOR GYPSUM BOARD
A.
General: Complying with ASTM C 36/C 36M or ASTM C 1396/C 1396M, as applicable to
type of gypsum board indicated and whichever is more stringent.
B.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
C.
American Gypsum.
CertainTeed Corp.
Georgia-Pacific Gypsum LLC.
Lafarge North America Inc.
National Gypsum Company.
PABCO Gypsum.
National Gypsum Company
USG Corporation.
Gypsum Board, Type X: ASTM C 1396/C 1396M.
1.
2.
Thickness: 5/8 inch (15.9 mm).
Long Edges: Tapered.
KIB DISTRICT OFFICE
RESTROOM IMPROVEMENTS
GYPSUM BOARD
092900 - 1
D.
Ceiling Type. Manufactured to have more sag resistance than regular-type gypsum board.
1.
2.
2.3
Thickness: 5/8 inch (15.9 mm)
Long Edges: Tapered
TILE BACKING PANELS
A.
Cementitious Backer Units: ANSI A118.9 and ASTM C 1288 or 1325, with manufacturer’s
standard edges.
1.
Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
2.
2.4
CertainTeed Corp.; FiberCement BackerBoard.
Custom Building Products; Wonderboard.
FinPan, Inc.; Util-A-Crete Concrete Backer Board.
National Gypsum Company, Permabase Cement Board.
USG Corporation; DUROCK Cement Board.
G-P Gypsum.
Thickness: 5/8 inch
TRIM ACCESSORIES
A.
Interior Trim: ASTM C 1047.
1.
2.
Material: Galvanized or aluminum-coated steel sheet, rolled zinc, plastic, or paper-faced
galvanized steel sheet. One type used throughout.
Shapes:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
2.5
Cornerbead.
Bullnose bead.
LC-Bead: J-shaped; exposed long flange receives joint compound.
L-Bead: L-shaped; exposed long flange receives joint compound.
U-Bead: J-shaped; exposed short flange does not receive joint compound.
Expansion (control) joint.
Curved-Edge Cornerbead: With notched or flexible flanges.
Reveal Moldings: Extruded aluminum alloy 6063 T5 with chemical conversion
coating.
JOINT TREATMENT MATERIALS
A.
General: Comply with ASTM C 475/C 475M.
B.
Joint Tape:
1.
2.
C.
Interior Gypsum Wallboard: Paper.
Tile Backing Panels: As recommended by panel manufacturer.
Joint Compound for Interior Gypsum Wallboard: For each coat use formulation that is
compatible with other compounds applied on previous or for successive coats.
KIB DISTRICT OFFICE
RESTROOM IMPROVEMENTS
GYPSUM BOARD
092900 - 2
1.
2.
Pre-filling: At open joints, and damaged surface areas, use setting-type taping
compound.
Embedding and First Coat: For embedding tape and first coat on joints, fasteners, and
trim flanges, use setting-type taping compound.
a. Use setting-type compound for installing paper-faced metal trim accessories.
3.
4.
5.
D.
Joint Compound for Tile Backing Panels:
1.
2.6
Fill Coat: For second coat, use setting-type, sandable topping or drying-type, all-purpose
compound.
Finish Coat: For third coat, use drying-type, all-purpose compound.
Skim Coat: For final coat of Level 5 finish, use drying-type, all-purpose compound.
Cementitious Backer Units: As recommended by backer unit manufacturer.
AUXILIARY MATERIALS
A.
General: Provide auxiliary materials that comply with referenced installation standards and
manufacturer's written recommendations.
B.
Laminating Adhesive: Adhesive or joint compound recommended for directly adhering
gypsum panels to continuous substrate.
C.
Steel Drill Screws: ASTM C 1002, unless otherwise indicated.
1.
D.
Sound Attenuation Blankets, Thermal Insulation and Vapor Retarder: ASTM C 665, Type I
(blankets without membrane facing) produced by combining thermosetting resins with mineral
fibers manufactured from glass, slag wool, or rock wool.
1.
E.
Use screws complying with ASTM C 954 for fastening panels to steel members from
0.033 to 0.112 inch (0.84 to 2.84 mm) thick.
Fire-Resistance-Rated Assemblies:
assembly.
Comply with mineral-fiber requirements of
Acoustical Joint Sealant: As specified in Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants."
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
APPLYING AND FINISHING PANELS, GENERAL
A.
Comply with ASTM C 840.
B.
Examine panels before installation. Reject panels that are wet, moisture damaged, and mold
damaged.
C.
Isolate perimeter of gypsum board applied to non-load-bearing partitions at structural
abutments, except floors. Provide 1/4- to 1/2-inch- (6.4- to 12.7-mm-) wide spaces at these
locations, and trim edges with edge trim where edges of panels are exposed. Seal joints
between edges and abutting structural surfaces with acoustical sealant.
KIB DISTRICT OFFICE
RESTROOM IMPROVEMENTS
GYPSUM BOARD
092900 - 3
3.2
APPLYING INTERIOR GYPSUM BOARD
A.
Install interior gypsum board in the following locations:
1.
3.3
Type X: All locations except where flexible type is required unless otherwise indicated.
APPLYING TILE BACKING PANELS
A.
Cementitious Backer Units: ANSI A108.1, at locations indicated to receive wall tile.
B.
Where tile backing panels abut other types of panels in same plane, shim surfaces to produce a
uniform plane across panel surfaces.
3.4
INSTALLING TRIM ACCESSORIES
A.
General: For trim with back flanges intended for fasteners, attach to framing with same
fasteners used for panels. Otherwise, attach trim according to manufacturer's written
instructions.
B.
Interior Trim: Install in the following locations:
1.
2.
3.
4.
3.5
Cornerbead: Use at outside corners.
U-Bead: Use at exposed panel edges.
Curved-Edge Cornerbead: Use at curved openings.
Reveal Molding or Control Joint Molding: At locations and spacing as indicted on the
drawings.
FINISHING GYPSUM BOARD
A.
General: Treat gypsum board joints, interior angles, edge trim, control joints, penetrations,
fastener heads, surface defects, and elsewhere as required to prepare gypsum board surfaces for
decoration. Promptly remove residual joint compound from adjacent surfaces.
B.
Prefill open joints and damaged surface areas.
C.
Apply joint tape over gypsum board joints, except those with trim having flanges not intended
for tape.
D.
Gypsum Board Finish Levels: Finish panels to levels indicated below, according to
ASTM C 840, for locations indicated:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Level 1: Embed tape at joints in ceiling plenum areas, concealed areas, and where
indicated, unless a higher level of finish is required for fire-resistance-rated assemblies.
Level 2: Embed tape and apply separate first coat of joint compound to tape, fasteners,
and trim flanges where panels are substrate for tile and where indicated.
Level 3: Embed tape and apply separate first and fill coats of joint compound to tape,
fasteners, and trim flanges where indicated.
Level 4: Embed tape and apply separate first, fill, and finish coats of joint compound to
tape, fasteners, and trim flanges at panel surfaces that will not be exposed to view in nonemployee or staff areas, and those that are indicated to receive textured finishes and those
that are painted with flat paints, unless otherwise indicated.
KIB DISTRICT OFFICE
RESTROOM IMPROVEMENTS
GYPSUM BOARD
092900 - 4
5.
3.6
Level 5: Embed tape and apply separate first, fill, and finish coats of joint compound to
tape, fasteners, and trim flanges, and apply skim coat of joint compound over entire
surface. Level 5 finish is required at all walls and ceilings at offices, conference rooms,
work rooms and “huddle spaces,” and all gypsum board surfaces within the “Core” areas
of the building, except at surfaces of storerooms, machine room, janitor rooms and
similar rooms not exposed to view in the finish work. Core areas are defined as areas
between grids B and C for full length of the building.
PROTECTION
A.
Protect installed products from damage from condensation, construction, and other causes
during remainder of the construction period.
B.
Remove and replace panels that are wet, moisture damaged, or mold damaged.
1.
2.
Indications that panels are wet or moisture damaged include, but are not limited to,
discoloration, sagging, or irregular shape.
Indications that panels are mold damaged include, but are not limited to, fuzzy or
splotchy surface contamination and discoloration.
END OF SECTION 092900
KIB DISTRICT OFFICE
RESTROOM IMPROVEMENTS
GYPSUM BOARD
092900 - 5
SECTION 093013 – CERAMIC TILING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
This Section includes the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
B.
Related Sections:
1.
1.3
Ceramic tile.
Setting and Grouting Materials.
Crack-suppression membrane for thin-set tile installations.
Metal edge strips installed as part of tile installations.
Section 092900 “Gypsum Board” for cementitious backer units.
DEFINITIONS
A.
General: Definitions in the ANSI A108 series of tile installation standards and in ANSI A137.1
apply to Work of this Section unless otherwise specified.
B.
Module Size: Actual tile size plus joint width indicated.
C.
Face Size: Actual tile size, excluding spacer lugs.
1.4
SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each product indicated.
B.
Maintenance Data: For finishes to include in maintenance manuals.
1.5
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Source Limitations for Tile: Obtain tile of each type and color or finish from one source or
producer.
1.
Obtain tile of each type and color or finish from same production run and of consistent
quality in appearance and physical properties for each contiguous area.
KIB DISTRICT OFFICE
RESTROOM IMPROVEMENTS
CERAMIC TILING
093013 - 1
B.
Source Limitations for Setting and Grouting Materials: Obtain ingredients of a uniform quality
for each mortar, adhesive, and grout component from one manufacturer and each aggregate
from one source or producer.
C.
Source Limitations for Other Products: Obtain each of the following products specified in this
Section form a single manufacturer for each product:
1.
2.
3.
1.8
Waterproof membrane
Cementitious backer units.
Metal edge strips.
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A.
Deliver and store packaged materials in original containers with seals unbroken and labels
intact until time of use. Comply with requirements in ANSI A137.1 for labeling tile packages.
B.
Store tile and cementitious materials on elevated platforms, under cover, and in a dry location.
C.
Store aggregates where grading and other required characteristics can be maintained and
contamination can be avoided.
D.
Store liquid materials in unopened containers and protected from freezing.
E.
Handle tile that has temporary protective coating on exposed surfaces to prevent coated
surfaces from contacting backs or edges of other units. If coating does contact bonding
surfaces of tile, remove coating from bonding surfaces before setting tile.
1.9
PROJECT CONDITIONS
A.
1.10
A.
Environmental Limitations: Do not install tile until construction in spaces is complete and
ambient temperature and humidity conditions are maintained at the levels indicated in
referenced standards and manufacturer’s written instructions.
EXTRA MATERIALS
Furnish extra materials that match and are from same production runs as products installed and
that are delivered to Owner with protective covering and identified with labels describing contents.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
PRODUCTS, GENERAL
A.
ANSI Ceramic Tile Standard: Provide tile that complies with ANSI A137.1 for types,
compositions, and other characteristics indicated.
1.
Tile: Basis of Design, provide the following: Manufacturer: Royal Mosa
KIB DISTRICT OFFICE
RESTROOM IMPROVEMENTS
CERAMIC TILING
093013 - 2
a.
b.
c.
2.
CT-1: Floor Tile
1)
Series: Global 15Thirty
2)
Color:. 76250V
3)
Size: 12”x12”
CT-2: Wall Tile
1)
Series: Global Collection
2)
Color: 16740
3)
Size: 6”x6”
CT-8: Cove Base
1)
Series: P-COVE
2)
Color: 76250V
3)
Size: 4”x6”
Grout: Basis of Design, provide the following: Manufacturer: Mapei
a.
Locations: CT-1 and CT-8
1)
b.
Locations: CT-2
1)
2.4
Color: 19 Pearl Gray
Color: 38 Avalanche
TILE BACKING PANELS
A.
2.5
Cementitious Backer Units: As specified in Div 9 Section “Gypsum Board”.
WATERPROOF MEMBRANE
A.
Manufacturer’s standard product that complies with ANSI A118.10 and is recommended by the
manufacturer for the application indicated.
Include reinforcement and accessories
recommended by manufacturer.
KIB DISTRICT OFFICE
RESTROOM IMPROVEMENTS
CERAMIC TILING
093013 - 3
2.6
CRACK ISOLATION MEMBRANE
A.
Manufacturer’s standard product that complies with ANSI A118.12 for standard performance
and is recommended by the manufacturer for the application indicated. Include reinforcement
and accessories recommended by manufacturer.
2.7 SETTING MATERIALS
A. Latex-Portland Cement Mortor (Thin Set): ANSI A118.4.
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
i.
j.
k.
l.
Boiardi Products; a QEP company.
Bonsal American; an Oldcastle company.
Bostik, Inc.
C-Cure.
Custom Building Products.
Jamo Inc.
Laticrete International, Inc.
MAPEI Corporation.
Mer-Kote Products, Inc.
Southern Grouts & Mortars, Inc.
Summitville Tiles, Inc.
TEC; a subsidiary of H. B. Fuller Company.
2. Provide prepackaged, dry-mortar mix containing dry, redispersible, vinyl acetate or acrylic
additive to which only water must be added at Project site.
3. For wall applications, provide mortar that complies with requirements for non-sagging mortar
in addition to the other requirements in ANSI A118.4.
2.8
GROUT MATERIALS
A.
Polymer-Modified Tile Grout: ANSI A118.7, manufacturer and colors as indicated.
4.
2.9
Polymer Type: Liquid-latex form for addition to prepackaged dry-grout mix.
MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A.
Trowelable Underlayments and Patching Compounds: Latex-modified, Portland cement-based
formulation provided or approved by manufacturer of tile-setting materials for installations
indicated.
B.
Metal Edge Strips: Angle or L-shape, height to match tile and setting-bed thickness, metallic or
combination of metal and PVC or neoprene base, designed specifically for flooring
applications; stainless steel, ASTM A 666, 300 Series exposed-edge material.
C.
Temporary Protective Coating: Either product indicated below that is formulated to protect
exposed surfaces of tile against adherence of mortar and grout; compatible with tile, mortar,
KIB DISTRICT OFFICE
RESTROOM IMPROVEMENTS
CERAMIC TILING
093013 - 4
and grout products; and easily removable after grouting is completed without damaging grout
or tile.
1.
2.
Petroleum paraffin wax, fully refined and odorless, containing at least 0.5 percent oil with
a melting point of 120 to 140 deg F (49 to 60 deg C) per ASTM D 87.
Grout release in form of manufacturer’s standard proprietary liquid coating that is
specially formulated and recommended for use as temporary protective coating for tile.
A.
Tile Cleaner: A neutral cleaner capable of removing soil and residue without harming tile and
grout surfaces, specifically approved for materials and installations indicated by tile and grout
manufacturers.
B.
Grout Sealer: Manufacturer’s standard product for sealing grout joints and that does not change
color or appearance of grout.
2.10
MIXING MORTARS AND GROUT
A.
Mix mortars and grouts to comply with referenced standards and mortar and grout
manufacturers’ written instructions.
B.
Add materials, water, and additives in accurate proportions.
C.
Obtain and use type of mixing equipment, mixer speeds, mixing containers, mixing time, and
other procedures to produce mortars and grouts of uniform quality with optimum performance
characteristics for installations indicated.
PART 3 – EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
Examine substrates, areas, and conditions where tile will be installed, with Installer present, for
compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting
performance of installed tile.
1.
2.
Verify that substrates for setting tile are firm, dry, clean, free of coatings that are
incompatible with tile-setting materials including curing compounds and other substances
that contain soap, wax, oil, or silicone; and comply with flatness tolerances required by
ANSI A108.01 for installations indicated.
Verify that concrete substrates for tile floors installed with adhesives, bonded mortar bed,
or thin-set mortar comply with surface finish requirements in ANSI A108.01 for
installations indicated.
a. Verify that surfaces that received a steel trowel finish have been mechanically
scarified.
b. Verify that protrusions, bumps, and ridges have been removed by sanding or
grinding.
3.
Verify that installation of grounds, anchors, recessed frames, electrical and mechanical
units of work, and similar items located in or behind tile has been completed.
KIB DISTRICT OFFICE
RESTROOM IMPROVEMENTS
CERAMIC TILING
093013 - 5
4.
B.
Verify that joints and cracks in tile substrates are coordinated with tile joint locations; if
not coordinated, adjust joint locations in consultation with Architect.
Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 PREPARATION
A.
Remove coatings, including curing compounds and other substances that contain soap, wax, oil,
or silicone, that are incompatible with tile-setting materials.
B.
Verify cementitious backer units and joints are installed to comply with ANSI A108.11.
C. Fill cracks, holes, and depressions with trowelable leveling and patching compound according to
tile-setting material manufacturer's written instructions.
D. Remove protrusions, bumps, and ridges by sanding or grinding.
E. Blending: For tile exhibiting color variations, use factory blended tile or blend tiles at Project site
before installing.
F. Field-Applied Temporary Protective Coating: Where indicated under tile type or needed to
prevent grout from staining or adhering to exposed tile surfaces, precoat them with continuous
film of temporary protective coating, taking care not to coat unexposed tile surfaces.
3.3
INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A.
ANSI Tile Installation Standards: Comply with parts of ANSI A108 Series "Specifications for
Installation of Ceramic Tile" that apply to types of setting and grouting materials and to
methods indicated in ceramic tile installation schedules.
B.
TCA Installation Guidelines: TCA's "Handbook for Ceramic Tile Installation." Comply with
TCA installation methods indicated in ceramic tile installation schedules.
C.
Extend tile work into recesses and under or behind equipment and fixtures to form complete
covering without interruptions, unless otherwise indicated. Terminate work neatly at
obstructions, edges, and corners without disrupting pattern or joint alignments.
D. Accurately form intersections and returns. Perform cutting and drilling of tile without marring
visible surfaces. Grind cut edges of tile abutting trim, finish, or built-in items. Fit tile closely
to electrical outlets, piping, fixtures, and other penetrations so plates, collars, or covers overlap
tile.
E.
Jointing Pattern: Lay tile in grid pattern, unless otherwise indicated. Align joints when adjoining
tiles on floor, base, walls, and trim are same size, or in when sizes of one tile are equally
divisible sizes of other tiles. Lay out tile work and center tile fields in both directions in each
space or on each wall area. Adjust to minimize tile cutting. Provide uniform joint widths,
unless otherwise indicated.
KIB DISTRICT OFFICE
RESTROOM IMPROVEMENTS
CERAMIC TILING
093013 - 6
1. Align joints of wall, base and floor tiles in toilet rooms.
F.
Expansion Joints: Locate expansion joints and other sealant-filled joints during installation of
setting materials, mortar beds, and tile. Do not saw-cut joints after installing tiles.
1. Locate joints in tile surfaces directly above joints in concrete substrates.
G. For installations indicated below, follow procedures in ANSI A108 Series tile installation
standards for providing 95 percent mortar coverage.
1.
2.
Tile floors in wet areas.
Tile floors composed of tiles 8 by 8 inches (200 by 200 mm) or larger.
H. Install tile on floors with the following joint widths:
1.
I.
Install tile on walls with the following joint widths:
1.
J.
Paver Tile: Install per manufacturers recommended joint widths.
Match wall tile width to floor tile.
Metal Edge Strips: Install at locations indicated or where exposed edge of tile flooring meets
carpet, wood, or other flooring that finishes flush with top of tile.
K. Apply grout sealer to cementitious grout joints in tile floors according to grout-sealer
manufacturer's written instructions. As soon as grout sealer has penetrated grout joints, remove
excess sealer and sealer that has gotten on tile faces by wiping with soft cloth.
END OF SECTION 093013
KIB DISTRICT OFFICE
RESTROOM IMPROVEMENTS
CERAMIC TILING
093013 - 7
SECTION 095113 - ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
1.3
This Section includes acoustical panels and exposed suspension systems for ceilings, including
fiberglass units and metal units.
DEFINITIONS
A.
AC: Articulation Class.
B.
CAC: Ceiling Attenuation Class.
C.
LR: Light Reflectance coefficient.
D.
NRC: Noise Reduction Coefficient.
1.4
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
B.
Submit product and manufacturer product information.
1.
1.5
Products include manufacturer special edge moldings, hanger clips, lateral force bracing,
hangers and other provisions required to achieve a suspended ceiling configuration that
has been tested and proven to meet seismic criteria indicated.
CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A.
1.6
Maintenance Data: For finishes to include in maintenance manuals.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Source Limitations: Obtain each type of acoustical ceiling panel and supporting suspension
system through one source from a single manufacturer.
KIB DISTRICT OFFICE
RESTROOM IMPROVEMENTS
ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS
095113 - 1
B.
Seismic Standard: Provide acoustical panel ceilings designed and installed to withstand the
effects of earthquake motions according to the following:
1.
1.7
ASCE 7, "Minimum Design Loads for Buildings and Other Structures":
"Earthquake Loads."
Section 9,
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A.
Deliver acoustical panels, suspension system components, and accessories to Project site in
original, unopened packages and store them in a fully enclosed, conditioned space where they
will be protected against damage from moisture, humidity, temperature extremes, direct
sunlight, surface contamination, and other causes.
B.
Before installing acoustical panels, permit them to reach room temperature and a stabilized
moisture content.
C.
Handle acoustical panels carefully to avoid chipping edges or damaging units in any way.
1.8
COORDINATION
A.
Coordinate layout and installation of acoustical panels and suspension system with other
construction that penetrates ceilings or is supported by them, including light fixtures, HVAC
equipment, fire-suppression system, and partition assemblies.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A.
Seismic Performance: Acoustical ceiling shall withstand the effects of earthquake motions
determined according to ASCE/SEI 7.
B.
Surface-Burning Characteristics: Comply with ASTM E 84; testing by a qualified testing
agency. Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency.
1.
2.
C.
Flame-Spread Index: Comply with ASTM E 1264 for Class C materials.
Smoke-Developed Index: 450 or less.
Fire-Resistance Ratings: Comply with ASTM E 119; testing by a qualified testing agency.
Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency.
1.
Indicate design designations from UL's "Fire Resistance Directory" or from the listings of
another qualified testing agency.
KIB DISTRICT OFFICE
RESTROOM IMPROVEMENTS
ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS
095113 - 2
2.2
ACOUSTICAL PANELS, GENERAL
A.
2.3
Acoustical Panel Standard: Provide manufacturer's standard panels of configuration indicated
that comply with ASTM E 1264 classifications as designated by types, patterns, acoustical
ratings, and light reflectances, unless otherwise indicated.
METAL SUSPENSION SYSTEMS, GENERAL
A.
Metal Suspension System Standard: Provide manufacturer's standard direct-hung metal
suspension systems of types, structural classifications, and finishes indicated that comply with
applicable requirements in ASTM C 635.
B.
Finishes and Colors, General: Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for
Architectural and Metal Products" for recommendations for applying and designating finishes.
Provide manufacturer's standard factory-applied finish for type of system indicated.
C.
Attachment Devices: Size for five times the design load indicated in ASTM C 635, Table 1,
"Direct Hung," unless otherwise indicated. Comply with seismic design requirements.
D.
Wire Hangers, Braces, and Ties: Provide wires complying with the following requirements:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Zinc-Coated, Carbon-Steel Wire: ASTM A 641/A 641M, Class 1 zinc coating, soft
temper.
Stainless-Steel Wire: ASTM A 580/A 580M, Type 304, nonmagnetic.
Nickel-Copper-Alloy Wire: ASTM B 164, nickel-copper-alloy UNS No. N04400.
Size: Select wire diameter so its stress at 3 times hanger design load (ASTM C 635,
Table 1, "Direct Hung") will be less than yield stress of wire, but provide not less than
0.106-inch- (2.69-mm-) diameter wire.
E.
Hanger Rods: Mild steel, zinc coated or protected with rust-inhibitive paint.
F.
Seismic Stabilizer Bars:
Manufacturer's standard perimeter stabilizers designed to
accommodate seismic forces.
G.
Seismic Struts: Manufacturer's standard compression struts designed to accommodate seismic
forces.
2.4
ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILING (ACP)
A.
Basis-of-Design Acoustical Panel Product: Armstrong, Ultima
1.
2.
3.
B.
Color: White
Dimensions (inches): 24”x48”x3/4”
Edge/Joint Detail: Square Lay in
Basis-of-Design Suspension System Product: Armstrong 15/16”.
1.
Wide-Face, Capped, Double-Web, Steel Suspension System: Main and cross runners roll
formed from cold-rolled steel sheet, prepainted, electrolytically zinc coated, or hot-dip
KIB DISTRICT OFFICE
RESTROOM IMPROVEMENTS
ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS
095113 - 3
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
galvanized according to ASTM A 653/A 653M, not less than G30 (Z90) coating
designation, with prefinished 15/16-inch- (24-mm-) wide metal caps on flanges
Structural Classification: Heavy duty system
End Condition of Cross Runners: Override (stepped) or butt-edge type.
Grid Face Material: Steel or Aluminum.
Grid Face Finish: White
Cap Material: Steel
Cap Finish: White
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, including structural framing to which acoustical
panel ceilings attach or abut, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements specified
in this and other Sections that affect ceiling installation and anchorage and with requirements
for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of acoustical panel
ceilings.
1.
3.2
Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
PREPARATION
A.
3.3
Measure each ceiling area and establish layout of acoustical panels to balance border widths at
opposite edges of each ceiling. Avoid using less-than-half-width panels at borders, and comply
with layout shown on reflected ceiling plans.
INSTALLATION
A.
General: Install acoustical panel ceilings to comply with ASTM C 636 and seismic design
requirements indicated, per manufacturer's written instructions and CISCA's "Ceiling Systems
Handbook."
B.
Suspend ceiling hangers from building's structural members and as follows:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Install hangers plumb and free from contact with insulation or other objects within ceiling
plenum that are not part of supporting structure or of ceiling suspension system.
Splay hangers only where required to miss obstructions; offset resulting horizontal forces
by bracing, countersplaying, or other equally effective means.
Where width of ducts and other construction within ceiling plenum produces hanger
spacings that interfere with location of hangers at spacings required to support standard
suspension system members, install supplemental suspension members and hangers in
form of trapezes or equivalent devices.
Secure wire hangers to ceiling suspension members and to supports above with a
minimum of three tight turns. Connect hangers directly either to structures or to inserts,
eye screws, or other devices that are secure and appropriate for substrate and that will not
deteriorate or otherwise fail due to age, corrosion, or elevated temperatures.
KIB DISTRICT OFFICE
RESTROOM IMPROVEMENTS
ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS
095113 - 4
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
Secure flat, angle, channel, and rod hangers to structure, including intermediate framing
members, by attaching to inserts, eye screws, or other devices that are secure and
appropriate for both structure to which hangers are attached and type of hanger involved.
Install hangers in a manner that will not cause them to deteriorate or fail due to age,
corrosion, or elevated temperatures.
Do not support ceilings directly from permanent metal forms or floor deck. Fasten
hangers to cast-in-place hanger inserts, post-installed mechanical or adhesive anchors, or
power-actuated fasteners that extend through forms into concrete.
When steel framing does not permit installation of hanger wires at spacing required,
install carrying channels or other supplemental support for attachment of hanger wires.
Do not attach hangers to steel deck tabs.
Do not attach hangers to steel roof deck. Attach hangers to structural members.
Space hangers not more than 48 inches (1200 mm) o.c. along each member supported
directly from hangers, unless otherwise indicated; provide hangers not more than 8 inches
(200 mm) from ends of each member.
Size supplemental suspension members and hangers to support ceiling loads within
performance limits established by referenced standards and publications.
C.
Secure bracing wires to ceiling suspension members and to supports with a minimum of four
tight turns. Suspend bracing from building's structural members as required for hangers,
without attaching to permanent metal forms, steel deck, or steel deck tabs. Fasten bracing wires
into concrete with cast-in-place or post-installed anchors.
D.
Install edge moldings and trim of type indicated at perimeter of acoustical ceiling area and
where necessary to conceal edges of acoustical panels.
1.
2.
3.
Deleted.
Screw attach moldings to substrate at intervals not more than 16 inches (400 mm) o.c.
and not more than 3 inches (75 mm) from ends, leveling with ceiling suspension system
to a tolerance of 1/8 inch in 12 feet (3.2 mm in 3.6 m). Miter corners accurately and
connect securely.
Do not use exposed fasteners, including pop rivets, on moldings and trim.
E.
Install suspension system runners so they are square and securely interlocked with one another.
Remove and replace dented, bent, or kinked members.
F.
Install acoustical panels with undamaged edges and fit accurately into suspension system
runners and edge moldings. Scribe and cut panels at borders and penetrations to provide a neat,
precise fit.
1.
Arrange directionally patterned acoustical panels as follows:
a.
2.
As indicated on reflected ceiling plans.
For square-edged panels, install panels with edges fully hidden from view by flanges of
suspension system runners and moldings.
KIB DISTRICT OFFICE
RESTROOM IMPROVEMENTS
ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS
095113 - 5
3.4
CLEANING
A.
Clean exposed surfaces of acoustical panel ceilings, including trim, edge moldings, and
suspension system members. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for cleaning and
touchup of minor finish damage. Remove and replace ceiling components that cannot be
successfully cleaned and repaired to permanently eliminate evidence of damage.
END OF SECTION 095113
KIB DISTRICT OFFICE
RESTROOM IMPROVEMENTS
ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS
095113 - 6
SECTION 096513 – RESILIENT BASE, STAIRS, AND MOLDING ACCESSORIES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2
SUMMARY
A.
Section Includes:
1.
2.
1.3
Resilient base.
Resilient molding accessories (Transition Strips).
SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
B.
Maintenance data.
C.
Samples for Verification: For each type of product indicated and for each color, texture, and
pattern required in Manufacturer’s standard-size Samples, but not less than 12 inches (300 mm)
long.
1.4
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A.
1.5
Store resilient products and installation materials in dry spaces protected from weather, with
ambient temperatures maintained within range recommended by manufacturer, but not less than
50 deg F (10 deg C) or more than 90 deg F (32 deg C).
PROJECT CONDITIONS
A.
Maintain ambient temperatures within range recommended by manufacturer, but not less than
70 deg F (21 deg C) or more than 95 deg F (35 deg C), in spaces to receive resilient products
during the following time periods:
1.
2.
3.
B.
48 hours before installation.
During installation.
48 hours after installation.
After installation and until Substantial Completion, maintain ambient temperatures within range
recommended by manufacturer, but not less than 55 deg F (13 deg C) or more than 95 deg F (35
deg C).
KIB DISTRICT OFFICE
RESTROOM IMPROVEMENTS
RESILIENT BASE AND ACCESSORIES
096513 - 1
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A.
FloorScore Compliance: Resilient base and stair accessories shall comply with requirements of
FloorScore certification.
RESILIENT BASE – RUB:
2.2
A.
Basis of Design: Provide the following:
1.
Manufacturer: Johnsonite
2.
Color: 55 Silver Grey
3.
Height: 4”
B.
Product Standard: ASTM F 1861, Type TP (rubber, thermoplastic).
1.
Group: I solid, homogeneous.
C.
Thickness: 0.125 inch (3.2 mm)
D.
Lengths: Coils in manufacturer’s standard length.
E.
Outside Corners: Job Formed.
F.
Inside Corners: Job Formed.
2.3
RESILIENT MOLDING ACCESSORIES (Transition Strips).
A.
Resilient Moldings: Resilient moldings and transition strip materials manufactured or supplied
by the manufacturers indicated are the basis of design products. Subject to compliance with
requirements, provide products and colors as indicated on the drawing’s Color and Material
Schedule.
B.
Description: The following product types may be included in the Work. Refer to drawings for
products and applications as applies.
1.
Transition strips.
C.
Profile and Dimensions: As indicated.
D.
Locations: Provide resilient molding accessories at finish transitions as required.
2.4
INSTALLATION MATERIALS
A.
Trowelable Leveling and Patching Compounds: Latex-modified, portland cement based or
blended hydraulic-cement-based formulation provided or approved by manufacturer for
applications indicated.
B.
Adhesives: Water-resistant type recommended by manufacturer to suit resilient products and
substrate conditions indicated.
KIB DISTRICT OFFICE
RESTROOM IMPROVEMENTS
RESILIENT BASE AND ACCESSORIES
096513 - 2
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
PREPARATION
A.
Prepare substrates according to manufacturer's written instructions to ensure adhesion of
resilient and metal products:
1.
2.
Fill cracks, holes, and depressions in substrates with trowelable leveling and patching
compound and remove bumps and ridges to produce a uniform and smooth substrate.
Do not install resilient products until they are same temperature as the space where they
are to be installed.
a.
3.
3.2
Move resilient products and installation materials into spaces where they will be
installed at least 48 hours in advance of installation.
Sweep and vacuum clean substrates to be covered by resilient products immediately
before installation.
RESILIENT BASE INSTALLATION
A.
Comply with the following: Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for installing
resilient base.
1.
2.
3.
4.
3.3
Apply resilient base to walls, columns, pilasters, casework and cabinets in toe spaces, and
other permanent fixtures in rooms and areas where base is required.
Install resilient base in lengths as long as practicable without gaps at seams and with tops
of adjacent pieces aligned.
Tightly adhere resilient base to substrate throughout length of each piece, with base in
continuous contact with horizontal and vertical substrates.
Do not stretch resilient base during installation.
RESILIENT ACCESSORY INSTALLATION
A.
Comply with manufacturer’s written instructions for installing resilient accessories.
B.
Resilient Molding Accessories: Butt to adjacent materials and tightly adhere to substrates
throughout length of each piece. Install reducer strips at edges of floor covering that would
otherwise be exposed.
3.4
CLEANING AND PROTECTION
C.
Comply with the following: Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for cleaning and
protection of resilient and metal products.
1.
D.
Remove grout or mortar residue from visible surfaces of metal materials.
Cover and protect resilient and metal products until Substantial Completion.
END OF SECTION 096513
KIB DISTRICT OFFICE
RESTROOM IMPROVEMENTS
RESILIENT BASE AND ACCESSORIES
096513 - 3
SECTION 096813 - TILE CARPETING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
This Section includes the following:
1.
Carpet tile products are Contractor Supplied and Installed. Scheduling of submittals,
installation, protection after installation, and coordination of the Work of this section with
other trades are the responsibility of the Contractor.
a.
B.
Related Sections:
1.
1.3
Contractor is responsible for removal of existing floor coverings, mastics and the
like, and preparation of the substrates, including leveling, to receive new floor
covering materials.
Section 096513 for “Resilient base, Stairs and Molding Accessories”.
SUBMITTALS
A.
Reference Division 1 Section “Submittal Procedures” for Confirmation Notice Submittal
requirements, if applicable, in lieu of product literature and samples.
B.
Product Data: For each product indicated.
C.
Samples: For each carpet tile exposed accessory and for each color and pattern required.
D.
Product Schedule: Use same room and product designations indicated on Drawings and in
schedules.
E.
Maintenance data.
1.4
A.
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
Comply with CRI 104, Section 5, "Storage and Handling."
KIB DISTRICT OFFICE
RESTROOM IMPROVEMENTS
TILE CARPETING
096813 - 1
1.5
PROJECT CONDITIONS
A.
General: Comply with CRI 104, Section 6.1, "Site Conditions; Temperature and Humidity."
B.
Environmental Limitations: Do not install carpet tile until wet work in spaces is complete and
dry, and ambient temperature and humidity conditions are maintained at the levels indicated for
Project when occupied for its intended use.
1.6
A.
WARRANTY
Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to replace carpet
tile that does not comply with requirements or that fails within 10 years from date of Substantial
Completion.
1.
1.7
A.
Warranty does not include deterioration or failure of carpet tile from unusual traffic,
failure of substrate, vandalism, or abuse. Failures include, but are not limited to, more
than 10 percent loss of face fiber, edge raveling, snags, runs, and delamination.
EXTRA MATERIALS
Furnish extra materials that match and are from same production runs as products installed and
that are delivered to Owner with protective covering and identified with labels describing
contents.
1.
Tile Carpeting: Furnish quantity of material equal to 5 percent of amount installed for
each type, composition, color, pattern, and size indicated.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
A.
2.2
MANUFACTURERS, CARPET TILE - CPT:
Basis of Design, provide the following:
1.
Manufacturer: Interface Flor
2.
Series: Distressed
3.
Color: 9351 Faded
INSTALLATION ACCESSORIES
A.
Trowelable Leveling and Patching Compounds: Latex-modified, hydraulic-cement-based
formulation provided by or recommended by carpet tile manufacturer.
B.
Tile Carpeting Adhesives: Water-resistant, mildew-resistant, nonstaining type to suit products
and subfloor conditions indicated, that complies with flammability requirements for installed
carpet tile and that is recommended by carpet tile manufacturer.
KIB DISTRICT OFFICE
RESTROOM IMPROVEMENTS
TILE CARPETING
096813 - 2
1.
VOC Limits: Provide adhesives with VOC content not more than 50 g/L when calculated
according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA method 24).
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
Examine substrates, areas, and conditions for compliance with requirements for maximum
moisture content, alkalinity range, installation tolerances, and other conditions affecting carpet
tile performance. Verify that substrates and conditions are satisfactory for carpet tile installation
and comply with requirements specified.
B.
Concrete Subfloors: Verify that concrete slabs comply with ASTM F 710 and the following:
1.
2.
C.
3.2
A.
Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
PREPARATION
Tile Carpeting:
1.
2.
3.
4.
3.3
A.
Slab substrates are dry and free of curing compounds, sealers, hardeners, mastics,
adhesives and other materials that may interfere with adhesive bond. Determine adhesion
and dryness characteristics by performing bond and moisture tests recommended by
carpet tile manufacturer.
Subfloors are free of cracks, ridges, depressions, scale, and foreign deposits.
General: Comply with CRI 104, Section 6.2, "Site Conditions; Floor Preparation," and
carpet tile manufacturer's written installation instructions for preparing substrates
indicated to receive carpet tile installation.
For Concrete floors, use trowelable leveling and patching compounds, according to
manufacturer's written instructions, to fill cracks, holes, and depressions in substrates.
Remove coatings, including curing compounds, and other substances that are
incompatible with adhesives and that contain soap, wax, oil, or silicone, without using
solvents. Use mechanical methods recommended in writing by carpet tile manufacturer.
Broom and vacuum clean substrates to be covered immediately before installing carpet
tile. After cleaning, examine substrates for moisture, alkaline salts, carbonation, or dust.
Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
tile carpeting INSTALLATION
Tile Carpeting General: The Owner’s installer shall comply with the following:
1.
2.
3.
Comply with CRI 104, Section 13, "Carpet Modules (Tiles)," and with carpet tile
manufacturer's written installation instructions.
Installation Method: As recommended in writing by carpet tile manufacturer.
Cut and fit carpet tile to butt tightly to vertical surfaces, permanent fixtures, and built-in
furniture including cabinets, pipes, outlets, edgings, thresholds, and nosings. Bind or seal
cut edges as recommended by carpet tile manufacturer.
KIB DISTRICT OFFICE
RESTROOM IMPROVEMENTS
TILE CARPETING
096813 - 3
4.
5.
6.
3.4
A.
Extend carpet tile into toe spaces, door reveals, closets, open-bottomed obstructions,
removable flanges, alcoves, and similar openings.
Maintain reference markers, holes, and openings that are in place or marked for future
cutting by repeating on finish flooring as marked on subfloor. Use nonpermanent, nonstaining marking device.
Install pattern parallel to walls and borders.
CLEANING AND PROTECTION
Tile Carpeting:
1.
Perform the following operations immediately after installing carpet tile:
a.
b.
c.
2.
3.
4.
Remove excess adhesive, seam sealer, and other surface blemishes using cleaner
recommended by carpet tile manufacturer.
Remove yarns that protrude from carpet tile surface.
Vacuum carpet tile using commercial machine with face-beater element.
Protect installed carpet tile to comply with CRI 104, Section 15, "Protection of Indoor
Installations."
Protect carpet tile against damage from construction operations and placement of
equipment and fixtures during the remainder of construction period. Use protection
methods indicated or recommended in writing by carpet tile manufacturer.
Final vacuum floors thoroughly prior to Owner acceptance (Substantial Completion).
END OF SECTION 096813
KIB DISTRICT OFFICE
RESTROOM IMPROVEMENTS
TILE CARPETING
096813 - 4
SECTION 099123 - INTERIOR PAINTING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
1.3
Field painting of exposed interior items and surfaces including penthouse floor surfaces.
DEFINITIONS
A.
Gloss Level 2: Not more than 10 units at 60 degrees and 10 to 35 units at 85 degrees, according
to ASTM D 523.
B.
Gloss Level 3: 10 to 25 units at 60 degrees and 10 to 35 units at 85 degrees, according to
ASTM D 523.
C.
Gloss Level 4: 20 to 35 units at 60 degrees and not less than 35 units at 85 degrees, according
to ASTM D 523.
D.
Gloss Level 5: 35 to 70 units at 60 degrees, according to ASTM D 523.
1.4
submittals
A.
Product Data: For each product indicated. Include preparation requirements and application
instructions.
B.
Samples for Verification: For each type of paint system and in each color and gloss of topcoat.
C.
Product List: For each product indicated, include the following:
1.
1.5
Cross-reference to paint system and locations of application areas.
designations indicated on Drawings and in schedules.
Use same
MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS
A.
Furnish extra materials, from the same product run, that match products installed and that are
packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.
1.
Paint: 5 percent, but not less than 1 gal. of each material and color applied.
KIB DISTRICT OFFICE
RESTROOM IMPROVEMENTS
INTERIOR PAINTING
099123 - 1
1.6
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A.
Store materials not in use in tightly covered containers in well-ventilated areas with ambient
temperatures continuously maintained at not less than 45 deg F.
1.
2.
1.7
Maintain containers in clean condition, free of foreign materials and residue.
Remove rags and waste from storage areas daily.
FIELD CONDITIONS
A.
Apply paints only when temperature of surfaces to be painted and ambient air temperatures are
between 50 and 95 deg F.
B.
Do not apply paints when relative humidity exceeds 85 percent; at temperatures less than 5
deg F above the dew point; or to damp or wet surfaces.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MANUFACTURERS:
A.
Existing Surfaces to be patched: Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements,
available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but
are not limited to, the following unless otherwise noted:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
Behr Process, Corporation
Benjamin Moore & Co.
Cloverdale Paints
Columbia Paint & Coating.
Glidden
ICI Dulux Paints
Kelly-Moore Paints.
Miller Paint.
Parker Paint Mfg. Co. Inc.
Pratt & Lambert.
Rodda Paint Co.
Sherwin Williams Company.
a.
B.
New Surfaces: Basis of Design: - PT: See Finish Schedule for locations.
1.
2.
2.2
Color: Match adjacent surface.
Manufacturer: Glidden Professional
Color: Designer Grey
PAINT MATERIALS, GENERAL
A.
Material Compatibility:
KIB DISTRICT OFFICE
RESTROOM IMPROVEMENTS
INTERIOR PAINTING
099123 - 2
1.
2.
3.
B.
2.3
Provide block fillers, primers, and finish-coat materials that are compatible with one
another and with the substrates indicated under conditions of service and application, as
demonstrated by manufacturer based on testing and field experience.
For each coat in a paint system, provide products recommended in writing by
manufacturers of topcoat for use in paint system and on substrate indicated.
Use only fillers and primers recommended in writing by the primary coating
manufacturer for the substrate and coating used.
Material Quality: Provide manufacturer's best-quality paint material of the various coating
types specified that are factory formulated and recommended by manufacturer for application
indicated. Paint-material containers not displaying manufacturer's product identification will
not be acceptable.
BLOCK FILLERS
A.
2.4
Block Filler, Latex, Interior/Exterior: MPI #4.
1.
Basis of Product Design: Glidden Professional, Concrete Coatings Block Filler
Interior/Exterior Primer, 3010
PRIMERS/SEALERS
A.
Primer Sealer, Latex, Interior: MPI #149.
1.
2.5
Basis of Product Design: Glidden Professional, Lifemaster No VOC Interior Primer,
9116
WATER-BASED PAINTS
A.
Latex, Interior, Institutional Low Odor/VOC, (Gloss Level 3): MPI #145.
1.
Basis of Product Design: Glidden Professional, Diamond 450 No VOC Interior Eggshell
Paint, 7200
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
GENERAL
A.
Paint exposed surfaces, except where these Specifications indicate that the surface or material is
not to be painted or is to remain natural. If an item or a surface is not specifically mentioned,
paint the item or surface the same as similar adjacent materials or surfaces. If a color of finish
is not indicated, Architect will select from standard colors and finishes available.
B.
Do not paint prefinished items, shop finished materials, concealed surfaces, finished metal
surfaces, operating parts, and labels.
1.
2.
3.
4.
Prefinished items include factory-finished components.
Concealed surfaces include walls or ceilings in generally inaccessible spaces.
Finished metal surfaces.
Operating parts: moving parts of operating equipment, valves, linkages, sensing devices
and the like.
KIB DISTRICT OFFICE
RESTROOM IMPROVEMENTS
INTERIOR PAINTING
099123 - 3
5.
3.2
Labels: Do not paint over UL, FMG, or other code-required labels or equipment name,
identification, performance rating, or nomenclature plates.
EXAMINATION
A.
Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Applicator present, for compliance with
requirements for paint application.
1.
2.
B.
Coordination of Work: Review other Sections in which primers are provided to ensure
compatibility of the total system for various substrates. On request, furnish information on
characteristics of finish materials to ensure use of compatible primers.
1.
3.3
Proceed with paint application only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected
and surfaces receiving paint are thoroughly dry.
Start of painting will be construed as Applicator's acceptance of surfaces and conditions
within a particular area.
Notify Architect about anticipated problems when using the materials specified over
substrates primed by others.
APPLICATION
A.
Coordination of Work: Review other Sections in which primers are provided to ensure
compatibility of the total system for various substrates. On request, furnish information on
characteristics of finish materials to ensure use of compatible primers.
B.
Remove hardware and hardware accessories, plates, machined surfaces, lighting fixtures, and
similar items already installed that are not to be painted. If removal is impractical or impossible
because of size or weight of the item, provide surface-applied protection before surface
preparation and painting. Reinstall items removed after painting is complete.
C.
Surface Preparation: Clean and prepare surfaces to be painted according to manufacturer's
written instructions for each particular substrate condition and as specified.
1.
Provide barrier coats over incompatible primers or remove and reprime.
D.
Material Preparation: Maintain containers, and stir and mix materials in accordance with
manufacturers’ recommendations.
E.
Painting Fire Suppression, Plumbing, HVAC, Electrical, Communication, and Electronic Safety
and Security Work:
1.
Paint the following work where exposed in equipment rooms:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
Equipment, including panelboards.
Uninsulated metal piping.
Uninsulated plastic piping.
Pipe hangers and supports.
Metal conduit.
Plastic conduit.
KIB DISTRICT OFFICE
RESTROOM IMPROVEMENTS
INTERIOR PAINTING
099123 - 4
g.
h.
2.
Paint the following work where exposed in occupied spaces:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
3.
F.
2.
Paint portions of internal surfaces of metal ducts, without liner, behind air inlets and
outlets that are visible from occupied spaces.
Paint surfaces behind movable equipment and furniture the same as similar exposed
surfaces. Before final installation of equipment, paint surfaces behind permanently fixed
equipment or furniture with prime coat only.
Paint backsides of access panels and removable or hinged covers to match exposed
surfaces.
Application Procedures: Apply paints and coatings by brush, roller, spray, or other applicators
according to manufacturer's written instructions.
1.
2.
3.
4.
3.4
Equipment, including panelboards.
Uninsulated metal piping.
Uninsulated plastic piping.
Pipe hangers and supports.
Metal conduit.
Plastic conduit.
Duct, equipment, and pipe insulation having cotton or canvas insulation covering
or other paintable jacket material.
Exposed Surfaces: Areas visible when permanent or built-in fixtures, grilles, convector covers
and similar components are in place.
1.
G.
Tanks that do not have factory-applied final finishes.
Duct, equipment, and pipe insulation having cotton or canvas insulation covering
or other paintable jacket material.
When applying to existing surfaces where partial painting, touch-up or patch and repair
are indicated or required, apply coatings to the nearest corner, break in surface plane,
expansion or control joint, or similar obvious demarcation point.
Minimum Thickness:
Apply paint materials no thinner than manufacturer's
recommended spreading rate. Provide total dry film thickness of the entire system as
recommended by manufacturer.
Prime Coats: Apply a prime coat(s) as recommended by manufacturer: apply to material
that is required to be painted or finished and that has not been prime coated by others.
Recoat primed and sealed surfaces where evidence of suction spots or unsealed areas in
first coat appears, to ensure a finish coat with no burn-through or other defects due to
insufficient sealing.
Pigmented (Opaque) Finishes: Completely cover surfaces as necessary to provide a
smooth, opaque surface of uniform finish, color, appearance, and coverage. Cloudiness,
spotting, holidays, laps, brush marks, runs, sags, ropiness, or other surface imperfections
will not be acceptable.
CLEANING AND PROTECTING
A.
At the end of each workday, remove empty cans, rags, rubbish, and other discarded paint
materials from Project site.
KIB DISTRICT OFFICE
RESTROOM IMPROVEMENTS
INTERIOR PAINTING
099123 - 5
B.
After completing finish application, clean spattered surfaces. Remove spattered materials by
washing, scraping, or other methods. Do not scratch or damage adjacent finished surfaces.
C.
Protect work of other trades, whether being painted or not, against damage from painting.
Correct damage by cleaning, repairing or replacing, and repainting, as approved by Architect.
D.
Provide "Wet Paint" signs to protect newly painted finishes. After completing painting
operations, remove temporary protective wrappings provided by others to protect their work.
3.5
INTERIOR PAINT SCHEDULE
A.
CMU Substrates:
a.
b.
B.
Block Filler: Block filler, latex, interior/exterior, MPI #4.
Finish Coats: Latex, interior, (Gloss Level 3), MPI #145.
Gypsum Board: Two finish coats of interior low-luster acrylic enamel over interior gypsum
board primer; except two finish coats of interior semigloss acrylic enamel over interior gypsum
board primer at exposed GWB in toilet rooms.
1.
Acrylic Finish: Two finish coats over a primer.
a.
b.
Primer: Primer Sealer, Latex, Interior, MPI #149
Finish Coats: Latex, Interior, ('eggshell-like' - MPI Gloss Level 3), MPI #145
END OF SECTION 099123
KIB DISTRICT OFFICE
RESTROOM IMPROVEMENTS
INTERIOR PAINTING
099123 - 6
SECTION 102113.19 - PLASTIC TOILET COMPARTMENTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
This Section includes solid-polymer units as follows:
1.
2.
B.
Related Sections:
1.
2.
1.2
Toilet Enclosures: Floor-mounted, overhead braced.
Urinal Screens: Wall hung.
Section 093000”Tiling” coordinate with layout and installation
Section 102800 "Toilet, Bath, and Laundry Accessories" for toilet tissue dispensers, grab
bars, purse shelves, and similar accessories.
SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
B.
Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work.
1.
2.
C.
1.3
Show locations of cutouts for compartment-mounted toilet accessories.
Show locations of reinforcements for compartment-mounted grab bars.
Samples: For each exposed finish.
WARRANTY
A.
Provide two (2) year warranty on materials and installation.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
SOLID-POLYMER UNITS
A. Basis of Design: Provide the following:
2.2
1.
Santana Products, Inc., “Poly-Mar HD.”
2.
Color: Grey
TOILET ENCLOSURES
A. Door, Panel, and Pilaster Construction: Solid, high-density polyethylene (HDPE) or
polypropylene (PP) panel material, not less than 1 inch (25 mm) thick, seamless, with eased
edges, and with homogenous color and pattern throughout thickness of material.
KIB DISTRICT OFFICE
RESTROOM IMPROVEMENTS
PLASTIC TOILET COMPARTMENTS
10211319 - 1
B. Pilaster Shoes and Sleeves (Caps): Manufacturer's standard design; stainless steel.
C. Brackets (Fittings):
1.
2.
Stirrup Type: Ear or U-brackets, stainless steel.
Wall Bracket: 54” minimum Continuous Stainless Steel
D. Heat-Sink Strip: Manufacturer's standard continuous, extruded-aluminum strip fastened to
exposed bottom edges of solid-polymer components to prevent burning.
E. Hinges: 54” Stainless Steel Gravity Close Continuous Hinges
2.2
ACCESSORIES
A.
Hardware and Accessories: Manufacturer's standard design, heavy-duty operating hardware
and accessories.
1.
Material: Stainless steel.
B.
Overhead Bracing: Manufacturer's standard continuous, extruded-aluminum head rail with
antigrip profile and in manufacturer's standard finish.
C.
Anchorages and Fasteners: Manufacturer's standard exposed fasteners of stainless steel finished
to match hardware, with theft-resistant-type heads. Provide sex-type bolts for through-bolt
applications. For concealed anchors, use hot-dip galvanized or other rust-resistant, protectivecoated steel.
2.3
FABRICATION
A.
Overhead-Braced Units: Provide manufacturer's standard corrosion-resistant supports, leveling
mechanism, fasteners, and anchors at pilasters to suit floor conditions. Make provisions for
setting and securing continuous head rail at top of each pilaster. Provide shoes at pilasters to
conceal supports and leveling mechanism.
B.
Doors: Unless otherwise indicated, provide 24-inch- (610-mm-) wide in-swinging doors for
standard toilet compartments and 36-inch- (914-mm-) wide out-swinging doors with a
minimum 32-inch- (813-mm-) wide clear opening for compartments indicated to be accessible
to people with disabilities.
1.
2.
3.
4.
Hinges: Manufacturer's continuous self-closing type that can be adjusted to hold doors
open at any angle up to 90 degrees.
Latch and Keeper: Manufacturer's standard surface-mounted latch unit designed for
emergency access and with combination rubber-faced door strike and keeper. Provide
units that comply with accessibility requirements of authorities having jurisdiction at
compartments indicated to be accessible to people with disabilities.
Coat Hook: Manufacturer's standard combination hook and rubber-tipped bumper, sized
to prevent door from hitting compartment-mounted accessories.
Door Bumper: Manufacturer's standard rubber-tipped bumper at out-swinging doors.
KIB DISTRICT OFFICE
RESTROOM IMPROVEMENTS
PLASTIC TOILET COMPARTMENTS
10211319 - 2
5.
Door Pull: Manufacturer's standard unit at out-swinging doors that complies with
accessibility requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. Provide units on both sides
of doors at compartments indicated to be accessible to people with disabilities.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION
A.
General: Comply with manufacturer's written installation instructions. Install units rigid,
straight, level, and plumb. Secure units in position with manufacturer's recommended
anchoring devices.
1.
Maximum Clearances:
a.
b.
2.
Pilasters and Panels: 1/2 inch (13 mm).
Panels and Walls: 1 inch (25 mm).
Brackets: Secure panels to walls and to pilasters with continuous stainless steel brackets
B.
Overhead-Braced Units: Secure pilasters to floor and level, plumb, and tighten. Secure
continuous head rail to each pilaster with not less than two fasteners. Hang doors to align tops
of doors with tops of panels and adjust so tops of doors are parallel with overhead brace when
doors are in closed position.
C.
Wall-Hung Urinal Screens: Attach with anchoring devices to suit supporting structure. Set
units level and plumb and to resist lateral impact.
3.2
ADJUSTING
A.
Hardware Adjustment: Adjust and lubricate hardware according to manufacturer's written
instructions for proper operation. Set hinges on in-swinging doors to hold doors open
approximately 30 degrees from closed position when unlatched. Set hinges on out-swinging
doors to return doors to fully closed position.
END OF SECTION 102113.19
KIB DISTRICT OFFICE
RESTROOM IMPROVEMENTS
PLASTIC TOILET COMPARTMENTS
10211319 - 3
SECTION 102800 – TOILET, BATH AND LAUNDRY ACCESSORIES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
Section Includes:
1.
2.
1.2
Public-use washroom accessories.
Underlavatory guards.
SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
B.
Product Schedule: Indicating types, quantities, sizes, and installation locations by room of each
accessory required.
1.
2.
Identify locations using room designations indicated.
Identify products using designations indicated.
C.
Maintenance data.
D.
Warranty: Sample of special warranty.
1.3
WARRANTY
A.
Special Mirror Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to
replace mirrors that develop visible silver spoilage defects and that fail in materials or
workmanship within specified warranty period.
1.
Warranty Period: 15 years from date of Substantial Completion.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
PUBLIC-USE WASHROOM ACCESSORIES
A.
Basis-of-Design Product: Provide the following:
B.
Grab Bars (GB):
1.
2.
3.
Basis-of-Design Product: Bobrick Model B-6806 Series.
Mounting: Flanges with concealed fasteners.
Material: Stainless steel, 0.05 inch (1.3 mm) thick.
KIB DISTRICT OFFICE
RESTROOM IMPROVEMENTS
TOILET, BATH, AND LAUNDRY ACCESSORIES
102800 - 1
a.
4.
5.
C.
Basis of Design Product: Bobrick B-4112
Seat Cover Dispenser: SCD
1.
2.2
Basis of Design Product: Bobrick B-4288
Soap Dispenser: SD
1.
I.
Basis of Design Product: Bobrick B-43699
Surface Mounted Toilet Tissue Dispenser: TPD
1.
H.
Basis of Design Product: Bobrick Model B-4369
Surface Mounted Paper Towel Dispenser and Waste Receptacle: PTD/WR:
1.
G.
Basis-of-Design Product: Bobrick Model B-165, 2436
Recessed Paper Towel Dispenser and Waste Receptacle: PTD/WR:
1.
F.
Basis-of-Design Product: Bobrick Model B254, Classic Series® surface-mounted unit.
Mirror without Shelf (MIRR):
1.
E.
Outside Diameter: 1-1/2 inches (38 mm).
Configuration and Length: As indicated on Drawings.
Sanitary Napkin Disposal:
1.
D.
Finish: Satin.
Basis of Design Product: Bobrick B-4221
UNDERLAVATORY GUARDS
A.
Acceptable manufacturers may include but are not limited to:
1.
2.
2.3
Plumberex Specialty Products, Inc.
Truebro by IPS Corporation.
FABRICATION
A.
Keys: Provide universal keys for internal access to accessories for servicing and resupplying.
Provide minimum of six keys to Owner's representative.
KIB DISTRICT OFFICE
RESTROOM IMPROVEMENTS
TOILET, BATH, AND LAUNDRY ACCESSORIES
102800 - 2
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION
A.
Install accessories according to manufacturers' written instructions, using fasteners appropriate
to substrate indicated and recommended by unit manufacturer. Install units level, plumb, and
firmly anchored in locations and at heights indicated.
B.
Grab Bars: Install to withstand a downward load of at least 250 lbf (1112 N), when tested
according to ASTM F 446.
END OF SECTION 102800
KIB DISTRICT OFFICE
RESTROOM IMPROVEMENTS
TOILET, BATH, AND LAUNDRY ACCESSORIES
102800 - 3
SECTION 123661.16 - SOLID SURFACING COUNTERTOPS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
Section Includes:
1.
2.
3.
4.
1.3
Solid surface material countertops.
Solid surface material backsplashes.
Solid surface material end splashes.
Solid surface material apron fronts.
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For countertop materials.
B.
Shop Drawings: For countertops. Show materials, finishes, edge and backsplash profiles,
methods of joining, and cutouts for plumbing fixtures.
1.
2.
C.
1.4
Show locations and details of joints.
Show direction of directional pattern, if any.
Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of material exposed to view.
CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A.
1.5
Maintenance Data: For solid surface material countertops to include in maintenance manuals.
Include Product Data for care products used or recommended by Installer and names, addresses,
and telephone numbers of local sources for products.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Fabricator Qualifications: Shop that employs skilled workers who custom-fabricate countertops
similar to that required for this Project, and whose products have a record of successful inservice performance.
B.
Installer Qualifications: Fabricator of countertops.
KIB DISTRICT OFFICE
RESTROOM IMPROVEMENTS
SOLID SURFACING COUNTERTOPS
12366116 - 1
1.6
FIELD CONDITIONS
A.
1.7
Field Measurements: Verify dimensions of countertops by field measurements after base
cabinets are installed but before countertop fabrication is complete.
COORDINATION
A.
Coordinate locations of utilities that will penetrate countertops or backsplashes.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
SOLID SURFACE COUNTERTOP MATERIALS
A.
Basis of Design: Provide the following:
1.
Manufacturer: DuPont
2.
Series: Corian
3.
Color: Glacier Ice
B.
Particleboard: ANSI A208.1, Grade M-2-Exterior Glue.
2.2
COUNTERTOP FABRICATION
A.
Fabricate countertops according to solid surface material manufacturer's written instructions and
to the AWI/AWMAC/WI's "Architectural Woodwork Standards."
1.
B.
Grade: Custom.
Configuration:
1.
2.
3.
Front: Straight, slightly eased at top with separate apron, 6 inches (150 mm) high,
recessed 1/4-inch (6.4-mm) behind front edge.
Backsplash: Straight, slightly eased at corner.
End Splash: Matching backsplash.
C.
Countertops: 3/4-inch- (19-mm-) thick, solid surface material with front edge built up with
same material.
D.
Backsplashes: 1/2-inch- (12.7-mm-) thick, solid surface material.
E.
Fabricate tops with shop-applied edges and backsplashes unless otherwise indicated. Comply
with solid surface material manufacturer's written instructions for adhesives, sealers,
fabrication, and finishing.
1.
2.
F.
Fabricate with loose backsplashes for field assembly.
Install integral sink bowls in countertops in the shop.
Joints: Fabricate countertops without joints.
KIB DISTRICT OFFICE
RESTROOM IMPROVEMENTS
SOLID SURFACING COUNTERTOPS
12366116 - 2
G.
Joints: Fabricate countertops in sections for joining in field.
1.
2.
H.
Joint Locations: Not within 18 inches (450 mm) of a sink or cooktop and not where a
countertop section less than 36 inches (900 mm) long would result, unless unavoidable.
Splined Joints: Accurately cut kerfs in edges at joints for insertion of metal splines to
maintain alignment of surfaces at joints. Make width of cuts slightly more than thickness
of splines to provide snug fit.
Cutouts and Holes:
1.
Undercounter Plumbing Fixtures: Make cutouts for fixtures using template or pattern
furnished by fixture manufacturer. Form cutouts to smooth, even curves.
a.
b.
c.
2.
3.
2.3
Provide vertical edges, slightly eased at juncture of cutout edges with top and
bottom surfaces of countertop and projecting 3/16 inch (5 mm) into fixture
opening.
Provide vertical edges, rounded to 3/8-inch (10-mm) radius at juncture of cutout
edges with top surface of countertop, slightly eased at bottom, and projecting 3/16
inch (5 mm) into fixture opening.
Provide 3/4-inch (20-mm) full bullnose edges projecting 3/8 inch (10 mm) into
fixture opening.
Counter-Mounted Plumbing Fixtures: Prepare countertops in shop for field cutting
openings for counter-mounted fixtures. Mark tops for cutouts and drill holes at corners of
cutout locations. Make corner holes of largest radius practical.
Fittings: Drill countertops in shop for plumbing fittings, undercounter soap dispensers,
and similar items.
INSTALLATION MATERIALS
A.
Adhesive: Product recommended by solid surface material manufacturer.
B.
Sealant for Countertops: Comply with applicable requirements in Section 079200 "Joint
Sealants."
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
Examine substrates to receive solid surface material countertops and conditions under which
countertops will be installed, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for
installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of countertops.
B.
Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
KIB DISTRICT OFFICE
RESTROOM IMPROVEMENTS
SOLID SURFACING COUNTERTOPS
12366116 - 3
3.2
INSTALLATION
A.
Install countertops level to a tolerance of 1/8 inch in 8 feet (3 mm in 2.4 m), 1/4 inch (6 mm)
maximum. Do not exceed 1/64-inch (0.4-mm) difference between planes of adjacent units.
B.
Fasten countertops by screwing through corner blocks of base units into underside of
countertop. Predrill holes for screws as recommended by manufacturer. Align adjacent surfaces
and, using adhesive in color to match countertop, form seams to comply with manufacturer's
written instructions. Carefully dress joints smooth, remove surface scratches, and clean entire
surface.
C.
Fasten subtops to cabinets by screwing through subtops into cornerblocks of base cabinets.
Shim as needed to align subtops in a level plane.
D.
Secure countertops to subtops with adhesive according to solid surface material manufacturer's
written instructions. Align adjacent surfaces and, using adhesive in color to match countertop,
form seams to comply with manufacturer's written instructions. Carefully dress joints smooth,
remove surface scratches, and clean entire surface.
E.
Bond joints with adhesive and draw tight as countertops are set. Mask areas of countertops
adjacent to joints to prevent adhesive smears.
F.
Install backsplashes and end splashes by adhering to wall and countertops with adhesive. Mask
areas of countertops and splashes adjacent to joints to prevent adhesive smears.
G.
Install aprons to backing and countertops with adhesive. Mask areas of countertops and splashes
adjacent to joints to prevent adhesive smears. Fasten by screwing through backing. Predrill
holes for screws as recommended by manufacturer.
H.
Complete cutouts not finished in shop. Mask areas of countertops adjacent to cutouts to prevent
damage while cutting. Make cutouts to accurately fit items to be installed, and at right angles to
finished surfaces unless beveling is required for clearance. Ease edges slightly to prevent
snipping.
1.
I.
Seal edges of cutouts in particleboard subtops by saturating with varnish.
Apply sealant to gaps at walls; comply with Section 079200 "Joint Sealants."
END OF SECTION 123661.16
KIB DISTRICT OFFICE
RESTROOM IMPROVEMENTS
SOLID SURFACING COUNTERTOPS
12366116 - 4
SECTION 220700 - PLUMBING INSULATION
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
Section Includes:
1.
1.2
REFERENCES
A.
ASTM International:
1.
ASTM C534 - Standard Specification for Preformed Flexible Elastomeric
Cellular Thermal Insulation in Sheet and Tubular Form.
2.
ASTM C547 - Standard Specification for Mineral Fiber Pipe Insulation.
3.
ASTM C585 - Standard Practice for Inner and Outer Diameters of Rigid Thermal
Insulation for Nominal Sizes of Pipe and Tubing (NPS System).
4.
ASTM C921 - Standard Practice for Determining the Properties of Jacketing
Materials for Thermal Insulation.
5.
ASTM C1136 - Standard Specification for Flexible, Low Permeance Vapor
Retarders for Thermal Insulation.
6.
ASTM D1784 - Standard Specification for Rigid Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC)
Compounds and Chlorinated Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (CPVC) Compounds.
7.
ASTM E84 - Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of
Building Materials.
8.
ASTM E96 - Standard Test Methods for Water Vapor Transmission of Materials.
B.
National Fire Protection Association:
1.
C.
NFPA 255 - Standard Method of Test of Surface Burning Characteristics of
Building Materials.
Underwriters Laboratories Inc.:
1.
1.3
Plumbing piping insulation, jackets and accessories.
UL 723 - Tests for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials.
SUBMITTALS
A.
Section 01330 - Submittal Procedures: Submittal procedures.
B.
Product Data: Submit product description, thermal characteristics and list of materials
and thickness for each service, and location.
C.
Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Submit manufacturers published literature
indicating proper installation procedures.
D.
Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify products meet or exceed specified requirements.
KIB DISTRICT OFFICE
RESTROOM IMPROVEMENTS
PLUMBING INSULATION
220700 - 1
1.4
1.5
ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS
A.
Section 016000 - Product Requirements: Environmental conditions affecting products on
site.
B.
Install insulation only when ambient temperature and humidity conditions are within
range recommended by manufacturer.
C.
Maintain temperature before, during, and after installation for minimum period of 24
hours.
FIELD MEASUREMENTS
A.
Verify field measurements prior to fabrication.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
1.2
MANUFACTURER
A.
Manufacturers for Glass Fiber and Mineral Fiber Insulation Products:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
B.
Manufacturers for Closed Cell Elastomeric Insulation Products:
1.
2.
3.
4.
1.3
CertainTeed.
Knauf.
Johns Manville.
Owens-Corning.
Substitutions: Section 016000 - Product Requirements.
Aeroflex. Aerocell.
Armacell, LLC. Armaflex.
Nomaco. K-flex.
Substitutions: Section 016000 - Product Requirements.
PIPE INSULATION
A.
TYPE P-1: ASTM C547, molded glass fiber pipe insulation.
1.
2.
3.
4.
Thermal Conductivity: 0.23 at 75 degrees F.
Operating Temperature Range: 0 to 850 degrees F.
Vapor Barrier Jacket: ASTM C1136, Type I, factory applied reinforced foil kraft
with self-sealing adhesive joints.
Jacket Temperature Limit: minus 20 to 150 degrees F.
KIB DISTRICT OFFICE
RESTROOM IMPROVEMENTS
PLUMBING INSULATION
220700 - 2
1.4
PIPE INSULATION JACKETS
A.
Vapor Retarder Jacket:
1.
2.
B.
PVC Plastic Pipe Jacket:
1.
2.
3.
C.
3.
1.6
Product Description: ASTM D1784, One piece molded type fitting covers and
sheet material, off-white color.
Thickness: 10mil.
Connections: Brush on welding adhesive.
Field Applied Glass Fiber Fabric Jacket System:
1.
2.
1.5
ASTM C921, white Kraft paper with glass fiber yarn, bonded to aluminized film.
Moisture vapor transmission: ASTM E96; 0.02 perm-inches.
Insulating Cement/Mastic: ASTM C195; hydraulic setting on mineral wool.
Glass Fiber Fabric:
a.
Cloth: Untreated; 9 oz/sq yd weight.
b.
Blanket: 1.0 lb/cu ft density.
c.
Weave: 5 x 5.
Indoor Vapor Retarder Finish:
a.
Cloth: Untreated; 9 oz/sq yd weight.
b.
Vinyl emulsion type acrylic, compatible with insulation, white color.
PIPE INSULATION ACCESSORIES
A.
Vapor Retarder Lap Adhesive: Compatible with insulation.
B.
Covering Adhesive Mastic: Compatible with insulation.
C.
Piping 1-1/2 inches diameter and smaller: Galvanized steel insulation protection shield.
MSS SP-69, Type 40. Length: Based on pipe size and insulation thickness.
D.
Tie Wire: 0.048 inch stainless steel with twisted ends on maximum 12 inch centers.
E.
Mineral Fiber Hydraulic-Setting Thermal Insulating and Finishing Cement: ASTM
C449/C449M.
F.
Insulating Cement: ASTM C195; hydraulic setting on mineral wool.
G.
Adhesives: Compatible with insulation.
EQUIPMENT INSULATION
A.
Type E-1: ASTM C553; glass fiber, flexible or semi-rigid, noncombustible.
1.
Thermal Conductivity: 0.24 at 75 degrees F.
KIB DISTRICT OFFICE
RESTROOM IMPROVEMENTS
PLUMBING INSULATION
220700 - 3
2.
3.
B.
TYPE E-2: ASTM C612; glass fiber, rigid board, noncombustible with factory applied
reinforced aluminum foil jacket.
1.
2.
3.
4.
C.
Operating Temperature Range: 0 to 450 degrees F.
Density: 1.5 pound per cubic foot. .
Thermal Conductivity: 0.24 at 75 degrees F.
Operating Temperature Range: 0 to 450 degrees F.
Density: 3.0 pound per cubic foot.
Jacket Temperature Limit: minus 20 to 150 degrees F
TYPE E-8: ASTM C534, Type II, flexible, closed cell elastomeric insulation, sheet.
1.
2.
Thermal Conductivity: 0.27 at 75 degrees F.
Operating Temperature Range: Range: Minus 70 to 220 degrees F.
PART 3 EXECUTION
1.7
1.8
EXAMINATION
A.
Administrative Requirements: Coordination and project conditions.
B.
Verify piping and equipment has been tested before applying insulation materials.
C.
Verify surfaces are clean and dry, with foreign material removed.
D.
Prepare surfaces and install insulation, jacketing, and accessories in accordance with
manufacturer’s recommendations, building codes, and industry standards.
INSTALLATION - PIPING SYSTEMS
A.
Piping Exposed to View in Finished Spaces: Locate insulation and cover seams in least
visible locations.
B.
Continue insulation through penetrations of building assemblies or portions of assemblies
having fire resistance rating of one hour or less. Provide intumescent firestopping when
continuing insulation through assembly. Finish at supports, protrusions, and interruptions.
C.
Piping Systems Conveying Fluids Below Ambient Temperature:
1.
Insulate entire system including fittings, valves, unions, flanges, strainers,
flexible connections, and expansion joints.
KIB DISTRICT OFFICE
RESTROOM IMPROVEMENTS
PLUMBING INSULATION
220700 - 4
2.
3.
4.
5.
D.
Hot Piping Systems less than 140 degrees F:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
E.
Piping 1-1/2 inches Diameter and Smaller: Install galvanized steel shield between
pipe hanger and insulation.
a.
Shields: Galvanized steel between pipe hangers or pipe hanger rolls and
insulations. Shields shall extend a minimum of 6 inches beyond hanger
in both directions.
Insulation Terminating Points:
1.
2.
3.
G.
Furnish factory-applied or field-applied standard jackets. Secure with outward
clinch expanding staples or pressure sensitive adhesive system on standard
factory-applied jacket and butt strips or both.
Insulate fittings, joints, and valves with insulation of like material and thickness
as adjoining pipe. Finish with glass cloth and adhesive or PVC fitting covers.
Do not insulate unions and flanges at equipment, but bevel and seal ends of
insulation at such locations.
Insulation shall be continuous at all hangers, supports, penetrations or clamps.
Exception: Branch piping serving fixtures from below shall not require full
insulation through the floor pipe penetration. Contractor to install mineral wool
or ½” insulation in interstitial space. The openings shall be sleeved.
Inserts and Shields:
1.
F.
Insulation shall be continuous at all hangers, supports, penetrations or clamps.
Furnish factory-applied or field-applied vapor retarder jackets. Secure factoryapplied jackets with pressure sensitive adhesive self-sealing longitudinal laps and
butt strips. Secure field-applied jackets with outward clinch expanding staples
and seal staple penetrations with vapor retarder mastic.
Vapor barrier shall also be continuous through penetration and through
transitions between pipe insulation and inserts.
Insulate fittings, joints, and valves with molded insulation of like material and
thickness as adjacent pipe. Finish with glass cloth and vapor retarder adhesive or
PVC fitting covers.
Hot water branch piping: Terminate hot water piping insulation at point it exits
the wall and connects to the fixture isolation valve. Seal ends of all insulation
terminations with waterproof mastic.
Cold water branch piping: Insulate cold water piping and associated components
up to point it exits the wall and connects to the fixture isolation valve. Seal ends
of all cold pipe insulation terminations with waterproof and vapor-proof mastic.
Hot water circulation piping: Insulate entire piping system to its connection with
the hot water piping system.
Pipe Exposed in Wet Spaces including Janitors Closets and Floor Care Maintenance
Rooms: Finish with PVC jacket. Seal joints water tight.
KIB DISTRICT OFFICE
RESTROOM IMPROVEMENTS
PLUMBING INSULATION
220700 - 5
1.9
H.
Buried Piping: Insulate only where insulation manufacturer recommends insulation
product may be installed in trench, tunnel or direct buried. Install factory fabricated
assembly with inner all-purpose service jacket with self-sealing lap, and asphalt
impregnated open mesh glass fabric, with 1 mil thick aluminum foil sandwiched between
three layers of bituminous compound; outer surface faced with polyester film.
I.
Prepare pipe insulation for finish painting.
INSTALLATION - EQUIPMENT
A.
Factory Insulated Equipment: Do not insulate.
B.
Exposed Equipment: Locate insulation and cover seams in least visible locations.
C.
Fill joints, cracks, seams, and depressions with bedding compound to form smooth
surface. On cold equipment, use vapor retarder cement.
D.
Equipment Containing Fluids Below Ambient Temperature:
1.
2.
3.
4.
E.
Equipment Containing Fluids 140 degrees F Or Less:
1.
2.
3.
F.
1.10
Insulate entire equipment surfaces.
Apply insulation close to equipment by grooving, scoring, and beveling
insulation. Fasten insulation to equipment with studs, pins, clips, adhesive, wires,
or bands.
Furnish factory-applied or field-applied vapor retarder jackets. Secure factoryapplied jackets with pressure sensitive adhesive self-sealing longitudinal laps and
butt strips. Secure field-applied jackets with outward clinch expanding staples
and seal staple penetrations with vapor retarder mastic.
Finish insulation at supports, protrusions, and interruptions.
Do not insulate flanges and unions, but bevel and seal ends of insulation.
Install insulation with factory-applied or field applied jackets, with or without
vapor barrier. Finish with glass cloth and adhesive.
Finish insulation at supports, protrusions, and interruptions.
Equipment Requiring Access for Maintenance, Repair, or Cleaning: Install insulation for
easy removal and replacement without damage.
SCHEDULES
A.
Water Supply Services Piping Insulation Schedule:
INSULATION
INSULATION
PIPING SYSTEM
KIB DISTRICT OFFICE
RESTROOM IMPROVEMENTS
TYPE
PIPE SIZE
THICKNESS
inches
PLUMBING INSULATION
220700 - 6
Domestic Hot Water Supply
and Recirculation
P-1
Domestic Cold Water
P-1
B.
3/4 inches and smaller
0.5
1 inches and larger
1.0
3/4 inches and smaller
0.5
1 inches and larger
1.0
Drainage Services Piping Insulation Schedule:
INSULATION
PIPING SYSTEM
INSULATION
PIPE SIZE
TYPE
Storm Piping (horizontal above
ground within building)
C.
P-1
THICKNESS
inches
All sizes
1.0
END OF SECTION 220700
KIB DISTRICT OFFICE
RESTROOM IMPROVEMENTS
PLUMBING INSULATION
220700 - 7
SECTION 230593 - TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
Section Includes:
1.
2.
3.
B.
Scope:
1.
2.
3.
1.2
Perform TAB with each phase of completed construction.
Existing ventilation systems remaining in service require airflow measuring at
central equipment and observation of interaction with new ventilation systems.
Existing heating piping distribution requires gross balancing at piping mains.
REFERENCES
A.
Associated Air Balance Council:
1.
B.
C.
AABC MN-1 - National Standards for Testing and Balancing Heating,
Ventilating, and Air Conditioning Systems.
American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air-Conditioning Engineers:
1.
ASHRAE 111 - Practices for Measurement, Testing, Adjusting and Balancing of
Building Heating, Ventilation, Air-Conditioning and Refrigeration Systems.
Natural Environmental Balancing Bureau:
1.
1.3
Testing adjusting and balancing of air systems.
Testing adjusting, and balancing of hydronic and refrigerating systems.
Measurement of final operating condition of HVAC systems.
NEBB - Procedural Standards for Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing of
Environmental Systems.
SUBMITTALS
A.
Submittal procedures.
B.
Prior to commencing Work, submit proof of latest calibration date of each instrument.
KIB DISTRICT OFFICE
RESTROOM IMPROVEMENTS
TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC
230593 - 1
1.4
1.5
1.6
C.
Test Reports: Indicate data on AABC MN-1 National Standards for Total System
Balance forms, forms prepared following ASHRAE 111, or NEBB Report forms.
D.
Field Reports: Indicate deficiencies preventing proper testing, adjusting, and balancing of
systems and equipment to achieve specified performance.
E.
Prior to commencing Work, submit report forms or outlines indicating adjusting,
balancing, and equipment data required. Include detailed procedures, agenda, sample
report forms.
F.
Submit draft copies of report for review prior to final acceptance of Project.
G.
Furnish reports in letter size, 3-ring binder manuals, complete with table of contents page
and indexing tabs, with cover identification at front and side. Include set of reduced
drawings with air outlets and equipment identified to correspond with data sheets, and
indicating thermostat locations.
CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A.
Section 017300 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Closeout procedures.
B.
Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of balancing valves and rough
setting.
C.
Operation and Maintenance Data: Furnish final copy of testing, adjusting, and balancing
report inclusion in operating and maintenance manuals.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Perform Work in accordance with AABC MN-1 National Standards for Field
Measurement and Instrumentation, Total System Balance, ASHRAE 111, or NEBB
Procedural Standards for Testing, Balancing and Adjusting of Environmental Systems.
B.
Maintain one copy of each document on site.
C.
Prior to commencing Work, calibrate each instrument to be used.
QUALIFICATIONS
A.
Agency: Company specializing in testing, adjusting, and balancing of systems specified
in this section with minimum of three years experience
KIB DISTRICT OFFICE
RESTROOM IMPROVEMENTS
TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC
230593 - 2
1.7
SEQUENCING
A.
Work sequence.
B.
Sequence balancing between completion of systems tested and Date of Substantial
Completion.
PART 2 – PRODUCTS (Not Used)
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
Coordination and project conditions.
B.
Verify systems are complete and operable before commencing work. Verify the
following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
3.2
Systems are started and operating in safe and normal condition.
Temperature control systems are installed complete and operable.
Proper thermal overload protection is in place for electrical equipment.
Final filters are clean and in place. If required, install temporary media in
addition to final filters.
Duct systems are clean of debris.
Fans are rotating correctly.
Fire and volume dampers are in place and open.
Air coil fins are cleaned and combed.
Access doors are closed and duct end caps are in place.
Air outlets are installed and connected.
Duct system leakage is minimized.
Hydronic systems are flushed, filled, and vented.
Pumps are rotating correctly.
Proper strainer baskets are clean and in place or in normal position.
Service and balancing valves are open.
PREPARATION
A.
Furnish instruments required for testing, adjusting, and balancing operations.
B.
Make instruments available to Architect/Engineer to facilitate spot checks during testing.
KIB DISTRICT OFFICE
RESTROOM IMPROVEMENTS
TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC
230593 - 3
3.3
3.4
3.5
INSTALLATION TOLERANCES
A.
Air Handling Systems: Adjust to within plus or minus 10 percent of design.
B.
Air Outlets and Inlets: Adjust total to within plus 10 percent and minus 5 percent of
design to space. Adjust outlets and inlets in space to within plus or minus 10 percent of
design.
C.
Hydronic Systems: Adjust to within plus or minus 10 percent of design.
ADJUSTING
A.
Testing, adjusting, and balancing.
B.
Verify recorded data represents actual measured or observed conditions.
C.
Permanently mark settings of valves, dampers, and other adjustment devices allowing
settings to be restored. Set and lock memory stops.
D.
After adjustment, take measurements to verify balance has not been disrupted. If
disrupted, verify correcting adjustments have been made.
E.
Report defects and deficiencies noted during performance of services, preventing system
balance.
F.
Leave systems in proper working order, replacing belt guards, closing access doors,
closing doors to electrical switch boxes, and restoring thermostats to specified settings.
G.
At final inspection, recheck random selections of data recorded in report. Recheck points
or areas as selected and witnessed by Owner.
H.
Check and adjust systems approximately six months after final acceptance and submit
report.
AIR SYSTEM PROCEDURE
A.
Adjust air handling and distribution systems to obtain required or design supply, return,
and exhaust air quantities.
B.
Make air quantity measurements in main ducts by Pitot tube traverse of entire cross
sectional area of duct.
C.
Measure air quantities at air inlets and outlets.
KIB DISTRICT OFFICE
RESTROOM IMPROVEMENTS
TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC
230593 - 4
3.6
D.
Adjust distribution system to obtain uniform space temperatures free from objectionable
drafts.
E.
Use volume control devices to regulate air quantities only to extent adjustments do not
create objectionable air motion or sound levels. Effect volume control by using volume
dampers located in ducts.
F.
Vary total system air quantities by adjustment of fan speeds. Provide sheave drive
changes to vary fan speed. Vary branch air quantities by damper regulation.
G.
Provide system schematic with required and actual air quantities recorded at each outlet
or inlet.
H.
Measure static air pressure conditions on air supply units, including filter and coil
pressure drops, and total pressure across fan. Make allowances for 50 percent loading of
filters.
I.
Adjust outside air automatic dampers, outside air, return air, and exhaust dampers for
design conditions.
J.
Measure temperature conditions across outside air, return air, and exhaust dampers to
check leakage.
K.
At modulating damper locations, take measurements and balance at extreme conditions.
Balance variable volume systems at maximum airflow rate, full cooling, and at minimum
airflow rate, full heating.
L.
Measure building static pressure and adjust supply, return, and exhaust air systems to
obtain required relationship between each to maintain approximately 0.05 inches positive
static pressure near building entries.
M.
For variable air volume system powered units set volume controller to airflow setting
indicated. Confirm connections properly made and confirm proper operation for
automatic variable-air-volume temperature control.
N.
On fan powered VAV boxes, adjust airflow switches for proper operation.
WATER SYSTEM PROCEDURE
A.
Adjust water systems, after air balancing, to obtain design quantities.
B.
Use calibrated Venturi tubes, orifices, or other metered fittings and pressure gauges to
determine flow rates for system balance. Where flow-metering devices are not installed,
base flow balance on temperature difference across various heat transfer elements in
system.
KIB DISTRICT OFFICE
RESTROOM IMPROVEMENTS
TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC
230593 - 5
3.7
C.
Adjust systems to obtain specified pressure drops and flows through heat transfer
elements prior to thermal testing. Perform balancing by measurement of temperature
differential in conjunction with air balancing.
D.
Effect system balance with automatic control valves fully open or in normal position to
heat transfer elements.
E.
Effect adjustment of water distribution systems by means of balancing cocks, valves, and
fittings. Do not use service or shut-off valves for balancing unless indexed for balance
point.
F.
Where available pump capacity is less than total flow requirements or individual system
parts, simulate full flow in one part by temporary restriction of flow to other parts.
SCHEDULES
A.
Equipment Requiring Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
B.
Plumbing Pumps.
HVAC Pumps.
Water Tube Boilers.
Boilers.
Packaged Roof Top Heating/Cooling Units.
Packaged Terminal Air Conditioning Units.
Computer Room Air Conditioning Units.
Air Coils.
Terminal Heat Transfer Units.
Air Handling Units.
Fans.
Air Filters.
Air Terminal Units.
Air Inlets and Outlets.
Heat Exchangers.
Report Forms
1.
Title Page:
a.
Name of Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing Agency
b.
Address of Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing Agency
c.
Telephone and facsimile numbers of Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing
Agency
d.
Project name
e.
Project location
f.
Project Architect
g.
Project Engineer
h.
Project Contractor
i.
Project altitude
KIB DISTRICT OFFICE
RESTROOM IMPROVEMENTS
TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC
230593 - 6
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
j.
Report date
Summary Comments:
a.
Design versus final performance
b.
Notable characteristics of system
c.
Description of systems operation sequence
d.
Summary of outdoor and exhaust flows to indicate building
pressurization
e.
Nomenclature used throughout report
f.
Test conditions
Instrument List:
a.
Instrument
b.
Manufacturer
c.
Model number
d.
Serial number
e.
Range
f.
Calibration date
Electric Motors:
a.
Manufacturer
b.
Model/Frame
c.
HP/BHP and kW
d.
Phase, voltage, amperage; nameplate, actual, no load
e.
RPM
f.
Service factor
g.
Starter size, rating, heater elements
h.
Sheave Make/Size/Bore
V-Belt Drive:
a.
Identification/location
b.
Required driven RPM
c.
Driven sheave, diameter and RPM
d.
Belt, size and quantity
e.
Motor sheave diameter and RPM
f.
Center to center distance, maximum, minimum, and actual
Pump Data:
a.
Identification/number
b.
Manufacturer
c.
Size/model
d.
Impeller
e.
Service
f.
Design flow rate, pressure drop, BHP and kW
g.
Actual flow rate, pressure drop, BHP and kW
h.
Discharge pressure
i.
Suction pressure
j.
Total operating head pressure
k.
Shut off, discharge and suction pressures
l.
Shut off, total head pressure
Combustion Test:
a.
Manufacturer
b.
Model number
KIB DISTRICT OFFICE
RESTROOM IMPROVEMENTS
TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC
230593 - 7
8.
9.
c.
Serial number
d.
Firing rate
e.
Overfire draft
f.
Gas meter timing dial size
g.
Gas meter time per revolution
h.
Gas pressure at meter outlet
i.
Gas flow rate
j.
Heat input
k.
Burner manifold gas pressure
l.
Percent carbon monoxide (CO)
m.
Percent carbon dioxide (CO2)
n.
Percent oxygen (O2)
o.
Percent excess air
p.
Flue gas temperature at outlet
q.
Ambient temperature
r.
Net stack temperature
s.
Percent stack loss
t.
Percent combustion efficiency
u.
Heat output
Heat Exchanger:
a.
Identification/number
b.
Location
c.
Service
d.
Manufacturer
e.
Model number
f.
Serial number
g.
Steam pressure, design and actual
h.
Primary water entering temperature, design and actual
i.
Primary water leaving temperature, design and actual
j.
Primary water flow, design and actual
k.
Primary water pressure drop, design and actual
l.
Secondary water leaving temperature, design and actual
m.
Secondary water leaving temperature, design and actual
n.
Secondary water flow, design and actual
o.
Secondary water pressure drop, design and actual
Cooling Coil Data:
a.
Identification/number
b.
Location
c.
Service
d.
Manufacturer
e.
Air flow, design and actual
f.
Entering air DB temperature, design and actual
g.
Entering air WB temperature, design and actual
h.
Leaving air DB temperature, design and actual
i.
Leaving air WB temperature, design and actual
j.
Water flow, design and actual
k.
Water pressure drop, design and actual
l.
Entering water temperature, design and actual
KIB DISTRICT OFFICE
RESTROOM IMPROVEMENTS
TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC
230593 - 8
10.
11.
12.
13.
m.
Leaving water temperature, design and actual
n.
Saturated suction temperature, design and actual
o.
Air pressure drop, design and actual
Heating Coil Data:
a.
Identification/number
b.
Location
c.
Service
d.
Manufacturer
e.
Air flow, design and actual
f.
Water flow, design and actual
g.
Water pressure drop, design and actual
h.
Entering water temperature, design and actual
i.
Leaving water temperature, design and actual
j.
Entering air temperature, design and actual
k.
Leaving air temperature, design and actual
l.
Air pressure drop, design and actual
Air Moving Equipment:
a.
Location
b.
Manufacturer
c.
Model number
d.
Serial number
e.
Arrangement/Class/Discharge
f.
Air flow, specified and actual
g.
Return air flow, specified and actual
h.
Outside air flow, specified and actual
i.
Total static pressure (total external), specified and actual
j.
Inlet pressure
k.
Discharge pressure
l.
Sheave Make/Size/Bore
m.
Number of Belts/Make/Size
n.
Fan RPM
Return Air/Outside Air Data:
a.
Identification/location
b.
Design air flow
c.
Actual air flow
d.
Design return air flow
e.
Actual return air flow
f.
Design outside air flow
g.
Actual outside air flow
h.
Return air temperature
i.
Outside air temperature
j.
Required mixed air temperature
k.
Actual mixed air temperature
l.
Design outside/return air ratio
m.
Actual outside/return air ratio
Exhaust Fan Data:
a.
Location
b.
Manufacturer
KIB DISTRICT OFFICE
RESTROOM IMPROVEMENTS
TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC
230593 - 9
14.
15.
16.
17.
c.
Model number
d.
Serial number
e.
Air flow, specified and actual
f.
Total static pressure (total external), specified and actual
g.
Inlet pressure
h.
Discharge pressure
i.
Sheave Make/Size/Bore
j.
Number of Belts/Make/Size
k.
Fan RPM
Duct Traverse:
a.
System zone/branch
b.
Duct size
c.
Area
d.
Design velocity
e.
Design air flow
f.
Test velocity
g.
Test air flow
h.
Duct static pressure
i.
Air temperature
j.
Air correction factor
Duct Leak Test:
a.
Description of ductwork under test
b.
Duct design operating pressure
c.
Duct design test static pressure
d.
Duct capacity, air flow
e.
Maximum allowable leakage duct capacity times leak factor
f.
Test apparatus
1)
Blower
2)
Orifice, tube size
3)
Orifice size
4)
Calibrated
g.
Test static pressure
h.
Test orifice differential pressure
i.
Leakage
Air Monitoring Station Data:
a.
Identification/location
b.
System
c.
Size
d.
Area
e.
Design velocity
f.
Design air flow
g.
Test velocity
h.
Test air flow
Flow Measuring Station:
a.
Identification/number
b.
Location
c.
Size
d.
Manufacturer
KIB DISTRICT OFFICE
RESTROOM IMPROVEMENTS
TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC
230593 - 10
18.
19.
e.
Model number
f.
Serial number
g.
Design Flow rate
h.
Design pressure drop
i.
Actual/final pressure drop
j.
Actual/final flow rate
k.
Station calibrated setting
Terminal Unit Data:
a.
Manufacturer
b.
Type, constant, variable, single, dual duct
c.
Identification/number
d.
Location
e.
Model number
f.
Size
g.
Minimum static pressure
h.
Minimum design air flow
i.
Maximum design air flow
j.
Maximum actual air flow
k.
Inlet static pressure
Air Distribution Test Sheet:
a.
Air terminal number
b.
Room number/location
c.
Terminal type
d.
Terminal size
e.
Area factor
f.
Design velocity
g.
Design air flow
h.
Test (final) velocity
i.
Test (final) air flow
j.
Percent of design air flow
END OF SECTION 230593
KIB DISTRICT OFFICE
RESTROOM IMPROVEMENTS
TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC
230593 - 11
[This page intentionally left blank.]
KIB DISTRICT OFFICE
RESTROOM IMPROVEMENTS
TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC
230593 - 12
SECTION 230700 - HVAC INSULATION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
1.2
1.3
Section Includes:
1.
Ductwork insulation, duct liner, jackets, and accessories.
REFERENCES
A.
ASTM International:
1.
ASTM C1290 - Standard Specification for Flexible Fibrous Glass Blanket
Insulation Used to Externally Insulate HVAC Ducts.
2.
ASTM D4637 - Standard Specification for EPDM Sheet Used in Single-Ply Roof
Membrane.
3.
ASTM E84 - Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of
Building Materials.
4.
ASTM E96 - Standard Test Methods for Water Vapor Transmission of Materials.
5.
ASTM E162 - Standard Test Method for Surface Flammability of Materials
Using a Radiant Heat Energy Source.
B.
Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors’:
1.
SMACNA - HVAC Duct Construction Standard - Metal and Flexible.
C.
National Fire Protection Association:
1.
NFPA 255 - Standard Method of Test of Surface Burning Characteristics of
Building Materials.
D.
Underwriters Laboratories Inc.:
1.
UL 723 - Tests for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials.
2.
UL 1978 - Standard for Safety for Grease Ducts.
SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: Submit product description, thermal characteristics and list of materials
and thickness for each service, and location. Submit only on products being used, note if
a specified product is not being used on the job.
B.
Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Submit manufacturers published literature
indicating proper installation procedures.
KIB DISTRICT OFFICE
RESTROOM IMPROVEMENTS
HVAC INSULATION
230700 - 1
1.4
ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS
A.
Environmental conditions affecting products on site.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
2.2
MANUFACTURER
A.
Manufacturers for Glass Fiber and Mineral Fiber Insulation Products:
1.
CertainTeed.
2.
Knauf.
3.
Johns Manville.
4.
Owens-Corning.
5.
Substitutions: Section 016000 - Product Requirements.
B.
Manufacturers for Closed Cell Elastomeric Insulation Products:
1.
Aeroflex. Aerocell.
2.
Armacell, LLC. Armaflex.
3.
Nomaco. K-flex.
4.
Substitutions: Section 016000 - Product Requirements.
DUCTWORK INSULATION
A.
TYPE D-1: ASTM C1290, Type III, flexible glass fiber, commercial grade with factory
applied reinforced aluminum foil jacket meeting ASTM C1136, Type II.
1.
Thermal Conductivity: at least 0.25 at 75 degrees F.
2.
Maximum Operating Temperature: 250 degrees F.
3.
Density: 0.75 pound per cubic foot.
B.
TYPE D-2: ASTM C612, Type IA or IB, rigid glass fiber, with factory applied all service
facing meeting ASTM C1136, Type II.
1.
Thermal Conductivity: at least 0.22 at 75 degrees F.
2.
Density: 3.0 pound per cubic foot.
C.
TYPE D-5: ASTM C1071, Type I, flexible, glass fiber duct liner with coated air side.
1.
Thermal Conductivity: at least 0.28 at 75 degrees F.
2.
Density: 1.5 pound per cubic foot.
3.
Maximum Operating Temperature: 250 degrees F.
4.
Maximum Air Velocity: 6,000 feet per minute.
KIB DISTRICT OFFICE
RESTROOM IMPROVEMENTS
HVAC INSULATION
230700 - 2
2.3
DUCTWORK INSULATION JACKETS
A.
2.4
Aluminum Duct Jacket:
1.
ASTM B209.
2.
Thickness: 0.016 inch thick sheet.
3.
Finish: Smooth.
4.
Joining: Longitudinal slip joints and 2 inch laps.
5.
Fittings: 0.016 inch thick die shaped fitting covers with factory attached
protective liner.
6.
Metal Jacket Bands: 3/8 inch wide; 0.010 inch thick stainless steel.
DUCTWORK INSULATION ACCESSORIES
A.
B.
Liner Fasteners: Galvanized steel, self-adhesive pad or impact applied with integral head.
Vapor Retarder Tape:
1.
Kraft paper reinforced with glass fiber yarn and bonded to aluminized film, with
pressure sensitive rubber based adhesive. Plenum rated.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
3.2
EXAMINATION
A.
Coordination and project conditions.
B.
Verify piping, equipment and ductwork has been tested before applying insulation
materials.
C.
Verify surfaces are clean and dry, with foreign material removed.
D.
Prepare surfaces and install insulation, jacketing, and accessories in accordance with
manufacturer’s recommendations, building codes, and industry standards.
INSTALLATION - DUCTWORK SYSTEMS
A.
Duct dimensions indicated on Drawings are finished inside dimensions.
B.
Insulated ductwork:
1.
Provide insulation with vapor retarder jackets.
2.
Finish with tape and vapor retarder jacket.
3.
Continue insulation through walls, sleeves, hangers, and other duct penetrations.
4.
Insulate entire system including fittings, joints, flanges, fire dampers, flexible
connections, and expansion joints.
C.
Duct and Plenum Liner:
KIB DISTRICT OFFICE
RESTROOM IMPROVEMENTS
HVAC INSULATION
230700 - 3
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
D.
3.3
Adhere insulation with adhesive for 90 percent coverage.
Secure insulation with mechanical liner fasteners. Comply with SMACNA
Standards for spacing.
Seal and smooth joints. Seal and coat transverse joints.
Seal liner surface penetrations with adhesive.
Cut insulation for tight overlapped corner joints. Support top pieces of liner at
edges with side pieces.
Exhaust and relief air to be insulated 10 feet in from the exterior.
SCHEDULES
A.
Ductwork Insulation Schedule:
DUCTWORK SYSTEM
INSULATION
INSULATION
TYPE
THICKNESS
inches
Supply Ducts (externally insulated)
D-1, D-2
1.0
Exhaust and Relief Ducts Within 10 feet of Exterior Openings
D-1, D-2
1.0
Transfer Air Ducts (internally insulated)
D-5
1.0
END OF SECTION 230700
KIB DISTRICT OFFICE
RESTROOM IMPROVEMENTS
HVAC INSULATION
230700 - 4
SECTION 230994 - SEQUENCE OF OPERATIONS FOR EXHAUST FANS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
Section includes sequence of operation for:
1.
1.2
Exhaust fans.
SUBMITTALS
A.
Section 013300 - Submittal Procedures: Submittal procedures.
B.
Shop Drawings: None
PART 2 PRODUCTS
Not Used.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1
EXHAUST FANS
A.
LOCAL EXHAUST FANS
1.
2.
Fans operated in conjunction with occupancy switch.
Monitor and display:
a.
No DDC points
END OF SECTION 230994
KIB DISTRICT OFFICE
RESTROOM IMPROVEMENTS
SEQUENCE OF OPERATIONS
FOR EXHAUST FANS
230994 - 1
SECTION 233100 - HVAC DUCTS AND CASINGS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
Section Includes:
1.
2.
3.
4.
1.2
Metal duct Materials.
Insulated flexible ducts.
Metal ductwork fabrication.
Fabric ductwork.
REFERENCES
A.
ASTM International:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
B.
ASTM A36 - Standard Specification for Carbon Structural Steel.
ASTM A90 - Standard Test Method for Weight Mass of Coating on Iron and
Steel Articles with Zinc or Zinc-Alloy Coatings.
ASTM A167 - Standard Specification for Stainless and Heat-Resisting
Chromium-Nickel Steel Plate, Sheet, and Strip.
ASTM A568 - Standard Specification for Steel, Sheet, Carbon, and HighStrength, Low-Alloy, Hot-Rolled and Cold-Rolled, General Requirements for.
ASTM A653 - Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized)
or Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process.
ASTM A1008 - Standard Specification for Steel, Sheet, Cold-Rolled, Carbon,
Structural, High-Strength Low-Alloy and High-Strength Low-Alloy with
Improved Formability.
ASTM A1011 - Standard Specification for Steel, Sheet and Strip, Hot-Rolled,
Carbon, Structural, High-Strength Low-Alloy and High-Strength Low-Alloy with
Improved Formability.
ASTM E84 - Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of
Building Materials.
National Fire Protection Association:
1.
NFPA 90A - Standard for the Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating
Systems.
C.
Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors:
1.
SMACNA - HVAC Duct Construction Standard - Metal and Flexible.
D.
Underwriters Laboratories Inc.:
1.
UL 181 - Factory-Made Air Ducts and Connectors.
KIB DISTRICT OFFICE
RESTROOM IMPROVEMENTS
HVAC DUCTS AND CASINGS
233100 - 1
1.3
PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A.
1.4
SUBMITTALS
A.
1.5
Variation of duct configuration or sizes other than those of equivalent or lower loss
coefficient is not permitted except by written permission. Size round ducts installed in
place of rectangular ducts in accordance with ASHRAE table of equivalent rectangular
and round ducts.
Product Data: Submit data for duct materials.
FIELD MEASUREMENTS
A.
Verify field measurements prior to fabrication.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1
2.2
METAL DUCT MATERIALS
A.
Galvanized Steel Ducts: ASTM A653 galvanized steel sheet, lock-forming quality,
having G60 zinc coating in conformance with ASTM A90.
B.
Fasteners: Rivets, bolts, or sheet metal screws.
C.
Hanger Rod: ASTM A36; steel, galvanized; threaded both ends, threaded one end, or
continuously threaded.
FLEXIBLE DUCTS
A.
Manufacturers: Durodyne
B.
Product Description: Two ply vinyl film supported by helical wound spring steel wire.
1.
2.
3.
2.3
Pressure Rating: 10 inches wg positive and 1.0 inches wg negative.
Maximum Velocity: 4000 fpm.
Temperature Range: -10 degrees F to 160 degrees F.
SINGLE WALL SPIRAL ROUND DUCTS
A.
Product Description: UL 181, Class 1, round spiral lockseam duct constructed of
galvanized steel.
B.
Construct duct with the following minimum gages:
Diameter
Gauge
3 inches to 14 inches
26
15 inches to 26 inches
24
28 inches to 36 inches
22
KIB DISTRICT OFFICE
RESTROOM IMPROVEMENTS
HVAC DUCTS AND CASINGS
233100 - 2
C.
2.4
38 inches to 50 inches
20
52 inches to 84 inches
18
Construct fittings with the following minimum gages:
Diameter
Gauge
3 inches to 14 inches
24
15 inches to 26 inches
22
28 inches to 36 inches
20
38 inches to 50 inches
20
52 inches to 60 inches
18
62 inches to 84 inches
16
METAL DUCTWORK FABRICATION
A.
Fabricate and support rectangular ducts in accordance with SMACNA HVAC Duct
Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible and as indicated on Drawings. Provide duct
material, gages, reinforcing, and sealing for operating pressures indicated.
B.
Fabricate and support round ducts with longitudinal seams in accordance with SMACNA
HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible (Round Duct Construction
Standards). Provide duct material, gages, reinforcing, and sealing for operating pressures
indicated.
C.
Construct T's, bends, and elbows with minimum radius 1-1/2 times centerline duct width.
Where not possible and where rectangular elbows are used, provide airfoil turning vanes.
Where acoustical lining is indicated, furnish turning vanes of perforated metal with glass
fiber insulation.
D.
Increase duct sizes gradually, not exceeding 15 degrees divergence wherever possible;
maximum 30 degrees divergence upstream of equipment and 45 degrees convergence
downstream.
E.
Fabricate continuously welded round and oval duct fittings two gages heavier than duct
gages indicated in SMACNA Standard. Minimum 4 inch cemented slip joint, brazed or
electric welded. Prime coat welded joints.
F.
Provide standard 45-degree lateral wye takeoffs. When space does not allow 45-degree
lateral wye takeoff, use 90-degree conical tee connections.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
Verify sizes of equipment connections before fabricating transitions.
KIB DISTRICT OFFICE
RESTROOM IMPROVEMENTS
HVAC DUCTS AND CASINGS
233100 - 3
3.2
3.3
INSTALLATION
A.
Install and seal ducts in accordance with SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards
- Metal and Flexible.
B.
During construction, install temporary closures of metal or taped polyethylene on open
ductwork to prevent construction dust from entering ductwork system.
C.
Use double nuts and lock washers on threaded rod supports.
D.
Connect flexible ducts to metal ducts with draw bands.
SCHEDULES
A.
B.
Ductwork Material Schedule:
AIR SYSTEM
MATERIAL
Supply (Heating Systems)
Galvanized Steel
General Exhaust
Galvanized Steel
Ductwork Pressure Class Schedule:
AIR SYSTEM
PRESSURE CLASS
Constant Volume Supply
1 inch wg regardless of velocity.
General Exhaust
1/2 inch wg regardless of velocity.
END OF SECTION 233100
KIB DISTRICT OFFICE
RESTROOM IMPROVEMENTS
HVAC DUCTS AND CASINGS
233100 - 4
[This page intentionally left blank.]
KIB DISTRICT OFFICE
RESTROOM IMPROVEMENTS
HVAC DUCTS AND CASINGS
233100 - 5
SECTION 233400 - HVAC FANS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1
1.2
SUMMARY
A.
Section Includes:
1.
Cabinet fans.
B.
Substitutions:
1.
Approved equal product will be of equal or greater performance and equal or
greater construction quality than the basis for design product selection.
2.
Products made by approved manufacturers must prove to be equal or greater than
the basis for design product selection, in order to be accepted.
3.
Differences in layout or configuration must be adapted to fit site space
constraints by the Contractor.
REFERENCES
A.
B.
C.
1.3
American Bearing Manufacturers Association:
1.
ABMA 9 - Load Ratings and Fatigue Life for Ball Bearings.
2.
ABMA 11 - Load Ratings and Fatigue Life for Roller Bearings.
Air Movement and Control Association International, Inc.:
1.
AMCA 99 - Standards Handbook.
2.
AMCA 204 - Balance Quality and Vibration Levels for Fans.
3.
AMCA 210 - Laboratory Methods of Testing Fans for Aerodynamic Performance
Rating.
4.
AMCA 300 - Reverberant Room Method for Sound Testing of Fans.
5.
AMCA 301 - Methods for Calculating Fan Sound Ratings from Laboratory Test
Data.
National Electrical Manufacturers Association:
1.
NEMA MG 1 - Motors and Generators.
2.
NEMA 250 - Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1000 Volts Maximum).
SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: Submit data on each type of fan and include accessories, fan curves with
specified operating point plotted, power, RPM, sound power levels for both fan inlet and
outlet at rated capacity, electrical characteristics and connection requirements.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
KIB DISTRICT OFFICE
RESTROOM IMPROVEMENTS
HVAC FANS
233400 - 1
2.1
CABINET FANS, EF-103
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
Manufacturers: Greenheck
Product Description: Direct drive with galvanized steel housing lined with 1/2 inch
acoustic glass fiber insulation, gravity backdraft damper in discharge, horizontal hanging
brackets.
Fan Wheel: Single width-double inlet centrifugal type.
Motor and Drive Mounting: Within air stream.
Disconnect: Internal plug-type wiring harness.
Grille: High-impact polystyrene, white
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
3.2
Coordination and project conditions.
INSTALLATION
A.
B.
Install in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions.
Suspended Cabinet Fans: Install flexible connections between fan and ductwork. Ensure
metal bands of connectors are parallel with minimum one inch flex between ductwork
and fan while running.
END OF SECTION 233400
KIB DISTRICT OFFICE
RESTROOM IMPROVEMENTS
HVAC FANS
233400 - 2
SECTION 260500 - BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1
1.2
1.3
SECTION INCLUDES
A.
Basic Electrical Requirements specifically applicable to Divisions 26, 27 and 28, in
addition to Division 1 – General Requirements.
B.
Electrical Contractor(s) commissioning requirements.
C.
Commissioning Related Sections:
1.
260943 – Network Lighting Controls
2.
260913 – Enclosed Controllers
REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
A.
Conform to applicable International Building Code, latest adopted edition.
B.
Electrical: Conform to NFPA 70, latest adopted edition.
C.
Furnish products listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. or an
independent testing firm acceptable to the authority having jurisdiction as suitable for
purpose specified and shown.
SUBMITTALS
A.
Submit under provisions of Division 01.
B.
Provide submittals in format provided in Division 1 requirements including: Submittal of
all cut sheets, Shop Drawings, coordination Drawings, wiring and plan Drawings.
C.
Include accessories required for installation.
D.
All other reference lines and symbols equal to the Design Drawings.
E.
Submit Coordination Drawings including but not limited to:
1.
2.
3.
Routing of cable trays, conduits larger than 2”, switchgear and panelboards,
ductwork, and sprinkler piping.
Structural members in paths of pathway groups with common supports.
HVAC and plumbing items and architectural features in paths of conduit groups
with common supports.
KIB DISTRICT OFFICE
RESTROOM IMPROVEMENTS
BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS
260500 - 1
1.4
1.5
1.6
1.7
PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A.
All material shall be new, unused, and delivered to the job site packed in their original
containers.
B.
All material shall be delivered free of damage or defects.
C.
Provide adequate storage facilities at the Project Site or other approved location to protect
materials from damage or corrosion.
D.
Protect material, equipment, and apparatus provided under this Division from damage,
water, and dust, both in storage and after installation, until Notice of Completion has
been filed. Materials, equipment, or apparatus damaged because of improper storage or
protection will be rejected and must be removed from the site.
DRAWINGS
A.
Field verify all scales and dimensions shown on the plans. Final locations, distances, and
levels shall be governed by actual field conditions.
B.
Review and coordinate this Work with architectural, structural, plumbing, heating,
ventilating, and all other Drawings and Specifications and adjust this Work as required to
be compatible with all conditions indicated.
C.
The Drawings show the general locations of the electrical features only except for
features specifically dimensioned. When necessary to present a symmetrical appearance
or to avoid interference with other installations, make minor relocations as required. The
Drawings and Specifications are complementary to each other. What is shown on one is
binding as if called for in both.
DEFINITIONS
A.
Furnish - Means purchase and bring to the Job Site.
B.
Install - Means incorporate into the Work, including connections and make operational.
C.
Provide - Means furnish, install, connect, and make operational.
D.
Work or Project - Shall mean all Work required by the Contract Agreement.
E.
Construction Manager - Owner or his Authorized Representative.
F.
"All" and "Typical" are implied throughout the Specifications and Drawings and are not
repeated in every instance.
OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS
A.
Provide operating and maintenance materials where specified in the individual Division
26, 27 and 28 sections.
KIB DISTRICT OFFICE
RESTROOM IMPROVEMENTS
BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS
260500 - 2
1.8
B.
O&M manuals shall include approved submittal materials including modifications made
after initial submittals were reviewed.
C.
Submit in format required by Division 01.
RECORD DOCUMENTS.
A.
During construction maintain on site one set of all documents forming the contract,
including drawings, recording all changes made by addenda, by formal modifications,
and in performing the work, for Government's future reference.
B.
Documents shall be kept separately from documents used for construction, in location
where they can be kept clean and safe from fire and damage.
C.
Changes to be Recorded Include:
1.
2.
3.
4.
D.
1.9
Actual measured locations and ends of existing and abandoned below grade
utilities.
Actual measured locations (horizontal and vertical) of foundations and concealed
utilities and appurtenances, referenced to visible permanent appurtenances.
Field changes of dimension and detail and details not on original documents.
Actual products used, in specification, with brand name or model number.
Submittal Copy of Drawings: All marks copied to a clean set of prints.
COMMISSIONING RESPONSIBILITIES
A.
The following Division 26 equipment/systems will be commissioned by the
commissioning agent in this project:
1.
2.
B.
Lighting Control systems (Network controls, interior and exterior lighting)
Motor controllers as part of HVAC or other system.
Equipment or System Installer Commissioning Responsibilities:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Attend commissioning meetings.
Provide instructions and demonstrations for Owner's personnel.
Ensure subcontractors perform assigned commissioning responsibilities.
Ensure participation of equipment manufacturers in appropriate startup, testing,
and training activities when required by individual equipment specifications.
Develop startup and initial checkout plan using manufacturer’s startup
procedures and functional performance checklists for equipment and systems to
be commissioned.
Provide manufacturer’s representatives to execute starting of equipment. Ensure
representatives are available and present during agreed upon schedules and are in
attendance for duration to complete tests, adjustments and problem-solving.
Coordinate with equipment manufacturers to determine specific requirements to
maintain validity of warranties.
KIB DISTRICT OFFICE
RESTROOM IMPROVEMENTS
BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS
260500 - 3
8.
9.
10.
1.10
Provide personnel to assist Commissioning Authority during equipment or
system verification checks and functional performance tests.
Prior to functional performance tests, review test procedures to ensure feasibility,
safety and equipment protection and provide necessary written alarm limits to be
used during tests.
Prior to startup, inspect, check, and verify correct and complete installation of
equipment and system components for verification checks included in
commissioning plan. When deficient or incomplete work is discovered, ensure
corrective action is taken and re-check until equipment or system is ready for
startup.
MECHANICAL CONNECTION REQUIREMENTS
A.
Unless otherwise indicated on the electrical drawings, all mechanical equipment motors
and controls shall be furnished, set in place, and wired in accordance with the following
schedule. Refer to Divisions 21, 22 and 23 for motor characteristics and controls.
21,22,23
21,22,23
LINE
VOLTAGE
POWER
UNDER
DIVISION
26
26
26
26
21,22,23
26
21,22,23
26
21,22,23
26
26
21,22,23
21,22,23
26
26
26
--
21,22,23
26
26
21,22,23
21,22,23
21,22,23
26
21,22,23
FURNISHED
UNDER
DIVISION
Equipment Motors
Magnetic Motor Starters:
a. Automatically controlled
b. Manually controlled
c. In packaged equipment
d. Disconnect switches, manual
motor starters, thermal
overload switches, VFDs
e. VFDs and ATS furnished as
packaged equipment
f. Control relays, transformers,
time clocks, thermostats,
motor valves, float controls,
damper motors, EP and PE
switches and other
miscellaneous Division
21,22,23 controls
B.
SET IN
PLACE
BY
DIVISION
MECH
CONTROL
21,22,23
Provide automatic starters for all multi-phase equipment controlled by DDC system
which is not have an integral or provided controller with equipment.
KIB DISTRICT OFFICE
RESTROOM IMPROVEMENTS
BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS
260500 - 4
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1
Provide materials and equipment of major and reputable manufacturers with ability to render
competent and thorough service through local organizations capable of expeditiously providing
service, parts, and assistance.
2.2
In addition to specified material and equipment, provide all incidental materials required to
provide complete installation. Such incidental materials include but are not limited to solders,
tapes, caulking, mastics, gaskets, and other appurtenances as required.
2.3
Materials of similar nature, style, function, purpose and/or appearance shall be like products from
the standard product line of the same manufacturer.
2.4
Equipment shall be installed using the accessories available from the equipment manufacturer for
the application with the selected accessories with the submittal data. Where accessories are not
available from the manufacturer and other accessories are proposed for use, submit all proposed
installation accessories with equipment submittal. Indicate mounting arrangements using
drawings and descriptions. Equipment and proposed accessories shall be listed or independently
certified (in accordance with previous paragraph) suitable for the application when completely
installed.
2.5
Provide materials and equipment suitable for operation throughout the range of temperatures and
other ambient conditions likely to be encountered. Provide components of equipment, including
but not limited to, construction materials, supports, hangers, insulation, lubricants, pulling
compounds, sealing mixtures, finishes, electrical and electronic components suitable for the
anticipated operating ambient temperature range.
2.6
Do not store, install, test, operate, or transport any material, component or equipment at any
temperature that results in damage, shortened useful life, or reduced reliability.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1
COORDINATION WITH SERVING UTILITY COMPANIES
A.
3.2
Coordinate the power and other service raceways, conductors and, where applicable, the
connections, with the serving utility companies' requirements and comply with those
requirements.
CLEANING
A.
Clear away all debris, surplus materials, etc., resulting from this Work and operations,
leaving the entire Project and all equipment in a clean, functional, and first-class
condition.
KIB DISTRICT OFFICE
RESTROOM IMPROVEMENTS
BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS
260500 - 5
3.3
B.
Exterior surfaces of all electrical equipment enclosures shall be wiped or vacuum-cleaned
to remove construction debris and dust.
C.
Interiors of all electrical equipment enclosures, fixtures, closets, etc., shall be cleaned to
remove construction debris and dust.
D.
Vacuum-clean accessible elements of disconnecting and protective devices of equipment
and the like prior to energizing.
E.
All materials, enclosures, interiors of enclosures, and all other surfaces shall be left dry
and show no evidence of water marks, staining, or rust.
F.
Clean all surfaces including but not limited to lamps, trims, reflectors, louvers, refractors,
lenses, device plates, etc. Remove all fingerprints, temporary labels, etc. from surfaces of
all lighting fixtures, equipment, enclosures, building elements, etc.
TRAINING AND DEMONSTRATION
A.
Provide training and demonstration of electrical and communications systems as required
by Division 01 and in accordance with Commissioning Plan.
B.
Provide up to 24 hours of training of owner personnel in addition to the specific hours
indicated in Divisions 25, 26, 27 and 28.
END OF SECTION 260500
KIB DISTRICT OFFICE
RESTROOM IMPROVEMENTS
BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS
260500 - 6
SECTION 260519 - LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A. Section includes building wire and cable; armored cable; metal clad cable; and wiring connectors
and connections.
B.
Related Sections:
1.
2.
1.2
Section 260553 – Identification for Electrical Systems: Product requirements for wire
identification.
Section 330500 – Piped Utilities – Basic Materials and Methods.
REFERENCES
A. International Electrical Testing Association:
1.
B.
National Fire Protection Association:
1.
2.
C.
NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code.
NFPA 262 - Standard Method of Test for Flame Travel and Smoke of Wires and Cables for
Use in Air-Handling Spaces.
Underwriters Laboratories, Inc.:
1.
1.3
NETA ATS - Acceptance Testing Specifications for Electrical Power Distribution
Equipment and Systems.
UL 1277 - Standard for Safety for Electrical Power and Control Tray Cables with Optional
Optical-Fiber Members.
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A. Product Requirements: Provide products as follows:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Solid conductor for feeders and branch circuits 12 AWG and smaller.
Stranded conductors for control circuits.
Conductor not smaller than 12 AWG for power and lighting circuits except for approved
fixture whips.
Conductor not smaller than 14 AWG for control circuits or as noted on design Drawings or
Shop Drawings.
KIB DISTRICT OFFICE
RESTROOM IMPROVEMENTS
LOW VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL
POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES
260519 - 1
5.
B.
Wiring Methods: Provide the following wiring methods:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
1.4
Calculate voltage drop based on connected load and actual conductor lengths for branch
circuits over 75 feet. Increase conductor size as necessary to limit voltage drop to a
maximum of 3 percent.
Concealed Dry Interior Locations: Use only building wire, Type THHN/THWN XHHW
insulation, in raceway or metal clad cable for branch circuits.
Exposed Dry Interior Locations: Use only building wire, Type THHN/THWN XHHW
insulation, in raceway.
Above Accessible Ceilings: Use only building wire, Type THHN/THWN XHHW insulation,
in raceway or metal clad cable for branch circuits.
Wet or Damp Interior Locations: Use only building wire, Type XHHW insulation, in
raceway.
Exterior Locations: Use only building wire, Type XHHW insulation, in raceway.
Underground Locations: Use only building wire, Type XHHW insulation, in raceway.
Feeders and Home Runs Larger Than 30A or 10 AWG: Use only building wire, Type
THHN/THWN XHHW insulation, in raceway.
Wiring in Spaces Used For Environmental Air and Plenums: Use only building wire, Type
THHN/THWN XHHW insulation, in raceway.
DESIGN REQUIREMENTS
A. Conductor sizes are based on copper.
B.
1.5
Aluminum conductors and material shall not be used.
CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. Section 017000 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Requirements for submittals.
B.
1.6
Project Record Documents:
1.
Record actual routing of feeders 100 amperes and larger on as-built Drawings.
2.
Record actual routing of branch circuits 60 amperes and larger on as-built Drawings
3.
Record actual locations of junction boxes 100 Cu. In and larger on as-built
Drawings.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Perform Work in accordance with IBC, NEC, other State, Borough, and Municipality
requirements and regulations and NECA 1 standard.
KIB DISTRICT OFFICE
RESTROOM IMPROVEMENTS
LOW VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL
POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES
260519 - 2
1.7
QUALIFICATIONS
A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing products specified in this section with
minimum three years documented experience.
1.8
FIELD MEASUREMENTS
A. Verify field measurements are as indicated on Drawings.
1.9
COORDINATION
A. Section 013000 - Administrative Requirements: Requirements for coordination.
B.
Where wire and cable destination is indicated and routing is not shown, determine routing and
lengths required.
C.
Wire and cable routing indicated is approximate unless dimensioned
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1
BUILDING WIRE
A. Product Description: Single conductor insulated wire.
B.
Conductor: Copper.
C.
Insulation Voltage Rating: 600 volts.
D. Insulation Temperature Rating: 90 degrees C.
E.
2.2
Insulation Material: Thermoplastic.
METAL CLAD CABLE
A. Conductor: Copper.
B.
Insulation Voltage Rating: 600 volts.
C.
Insulation Temperature Rating: 90 degrees C.
D. Insulation Material: Thermoplastic.
E.
Armor Material: Steel.
F.
Armor Design: Interlocked metal tape, Corrugated tube or Smooth tube.
KIB DISTRICT OFFICE
RESTROOM IMPROVEMENTS
LOW VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL
POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES
260519 - 3
G. Jacket: None.
2.3
WIRING CONNECTORS
A. Split Bolt Connectors:
B.
Solderless Pressure Connectors:
C.
Spring Wire Connectors:
D. Compression Connectors:
2.4
TERMINATIONS
A. Terminal Lugs for Wires 6 AWG and Smaller: Solderless, compression type copper.
B.
Lugs for Wires 4 AWG and Larger: Color keyed, compression type copper, with insulating
sealing collars.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A. Section 013000 - Administrative Requirements: Coordination and project conditions.
B.
Verify interior of building has been protected from weather.
C.
Verify mechanical work likely to damage wire and cable has been completed.
D. Verify raceway installation is complete and supported.
3.2
PREPARATION
A. Completely and thoroughly swab raceway before installing wire.
3.3
EXISTING WORK
A. Remove exposed abandoned wire and cable, including abandoned wire and cable above
accessible ceiling finishes. Patch surfaces where removed cables pass through building finishes.
B.
Disconnect abandoned circuits and remove circuit wire and cable. Remove abandoned boxes
when wire and cable servicing boxes is abandoned and removed. Install blank cover for
abandoned boxes not removed.
KIB DISTRICT OFFICE
RESTROOM IMPROVEMENTS
LOW VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL
POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES
260519 - 4
C.
Provide access to existing wiring connections remaining active and requiring access. Modify
installation or install access panel.
D. Extend existing circuits using materials and methods compatible with existing electrical
installations, as specified or as shown on the Drawings.
E.
3.4
Wire and cable removed during demolition shall not be reinstalled.
INSTALLATION
A. Route wire and cable to meet Project conditions.
B.
Neatly train and lace wiring inside boxes, equipment, and panelboards.
C.
Identify and color code wire and cable under provisions of Section 260553. Identify each
conductor with its circuit number or other designation indicated.
D. Building Wire in Raceway:
1.
2.
E.
Cable:
1.
2.
3.
F.
Pull conductors into raceway at same time.
Install building wire 4 AWG and larger with pulling equipment.
Protect exposed cable from damage.
Support cables above accessible ceiling, using spring metal clips to support cables from
structure. Do not rest cable on ceiling panels.
Use suitable cable fittings and connectors.
Wiring Connections:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Clean conductor surfaces before installing lugs and connectors.
Make splices, taps, and terminations to carry full ampacity of conductors with no perceptible
temperature rise.
Tape uninsulated conductors and connectors with electrical tape to 150 percent of insulation
rating of conductor.
Install split bolt connectors for conductor splices and taps, 6 AWG and larger.
Install solderless pressure connectors with insulating covers for conductor splices and taps, 8
AWG and smaller.
Install insulated spring wire connectors with plastic caps for conductor splices and taps, 10
AWG and smaller.
G. Install terminal lugs on ends of 600 volt wires unless lugs are furnished on connected device,
such as circuit breakers.
H. Size lugs in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations terminating wire sizes. Install 2hole type lugs to connect wires 4 AWG and larger to copper bus bars.
KIB DISTRICT OFFICE
RESTROOM IMPROVEMENTS
LOW VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL
POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES
260519 - 5
I.
3.5
For terminal lugs fastened together such as on motors, transformers, and other apparatus, or when
space between studs is small enough that lugs can turn and touch each other, insulate for
dielectric strength of 2-1/2 times normal potential of circuit.
WIRE COLOR
A. General:
1.
For wire sizes 10 AWG and smaller, install wire colors in accordance with the following:
a. Black, Red, White (neutral), and Green (ground) for single phase circuits at 120/240
volts.
b. Black, Red, Blue, White (neutral), and Green (ground) for circuits at 120/208 volts
single or three phase.
c. Orange, Brown, Yellow, Grey (neutral), and Green (ground) for circuits at 277/480
volts single or three phase.
2.
For wire sizes 8 AWG and larger, identify wire with colored tape at terminals, splices and
boxes. Colors are as follows:
a. Black, Red, White (neutral), and Green (ground) for single phase circuits at 120/240
volts.
b. Black, Red, Blue, White (neutral), and Green (ground) for circuits at 120/208 volts
single or three phase.
c. Orange, Brown, Yellow, Grey (neutral), and Green (ground) for circuits at 277/480
volts single or three phase.
B.
Neutral Conductors: When two or more neutrals are located in one conduit, individually identify
each with proper circuit number.
C.
Branch Circuit Conductors: Install three or four wire home runs with each phase uniquely color
coded.
D. Feeder Circuit Conductors: Uniquely color code each phase.
E.
Ground Conductors:
1.
2.
3.6
For 6 AWG and smaller: Green.
For 4 AWG and larger: Identify with green tape at both ends and visible points including
junction boxes.
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Section 014000 - Quality Requirements 017000 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Field
inspecting, testing, adjusting, and balancing.
B.
Inspect and test in accordance with NETA ATS, except Section 4.
KIB DISTRICT OFFICE
RESTROOM IMPROVEMENTS
LOW VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL
POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES
260519 - 6
C.
Perform inspections and tests listed in NETA ATS, Section 7.3.1.
END OF SECTION 260519
KIB DISTRICT OFFICE
RESTROOM IMPROVEMENTS
LOW VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL
POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES
260519 - 7
[This page intentionally left blank.]
KIB DISTRICT OFFICE
RESTROOM IMPROVEMENTS
LOW VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL
POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES
260519 - 8
SECTION 260526 - GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
SUMMARY
A.
1.3
1.4
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions, Division 01 Specification Sections, related Division 26, 27, and 28 apply to
this Section.
Section Includes: Grounding systems and equipment.
SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each type of ground bar and ground bars. Include dimensions and
manufacturers' technical data on features, performance, electrical characteristics, ratings,
and finishes.
B.
Field quality-control reports.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Electrical Systems: Components, Devices, and Accessories of all grounding systems
shall be UL Listed and labeled as defined and required in the NEC.
B.
Comply with UL 467 for grounding and bonding materials and equipment.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1
CONDUCTORS
A.
Insulated Conductors: Copper wire or cable insulated for 600 V unless otherwise noted.
B.
Bare Copper Conductors:
1.
2.
3.
C.
Solid Conductors: ASTM B 3.
Stranded Conductors: ASTM B 8.
Bonding Conductor: No. 4 or No. 6 AWG minimum stranded conductor unless
otherwise noted.
Grounding Bus: Predrilled rectangular bars of annealed copper, 1/4 by 4 inches, minimum in cross section, with 9/32-inch holes spaced 1-1/8 inches apart.
KIB DISTRICT OFFICE
RESTROOM IMPROVEMENTS
GROUNDING AND BONDING
FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
260526 - 1
Nominal length shall be 24”. Stand-off insulators for mounting shall comply with
UL 891 for use in switchboards, 600 V. Lexan or PVC, impulse tested at 5000 V.
2.2
CONNECTORS
A.
Listed and labeled by UL or a Nationally Recognized Testing Lab (NRTL) acceptable to
authorities having jurisdiction for applications in which used and for specific types, sizes, and combinations of conductors and other items connected.
B.
Bolted Connectors for Conductors and Pipes: Copper or copper alloy, pressure type
with at least two bolts.
1.
C.
Welded Connectors: Exothermic-welding kits of types recommended by kit manufacturer for materials being joined and installation conditions.
D.
Compression Connectors: Tools and dies of types recommended by manufacturer for
materials being joined and installation conditions.
1.
E.
2.3
Pipe Connectors: Clamp type, sized for pipe.
Use hydraulic compression tools to provide correct circumferential pressure for
compression connectors. Provide embossing die code or other standard method
to make a visible indication that a connector has been adequately compressed on
grounding conductor.
Bus-bar Connectors: Mechanical type, cast silicon bronze, solderless compression-type
wire terminals, and long-barrel, two-bolt connection to ground bus bar.
GROUNDING ELECTRODES
A.
Ground Rods: Copper-clad steel; 3/4 inch in diameter by 10 feet in length.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1
APPLICATIONS
A.
Conductors: Install solid conductor for No. 10 AWG and smaller and stranded conductors for No. 8 AWG and larger unless otherwise indicated.
1.
B.
Underground Grounding Conductors: Install bare copper conductor, size as indicated on
Drawings.
1.
C.
Conductor Insulation: Comply with Section 260519 "Low-Voltage Electrical
Power Conductors and Cables".
Bury at least 24 inches minimum below grade unless otherwise noted.
Isolated Grounding Conductors:
stripe.
KIB DISTRICT OFFICE
RESTROOM IMPROVEMENTS
Green-colored insulation with continuous yellow
GROUNDING AND BONDING
FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
260526 - 2
D.
On feeders with isolated ground, identify grounding conductor where visible to normal
inspection, with alternating bands of green and yellow tape, with at least three bands of
green and two bands of yellow.
E.
Grounding Bus: Install in electrical and telephone equipment rooms, in rooms housing
service equipment, and elsewhere as indicated.
1.
2.
F.
Install bus on insulated spacers 2 inches minimum from wall, 6 inches above finished floor unless otherwise indicated.
Where indicated on both sides of doorways, route bus up to top of door frame,
across top of doorway, and down to specified height above floor; connect to horizontal bus.
Conductor Terminations and Connections:
1.
Pipe and Equipment Grounding Conductor Terminations: Bolted and pressure
connectors.
a.
b.
2.
3.
4.
3.2
For No. 8 AWG and larger, use bolted or set screw type grounding
lugs.
No. 10 AWG and smaller grounding conductors use bolted, set
screw, or pressure-type connectors. Terminate with pressure type
grounding lugs, or screw termination.
Underground Connections: Exothermically welded except as otherwise indicated.
Connections to Ground Rods: Exothermically welded connectors.
Connections to Structural Steel: Exothermic welded connectors.
EQUIPMENT GROUNDING
A.
Install insulated equipment grounding conductors with all feeders and branch circuits.
1.
Equipment Grounding Conductors shall be bonded to conduits at both ends of all
feeders.
B.
Air-Duct Equipment Circuits: Install insulated equipment grounding conductor to ductmounted electrical devices operating at 120 V and more, including air cleaners, heaters,
dampers, humidifiers, and other duct electrical equipment. Bond conductor to each unit
and to air duct and connected metallic piping.
C.
Heat-Tracing and Anti-frost Heating Cables: Install an insulated equipment grounding
conductor to each electric heat-tracing cable. Bond conductor to piping, connected
equipment, and components.
D.
Isolated Grounding Receptacle Circuits: Install an insulated equipment grounding conductor connected to the receptacle grounding terminal. Isolate conductor from raceway
and from panelboard grounding terminals.
KIB DISTRICT OFFICE
RESTROOM IMPROVEMENTS
GROUNDING AND BONDING
FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
260526 - 3
E.
Isolated Equipment Enclosure Circuits: Where indicated by equipment manufacturer installation instructions or specifically indicated on the Drawings isolate equipment enclosure from supply circuit raceway with a nonmetallic raceway fitting listed for the purpose. Install fitting where raceway enters enclosure, and install a separate insulated
equipment grounding conductor. Isolate conductor from raceway and from panelboard
grounding terminals. Terminate at equipment grounding conductor terminal of the applicable derived system or service unless otherwise indicated.
F.
Signal and Communication Equipment: In addition to grounding and bonding required
by NFPA 70, provide a separate grounding system complying with requirements in
TIA/ATIS J-STD-607-A.
1.
For telephone, voice and data, and other communication equipment, provide insulated telecommunications bonding backbone TBB grounding conductor in
raceway from grounding electrode system to a ground bus in each telephone and
data equipment room, each service location, wiring closet, and central equipment
location.
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
2.
3.
G.
3.3
No. 4 AWG for a TBB length up to 21 feet.
No. 2 AWG for a TBB length greater than 21 to 33 feet.
No. 1/0 AWG for a TBB length greater than 33 to 52 feet.
No. 2/0 AWG for a TBB length greater than 52 to 66 feet.
No. 3/0 AWG for a TBB length greater than 66 feet.
Service and Central Equipment Locations and Wiring Closets: Terminate
grounding conductor on a 1/4-by-4-by-12-inch minimum grounding bus.
Terminal Cabinets: Terminate grounding conductor on cabinet grounding terminal.
Metal Poles Supporting Outdoor Lighting Fixtures: Connect equipment grounding conductor to all metal poles at handhole.
INSTALLATION
A.
Grounding Conductors: Route along shortest and straightest paths possible unless otherwise indicated or required by Code. Avoid obstructing access or placing conductors
where they may be subjected to strain, impact, or damage.
B.
Ground Bonding Common with Lightning Protection System: Comply with NFPA 780
and UL 96 when interconnecting with lightning protection system. Bond electrical
power system ground directly to lightning protection system grounding conductor at
closest point to electrical service grounding electrode. Use bonding conductor sized
same as system grounding electrode conductor.
C.
Ground Rods: Drive rods until tops are 12 inches minimum below final grade unless
otherwise noted.
1.
Interconnect ground rods with grounding electrode conductor below grade and as
Specified and shown on the Drawings. Maintain corrosion coating where provided.
KIB DISTRICT OFFICE
RESTROOM IMPROVEMENTS
GROUNDING AND BONDING
FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
260526 - 4
2.
D.
Bonding Straps and Jumpers: Install in locations accessible for inspection and maintenance except where routed through short lengths of conduit.
1.
2.
E.
Bonding to Structure: Bond straps directly to basic structure, taking care not to
penetrate adjacent parts.
Bonding to Equipment Mounted on Vibration Isolation Hangers and Supports:
Install bonding so vibration is not transmitted to rigidly mounted equipment.
Grounding and Bonding for Piping:
1.
2.
3.
Metal Water Service Pipe: Install copper grounding conductors, in conduit
where required for physical protection, from building's main service equipment
to main metal water service entrances to building. Connect grounding conductors to main metal water service pipes; use a bolted clamp connector or bolt a
lug-type connector to a pipe flange by using one of the lug bolts of the flange.
Where a dielectric main water fitting is installed, connect grounding conductor
on street side of fitting. Bond metal grounding conductor conduit or sleeve to
conductor at each end.
Water Meter Piping: Use bonding jumpers to electrically bond piping around
water meters. Connect to piping with a bolted connector.
Bond each aboveground portion of gas piping system downstream from equipment shutoff valve.
F.
Bonding Interior Metal Ducts: Bond metal air ducts to equipment grounding conductors
of associated fans, blowers, electric heaters, and air cleaners. Install bonding jumper to
bond across flexible duct connections to achieve continuity.
G.
Concrete-Encased Grounding Electrode: Provide in according to NFPA 70; use a minimum of 20 feet of bare copper conductor not smaller than No. 4 AWG.
1.
2.
3.4
Where ground rods are indicated, install at least two rods spaced at least one-rod
length from each other and located at least the same distance from other grounding electrodes, and connect to the service grounding electrode conductor.
If concrete foundation is less than 20 feet long, coil excess conductor within base
of foundation.
Bond grounding conductor to reinforcing steel in footings. Extend grounding
conductor below grade and connect to building's grounding grid or to grounding
electrode system external to concrete.
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A.
Perform tests and inspections.
B.
Tests and Inspections:
1.
After installing grounding system but before permanent electrical circuits have
been energized, test for compliance with requirements.
KIB DISTRICT OFFICE
RESTROOM IMPROVEMENTS
GROUNDING AND BONDING
FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
260526 - 5
2.
3.
Inspect physical and mechanical condition. Verify tightness of accessible, bolted, electrical connections with a calibrated torque wrench according to manufacturer's written instructions.
Test completed grounding system at service disconnect enclosure grounding terminal. Make tests at ground rods before any conductors are connected.
a.
Measure ground resistance without soil being moistened by any
means other than natural drainage or seepage and without chemical
treatment or other artificial means of reducing natural ground resistance.
C.
Grounding system will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.
D.
Prepare and submit test and inspection reports.
E.
Excessive Ground Resistance: If resistance to ground exceeds 25 ohms, add additional
ground rods, or other effective means to reduce ground resistance.
END OF SECTION 260526
KIB DISTRICT OFFICE
RESTROOM IMPROVEMENTS
GROUNDING AND BONDING
FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
260526 - 6
SECTION 260529 - HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions, Division 01 Specification Sections, related Division 26, 27, and 28 apply to
this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
This Section includes the following:
1.
B.
Related Sections include the following:
1.
1.3
1.4
Section 260548 "Vibration and Seismic Controls for Electrical Systems" for
products and installation requirements necessary for compliance with seismic criteria.
PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A.
Design raceway supports capable of supporting combined weight of supported systems
and contents.
B.
Design equipment supports capable of supporting combined operating weight of supported equipment and connected systems and components.
C.
Refer to Structural Notes listed in the Contract Drawings for applicable design data.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
1.5
Hangers and supports for electrical equipment and systems.
Comply with NFPA 70.
COORDINATION
A.
Coordinate size and location of concrete bases with structural design documents.
B.
Coordinate installation of roof curbs, equipment supports, and roof penetrations.
KIB DISTRICT OFFICE
RESTROOM IMPROVEMENTS
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
SECTION 260529 - 1
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1
SUPPORT, ANCHORAGE, AND ATTACHMENT COMPONENTS
A.
Slotted Steel Support Systems:
1.
Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not
limited to, the following:
a.
Allied Tube & Conduit.
b.
Cooper B-Line, Inc.
c.
ERICO International Corporation.
d.
Thomas & Betts Corporation.
e.
Unistrut.
2.
Metallic Coatings: Hot-dip galvanized after fabrication and applied according to
MFMA-4.
Channel Dimensions: Selected for applicable load criteria.
3.
2.2
Raceway and Cable Supports: As described in NECA 1 and NECA 101.
A.
Conduit and Cable Support Devices: Steel and malleable-iron hangers, clamps, and associated fittings, designed for types and sizes of raceway or cable to be supported.
B.
Support for Conductors in Vertical Conduit: Factory-fabricated assembly consisting of
threaded body and insulating wedging plug or plugs for non-armored electrical conductors or cables in riser conduits. Plugs shall have number, size, and shape of conductor
gripping pieces as required to suit individual conductors or cables supported. Body shall
be malleable iron.
C.
Structural Steel for Fabricated Supports and Restraints: ASTM A36/A36M, steel plates,
shapes, and bars; galvanized or painted as applicable for location and environment.
D.
Mounting, Anchoring, and Attachment Components: Items for fastening electrical items
or their supports to building surfaces include the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Mechanical-Expansion Anchors: Insert-wedge-type, zinc-coated or stainless
steel, for use in hardened Portland cement concrete with tension, shear, and
pullout capacities appropriate for supported loads and building materials in which
used.
Concrete Inserts: Steel or malleable-iron, slotted support system units similar to
MSS Type 18; complying with MFMA-4 or MSS SP-58.
Clamps for Attachment to Steel Structural Elements: MSS SP-58, type suitable
for attached structural element.
Through Bolts: Structural type, hex head, and high strength. Comply with
ASTM A 325.
Toggle Bolts: All-steel springhead type.
Hanger Rods: Threaded steel.
KIB DISTRICT OFFICE
RESTROOM IMPROVEMENTS
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
SECTION 260529 - 2
2.3
FABRICATED METAL EQUIPMENT SUPPORT ASSEMBLIES
A.
Description: Welded or bolted, structural-steel shapes, shop or field fabricated to fit dimensions of supported equipment.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1
APPLICATION
A.
Comply with NECA 1 and NECA 101 for application of hangers and supports for electrical equipment and systems except if requirements in this Section are stricter.
B.
Use the following materials:
1.
2.
3.
3.2
Indoor Dry Locations: Factory painted steel, zinc plated.
Outdoors and Damp Locations: Galvanized steel.
Corrosive Locations: Stainless steel.
C.
Maximum Support Spacing and Minimum Hanger Rod Size for Raceway: Space supports as required by NFPA 70. Minimum rod size shall be 3/8 inch in diameter.
D.
Trapeze Supports: Provide trapeze-type supports fabricated from slotted steel channel
support system, with 25% spare capacity.
SUPPORT INSTALLATION
A.
Comply with NECA 1 and NECA 101 for installation requirements except as specified in
this Article.
B.
Strength of Support Assemblies: Where not indicated, select sizes of components so
strength will be adequate to carry present and future static loads within specified loading
limits. Minimum static design load used for strength determination shall be weight of
supported components plus 200 lb.
C.
Mounting and Anchorage of Surface-Mounted Equipment and Components: Anchor and
fasten electrical items and their supports to building structural elements by the following
methods unless otherwise indicated by code:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
To Wood: Fasten with lag screws or through bolts.
To New Concrete: Bolt to concrete inserts.
To Masonry: Approved toggle-type bolts on hollow masonry units and expansion anchor fasteners on solid masonry units.
To Existing Concrete: Expansion anchor fasteners.
To Steel: Welded threaded studs complying with AWS D1.1/D1.1M, with lock
washers and nuts or beam clamps complying with MSS SP-69.
To Light Steel: Sheet metal screws.
KIB DISTRICT OFFICE
RESTROOM IMPROVEMENTS
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
SECTION 260529 - 3
7.
3.3
3.4
Items Mounted on Hollow Walls and Nonstructural Building Surfaces: Mount
cabinets, panelboards, disconnect switches, control enclosures, pull and junction
boxes, transformers, and other devices on slotted-channel racks attached to substrate by means that meet seismic-restraint strength and anchorage requirements.
D.
Drill holes for expansion anchors in concrete at locations and to depths that avoid reinforcing bars. Select drill diameter and embedment depth of anchor based on anchor
manufacturer’s test data for specific load requirements.
E.
Powder actuated fasteners shall not be used.
INSTALLATION OF FABRICATED METAL SUPPORTS
A.
Cut, fit, and place miscellaneous metal supports accurately in location, alignment, and elevation to support and anchor electrical materials and equipment.
B.
Field Welding: Comply with AWS D1.1.
PAINTING
A.
Touchup: Comply with requirements in Division 9 for cleaning and touchup painting of
field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas of shop paint on miscellaneous metal.
B.
Galvanized Surfaces: Clean welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and apply galvanizing-repair paint to comply with ASTM A780.
END OF SECTION 260529
KIB DISTRICT OFFICE
RESTROOM IMPROVEMENTS
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
SECTION 260529 - 4
SECTION 260533 - RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions, Division 01 Specification Sections, related Division 26, 27, and 28 apply to
this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
Section Includes:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
B.
Related Requirements:
1.
1.3
Metal conduits, tubing, and fittings.
Nonmetal conduits, tubing, and fittings.
Metal wireways and auxiliary gutters.
Surface raceways.
Boxes, enclosures, and cabinets.
Section 270533 "Conduits and Backboxes for Communications Systems" for
conduits, wireways, surface pathways, innerduct, boxes, faceplate adapters, enclosures, cabinets, and handholes serving communications systems.
SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For surface raceways, wireways and fittings, floor boxes, hinged-cover
enclosures, and cabinets.
B.
Shop Drawings: For custom enclosures and cabinets. Include plans, elevations, sections,
and attachment details.
C.
Coordination Drawings: Routing plans for conduits and raceways 2” and larger, drawn to
scale, on which the following items are shown and coordinated with each other, using input from installers of items involved:
1.
2.
Structural members in paths of conduit groups with common supports.
HVAC and plumbing items and architectural features in paths of conduit groups
with common supports.
KIB DISTRICT OFFICE
RESTROOM IMPROVEMENTS
RACEWAYS AND BOXES
FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
260533 - 1
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1
METAL CONDUITS, TUBING, AND FITTINGS
A.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the
following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
B.
Listing and Labeling: Metal conduits, tubing, and fittings shall be listed and labeled as
defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and
application.
C.
Galvanized Rigid Conduit (GRC): Comply with ANSI C80.1 and UL 6.
D.
Intermediate Metal Conduit (IMC): Comply with ANSI C80.6 and UL 1242.
E.
Electrical Metallic Tubing (EMT): Comply with ANSI C80.3 and UL 797.
F.
Flexible Metal Conduit (FMC): Comply with UL 1; zinc-coated steel.
G.
Liquidtight Flexible Metal Conduit (LFMC): Flexible steel conduit with PVC jacket and
complying with UL 360.
H.
Fittings for Metal Conduit: Comply with NEMA FB 1 and UL 514B.
1.
2.
3.
I.
2.2
AFC Cable Systems, Inc.
Allied Tube & Conduit.
Electri-Flex Company.
O-Z/Gedney.
Robroy Industries.
Thomas & Betts Corporation.
Conduit Fittings for Hazardous (Classified) Locations: Comply with UL 886 and
NFPA 70.
Fittings for EMT:
a.
Material: Steel.
b.
Type: Steel setscrew or compression, die cast fittings are prohibited.
Expansion Fittings: PVC or steel to match conduit type, complying with
UL 651, rated for environmental conditions where installed, and including flexible external bonding jumper.
Joint Compound for IMC and GRC: Approved, as defined in NFPA 70, by authorities
having jurisdiction for use in conduit assemblies, and compounded for use to lubricate
and protect threaded conduit joints from corrosion and to enhance their conductivity.
NONMETALLIC CONDUITS, TUBING, AND FITTINGS
A.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the
following:
KIB DISTRICT OFFICE
RESTROOM IMPROVEMENTS
RACEWAYS AND BOXES
FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
260533 - 2
1.
2.
3.
2.3
Carlon Electrical Products.
RACO.
Thomas & Betts Corporation.
B.
Listing and Labeling: Nonmetallic conduits, tubing, and fittings shall be listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.
C.
Rigid Nonmetallic Conduit (RNC):
UL 651 unless otherwise indicated.
D.
Rigid High Density Polyethylene (HDPE): Comply with UL 651A.
E.
Continuous HDPE: Comply with UL 651B.
F.
Fittings for RNC: Comply with NEMA TC 3; match to conduit or tubing type and material.
G.
Provide tracer for underground or underslab PVC conduit pathways.
Schedule 40, complying with NEMA TC 2 and
METAL WIREWAYS AND AUXILIARY GUTTERS
A.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the
following:
1.
2.
3.
B.
Cooper B-Line, Inc.
Hoffman.
Square D.
Description: Sheet metal, complying with UL 870 and NEMA 250, NEMA 1 or 4X as
required for the application, unless otherwise indicated, and sized according to NFPA 70.
1.
Metal wireways installed outdoors shall be listed and labeled as defined in
NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and
application.
C.
Fittings and Accessories: Include covers, couplings, offsets, elbows, expansion joints,
adapters, hold-down straps, end caps, and other fittings to match and mate with wireways
as required for complete system.
D.
Wireway Covers: Screw-cover type or Flanged-and-gasketed type unless otherwise indicated.
E.
Finish: Manufacturer's standard enamel finish.
KIB DISTRICT OFFICE
RESTROOM IMPROVEMENTS
RACEWAYS AND BOXES
FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
260533 - 3
2.4
SURFACE RACEWAYS
A.
Listing and Labeling: Surface raceways shall be listed and labeled as defined in
NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.
B.
Surface Metal Raceways: Galvanized steel with snap-on covers complying with UL 5.
Prime coated, ready for field painting with finish color selected by Architect.
1.
2.5
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not
limited to, the following:
a.
Mono-Systems, Inc.
b.
Panduit Corp.
c.
Wiremold / Legrand.
BOXES, ENCLOSURES, AND CABINETS
A.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the
following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
Cooper Crouse Hinds.
Appelton Company.
Erickson Electrical Equipment Company.
Hoffman.
Hubbell Incorporated.
Milbank Manufacturing Co.
O-Z/Gedney.
RACO.
Thomas & Betts Corporation.
Wiremold / Legrand.
B.
General Requirements for Boxes, Enclosures, and Cabinets: Boxes, enclosures, and cabinets installed in wet locations shall be listed for use in wet locations.
C.
Sheet Metal Outlet and Device Boxes: Comply with NEMA OS 1 and UL 514A.
D.
Cast-Metal Outlet and Device Boxes:
Type FD, with gasketed cover.
E.
Nonmetallic Outlet and Device Boxes: Comply with NEMA OS 2 and UL 514C.
F.
Metal Floor Boxes:
1.
2.
3.
Comply with NEMA FB 1, ferrous alloy,
Material: Cast metal or sheet metal.
Type: Fully adjustable.
Shape: Rectangular.
KIB DISTRICT OFFICE
RESTROOM IMPROVEMENTS
RACEWAYS AND BOXES
FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
260533 - 4
4.
Listing and Labeling: Metal floor boxes shall be listed and labeled as defined in
NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and
application.
G.
Luminaire Outlet Boxes: Nonadjustable, designed for attachment of luminaire weighing
50 lb. Outlet boxes designed for attachment of luminaires weighing more than 50 lb shall
be listed and marked for the maximum allowable weight.
H.
Small Sheet Metal Pull and Junction Boxes: NEMA OS 1.
I.
Box extensions used to accommodate new building finishes shall be of same material as
recessed box.
J.
Device Box Dimensions: 4 inches square by 2-1/8 inches deep minimum dimensions.
K.
Gangable boxes are prohibited.
L.
Hinged-Cover Enclosures: Comply with UL 50 and NEMA 250, Type 1 or Type 4X as
required for the application, with continuous-hinge cover with flush latch unless otherwise indicated.
1.
2.
M.
Metal Enclosures: Steel, finished inside and out with manufacturer's standard
enamel.
Interior Panels: Steel; all sides finished with manufacturer's standard enamel.
Cabinets:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
NEMA 250, Type 1, Type 3R, or Type 4X as required for the application, galvanized-steel box with removable interior panel and removable front, finished inside and out with manufacturer's standard enamel.
Hinged door in front cover with flush latch and concealed hinge.
Key latch to match panelboards.
Metal barriers to separate wiring of different systems and voltage.
Accessory feet where required for freestanding equipment.
Nonmetallic cabinets shall be listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a
qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1
RACEWAY APPLICATION
A.
Outdoors:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Exposed Conduit: GRC or IMC.
Concealed Conduit, Aboveground: GRC, IMC.
Underground Conduit: RNC, Schedule 40 PVC or HDPE, or Schedule 80 PVC
or HDPE.
Connection to Vibrating Equipment (Including Transformers and Hydraulic,
Pneumatic, Electric Solenoid, or Motor-Driven Equipment): LFMC.
KIB DISTRICT OFFICE
RESTROOM IMPROVEMENTS
RACEWAYS AND BOXES
FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
260533 - 5
B.
Indoors:
1.
2.
3.
4.
C.
Minimum Raceway Size: 1/2-inch trade size.
D.
Raceway Fittings: Compatible with raceways and suitable for use and location.
1.
2.
3.
3.2
Exposed, Not Subject to Physical Damage: GRC, IMC, EMT.
Connection to Vibrating Equipment (Including Transformers and Hydraulic,
Pneumatic, Electric Solenoid, or Motor-Driven Equipment): FMC, except use
LFMC in damp or wet locations.
Damp or Wet Locations: GRC or IMC.
Boxes and Enclosures: NEMA 250, Type 1, or 3R as required for the application, except use NEMA 250, Type 4 stainless steel in kitchens and related spaces.
Rigid and Intermediate Steel Conduit: Use threaded rigid steel conduit fittings
unless otherwise indicated. Comply with NEMA FB 2.10.
EMT: Use setscrew or compression, steel fittings. Die cast fittings are prohibited. Comply with NEMA FB 2.10.
Flexible Conduit: Use only fittings listed for use with flexible conduit. Comply
with NEMA FB 2.20.
E.
Do not install aluminum conduits.
F.
Install surface raceways on existing concrete or block walls without furring or where indicated on Drawings.
G.
Do not install nonmetallic conduit where ambient temperature exceeds 120 deg F.
H.
Provide GRC elbows for all PVC conduit exiting slabs, and underground locations.
INSTALLATION
A.
Comply with NECA 1 and NECA 101 for installation requirements except where requirements on Drawings or in this article are stricter. Comply with NECA 102 for aluminum conduits. Comply with NFPA 70 limitations for types of raceways allowed in
specific occupancies and number of floors.
B.
Keep raceways at least 12 inches away from parallel runs of flues and steam or hot-water
pipes. Install horizontal raceway runs above water and steam piping.
C.
Complete raceway installation before starting conductor installation.
D.
Comply with requirements in Section 260529 "Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems" for hangers and supports.
E.
Arrange stub-ups so curved portions of bends are not visible above finished slab.
F.
Install no more than the equivalent of four 90-degree bends in any conduit run.
G.
Conceal conduit and EMT within finished walls, ceilings, and floors unless otherwise indicated. Install conduits parallel or perpendicular to building lines.
KIB DISTRICT OFFICE
RESTROOM IMPROVEMENTS
RACEWAYS AND BOXES
FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
260533 - 6
H.
Raceways Embedded in Slabs:
1.
2.
3.
4.
I.
Run conduit larger than 1-inch trade size, parallel or at right angles to main reinforcement. Where at right angles to reinforcement, place conduit close to slab
support. Secure raceways to reinforcement at maximum 10-foot intervals.
Arrange raceways to cross building expansion joints at right angles with expansion fittings.
Arrange raceways to keep a minimum of 2 inches of concrete cover in all directions.
Do not embed compression or threadless fittings in concrete.
Stub-ups to Above Recessed Ceilings:
1.
Use EMT, IMC, or RMC for raceways.
J.
Threaded Conduit Joints, Exposed to Wet, Damp, Corrosive, or Outdoor Conditions:
Apply listed compound to threads of raceway and fittings before making up joints. Follow compound manufacturer's written instructions.
K.
Raceway Terminations at Locations Subject to Moisture or Vibration: Use insulating
bushings to protect conductors including conductors smaller than No. 4 AWG. Terminate
threaded conduits into threaded hubs or with locknuts on inside and outside of boxes or
cabinets.
L.
Install raceways square to the enclosure and terminate at enclosures with locknuts. Install
locknuts hand tight plus 1/4 turn more.
M.
Do not rely on locknuts to penetrate nonconductive coatings on enclosures. Remove
coatings in the locknut area prior to assembling conduit to enclosure to assure a continuous ground path.
N.
Cut conduit perpendicular to the length.
O.
Install pull wires in empty raceways. Use polypropylene line with not less than 200-lb
tensile strength. Leave at least 12 inches of slack at each end of pull wire. Cap underground raceways designated as spare above grade alongside raceways in use.
P.
Surface Raceways:
1.
2.
Install surface raceway with a minimum 2-inch radius control at bend points.
Secure surface raceway with screws or other anchor-type devices at intervals not
exceeding 48 inches and with no less than two supports per straight raceway section. Support surface raceway according to manufacturer's written instructions.
Q.
Install raceway sealing fittings at accessible locations according to NFPA 70.
R.
Install devices to seal raceway interiors at accessible locations. Locate seals so no fittings or boxes are between the seal and the following changes of environments. Seal the
interior of all raceways at the following points:
KIB DISTRICT OFFICE
RESTROOM IMPROVEMENTS
RACEWAYS AND BOXES
FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
260533 - 7
1.
2.
3.
Where conduits pass from warm to cold locations, such as boundaries of refrigerated spaces, exterior walls and from warm to un-heated spaces.
Where an underground service raceway enters a building or structure.
Where required by NFPA 70.
S.
Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for solvent welding RNC and fittings.
T.
Expansion-Joint Fittings:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Install in each run of aboveground RNC that is located where environmental
temperature change may exceed 30 deg F and that has straight-run length that exceeds 25 feet. Install in each run of aboveground RMC conduit that is located
where environmental temperature change may exceed 100 deg F and that has
straight-run length that exceeds 100 feet.
Install fittings in accordance with raceway and fitting manufacturer’s instructions.
Install expansion fittings at all locations where conduits cross building or structural expansion joints.
Install each expansion-joint fitting with position, mounting, and piston setting selected according to manufacturer's written instructions for conditions at specific
location at time of installation. Install conduit supports to allow for expansion
movement.
U.
Mount boxes at heights indicated on Drawings. If mounting heights of boxes are not individually indicated, give priority to ADA requirements. Install boxes with height measured to center of box unless otherwise indicated.
V.
Recessed Boxes in Masonry Walls: Saw-cut opening for box in center of cell of masonry
block, and install box flush with surface of wall. Prepare block surfaces to provide a flat
surface for a rain-tight connection between box and cover plate or supported equipment
and box.
W.
Horizontally separate boxes mounted on opposite sides of walls so they are not in the
same vertical channel.
X.
Locate boxes so that cover or device plate will not span different building finishes.
Y.
Support boxes of three gangs or more from more than one side by spanning two framing
members or mounting on brackets specifically designed for the purpose.
Z.
Fasten junction and pull boxes to or support from building structure. Do not support
boxes by conduits.
AA.
Set metal floor boxes level and flush with finished floor surface.
BB.
Surface conduits are acceptable in shop and utility spaces such as the metal fabrication
classroom and the boiler room.
KIB DISTRICT OFFICE
RESTROOM IMPROVEMENTS
RACEWAYS AND BOXES
FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
260533 - 8
3.3
SLEEVE AND SLEEVE-SEAL INSTALLATION FOR ELECTRICAL PENETRATIONS
A.
3.4
FIRESTOPPING
A.
3.5
Install sleeves and sleeve seals at penetrations of exterior floor and wall assemblies.
Comply with requirements in Section 260544 "Sleeves and Sleeve Seals for Electrical
Raceways and Cabling."
Install fire-stopping at penetrations of fire-rated floor and wall assemblies. Comply with
requirements in Division 7 for fire-stopping.
PROTECTION
A.
Protect coatings, finishes, and cabinets from damage and deterioration.
1.
Repair damage to galvanized finishes with zinc-rich paint recommended by manufacturer.
END OF SECTION 260533
KIB DISTRICT OFFICE
RESTROOM IMPROVEMENTS
RACEWAYS AND BOXES
FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
260533 - 9
[This page intentionally left blank.]
KIB DISTRICT OFFICE
RESTROOM IMPROVEMENTS
RACEWAYS AND BOXES
FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
260533 - 10
SECTION 260548 - VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
This Section includes the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
B.
Related Sections include the following:
1.
1.3
1.4
Section 260529 "Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems" for commonly
used electrical supports and installation requirements.
DEFINITIONS
A.
FEMA 413: Installing Seismic Restraints for Electrical Equipment.
B.
The IBC: International Building Code.
C.
ICC-ES: ICC-Evaluation Service.
D.
SEI/ASCE 7: Document published by American Society of Civil Engineers entitled
“Minimum Design Loads for Buildings and Other Structures”.
PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A.
1.5
Vibration Isolators
Channel support systems.
Restraint cables.
Hanger rod stiffeners.
Anchorage bushings and washers.
Seismic-Restraint Loading: See Structural requirements.
SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For the following:
1.
Illustrate and indicate style, material, strength, fastening provision, and finish for
each type and size of seismic-restraint component used.
KIB DISTRICT OFFICE
RESTROOM IMPROVEMENTS
VIBRATION AND SEISMIC
CONTROLS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
260548 - 1
a.
b.
2.
1.6
Tabulate types and sizes of seismic restraints, complete with report numbers and rated strength in tension and shear as evaluated by an evaluation
service member of ICC-ES or an agency acceptable to authorities having
jurisdiction.
Annotate to indicate application of each product submitted and compliance with requirements.
Seismic-Restraint Details:
a.
Indicate fabrication and arrangement. Detail attachments of restraints to
the restrained items and to the structure. Show attachment locations,
methods, and spacing. Identify components.
B.
Coordination Drawings: Show coordination of seismic bracing for electrical components
with other systems and equipment in the vicinity as required where bracing of electrical
system components will be installed in congested areas.
C.
Field quality-control test reports.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Comply with seismic-restraint requirements in the IBC 2009 and SEI/ASCE 7-05, unless
requirements in this Section are more stringent.
B.
Seismic-restraint devices shall have horizontal and vertical load testing and analysis and
shall bear anchorage preapproval by an agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, showing maximum seismic-restraint ratings. If preapproved ratings are not available, submit proposed seismic-restraint devices to the structural engineer of record for approval.
C.
Comply with NFPA 70.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1
SEISMIC-RESTRAINT DEVICES
A.
Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the
following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
B.
Cooper B-Line, Inc.
Hilti Inc.
Mason Industries.
Unistrut.
General Requirements for Restraint Components: Rated strengths, features, and application requirements shall be as defined in reports by an evaluation service member of ICCES or an agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
KIB DISTRICT OFFICE
RESTROOM IMPROVEMENTS
VIBRATION AND SEISMIC
CONTROLS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
260548 - 2
2.2
C.
Channel Support System: MFMA-3, shop- or field-fabricated support assembly made of
slotted steel channels with accessories for attachment to braced component at one end
and to building structure at the other end and other matching components and with corrosion-resistant coating; and rated in tension, compression, and torsion forces.
D.
Restraint Cables: ASTM A 603 galvanized-steel cables with end connections made of
steel assemblies with thimbles, brackets, swivels, and bolts designed for restraining cable
service; and with a minimum of two clamping bolts for cable engagement.
E.
Hanger Rod Stiffener: Steel slotted-support-system sleeve with internally bolted connections or steel angle clamped to hanger rod. Do not weld stiffeners to rods.
F.
Bushings for Floor-Mounted Equipment Anchor: Neoprene bushings designed for rigid
equipment mountings, and matched to type and size of anchors and studs.
G.
Bushing Assemblies for Wall-Mounted Equipment Anchorage: Assemblies of neoprene
elements and steel sleeves designed for rigid equipment mountings, and matched to type
and size of attachment devices.
H.
Resilient Isolation Washers and Bushings: One-piece, molded, oil- and water-resistant
neoprene, with a flat washer face.
I.
Mechanical Anchor: Drilled-in and stud-wedge or female-wedge type in zinc-coated
steel for interior applications and stainless steel for exterior applications. Select anchors
with strength required for anchor and as tested according to ASTM E 488. Minimum
length of eight times diameter.
J.
Adhesive Anchor: Drilled-in and capsule anchor system containing polyvinyl or urethane methacrylate-based resin and accelerator, or injected polymer or hybrid mortar adhesive.
K.
Provide anchor bolts and hardware with zinc-coated steel for interior applications and
stainless steel for exterior applications. Select anchor bolts with strength required for anchor and as tested according to ASTM E 488.
FACTORY FINISHES
A.
Finish: Manufacturer's standard paint applied to factory-assembled and -tested equipment before shipping.
1.
2.
3.
4.
Powder coating on springs and housings.
All hardware shall be galvanized. Hot-dip galvanize metal components for exterior use.
Baked enamel or powder coat for metal components on isolators for interior use.
Color-code or otherwise mark seismic-control devices to indicate capacity range.
KIB DISTRICT OFFICE
RESTROOM IMPROVEMENTS
VIBRATION AND SEISMIC
CONTROLS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
260548 - 3
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1
3.2
EXAMINATION
A.
Examine areas and equipment to receive seismic-control devices for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance.
B.
Examine roughing-in of reinforcement and cast-in-place anchors to verify actual locations before installation.
C.
Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
APPLICATIONS
A.
Use the following materials.
1.
2.
3.
3.3
Indoor Dry Locations: Steel, zinc plated.
Outdoors and Damp Locations: Galvanized steel.
Corrosive Locations: Stainless steel.
B.
Multiple Raceways or Cables: Secure raceways and cables to trapeze member with
clamps approved for application by an evaluation service member of ICC-ES or an agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
C.
Hanger Rod Stiffeners: Install hanger rod stiffeners where indicated or scheduled on
Drawings to receive them and where required to prevent buckling of hanger rods due to
seismic forces.
D.
Strength of Support and Seismic-Restraint Assemblies: Where not indicated, select sizes
of components so strength will be adequate to carry present and future static and seismic
loads within specified loading limits.
SEISMIC-RESTRAINT DEVICE INSTALLATION
A.
Install seismic restraints according to applicable codes and regulations and as approved
by authorities having jurisdiction, unless more stringent requirements are indicated.
1.
B.
Comply with the recommendations for installation of electrical equipment and
conduits per FEMA 413, Installing Seismic Restraints for Electrical Equipment,
latest edition.
Equipment and Hanger Restraints:
1.
2.
Install restrained isolators on electrical equipment as required.
Install resilient, bolt-isolation washers on equipment anchor bolts where clearance between anchor and adjacent surface exceeds 0.125 inch.
KIB DISTRICT OFFICE
RESTROOM IMPROVEMENTS
VIBRATION AND SEISMIC
CONTROLS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
260548 - 4
3.
C.
Install bushing assemblies for mounting bolts for wall-mounted equipment, arranged to
provide resilient media where equipment or equipment-mounting channels are attached to
wall.
D.
Attachment to Structure: If specific attachment is not indicated, anchor bracing to structure at flanges of beams, at upper truss chords of bar joists, or at concrete members. Contractor may gain approval of alternate attachments with the consensus of the structural
engineer of record.
E.
Drilled-in Anchors:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
F.
3.4
Identify position of reinforcing steel and other embedded items prior to drilling
holes for anchors. Do not damage existing reinforcing or embedded items during
coring or drilling. Notify the structural engineer if reinforcing steel or other embedded items are encountered during drilling. Locate and avoid prestressed tendons, electrical and telecommunications conduit, and gas lines.
Do not drill holes in concrete or masonry until concrete, mortar, or grout has
achieved full design strength.
Wedge Anchors: Protect threads from damage during anchor installation.
Heavy-duty sleeve anchors shall be installed with sleeve fully engaged in the
structural element to which anchor is to be fastened.
Adhesive Anchors: Clean holes to remove loose material and drilling dust prior
to installation of adhesive. Place adhesive in holes proceeding from the bottom
of the hole and progressing toward the surface in such a manner as to avoid introduction of air pockets in the adhesive.
Set anchors to manufacturer's recommended torque, using a torque wrench.
Install zinc-coated steel anchors for interior and stainless-steel anchors for exterior applications.
ACCOMMODATION OF DIFFERENTIAL SEISMIC MOTION
A.
3.5
Install seismic-restraint devices using methods approved by an evaluation service
member of ICC-ES, an agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, or by
providing required submittals for component.
Install flexible connections in runs of raceways, cables, wireways, cable trays, and
busways where they cross seismic joints, where adjacent sections or branches are supported by different structural elements, and where they terminate with connection to
equipment that is anchored to a different structural element from the one supporting them
as they approach equipment.
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A.
Perform tests and inspections.
B.
Tests and Inspections:
KIB DISTRICT OFFICE
RESTROOM IMPROVEMENTS
VIBRATION AND SEISMIC
CONTROLS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
260548 - 5
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
3.6
Provide evidence of recent calibration of test equipment by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
Schedule test with Owner before connecting anchorage device to restrained component (unless post-connection testing has been approved), and with at least seven days' advance notice.
Obtain Owner’s approval before transmitting test loads to structure. Provide
temporary load-spreading members.
Test at least three of each type and size of installed anchors and fasteners selected
by Owner.
Test selected anchors and fasteners where the Owner suspects a problem with the
installation or the anchor appears to be under-sized to support the design loading.
Test to 90 percent of rated proof load of device.
If a device fails test, modify all installations of same type and retest until satisfactory results are achieved.
C.
Remove and replace malfunctioning units and retest as specified above.
D.
Prepare test and inspection reports.
ADJUSTING
A.
Adjust restraints to permit free movement of equipment within normal mode of operation.
END OF SECTION 260548
KIB DISTRICT OFFICE
RESTROOM IMPROVEMENTS
VIBRATION AND SEISMIC
CONTROLS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
260548 - 6
SECTION 260553 - IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
Section Includes:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
1.3
1.4
Identification for conductors.
Underground-line warning tape.
Warning labels and signs.
Instruction signs.
Equipment identification labels.
Miscellaneous identification products.
SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each electrical identification product indicated.
B.
Samples: For each type of label and sign to illustrate size, colors, lettering style, mounting provisions, and graphic features of identification products.
C.
Identification Schedule: An index of nomenclature of electrical equipment and system
components used in identification signs and labels.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Comply with ANSI A13.1 and IEEE C2.
B.
Comply with NFPA 70.
C.
Comply with ANSI Z535.4 for safety signs and labels.
D.
Adhesive-attached labeling materials, including label stocks, laminating adhesives, and
inks used by label printers, shall comply with UL 969.
KIB DISTRICT OFFICE
RESTROOM IMPROVEMENTS
IDENTIFICATION FOR
ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
260553 - 1
1.5
COORDINATION
A.
Coordinate identification names, abbreviations, colors, and other features with requirements in other Sections requiring identification applications, Drawings, Shop Drawings,
manufacturer's wiring diagrams, and the Operation and Maintenance Manual; and with
those required by codes, standards. Use consistent designations throughout Project.
B.
Coordinate installation of identifying devices with completion of covering and painting
of surfaces where devices are to be applied.
C.
Coordinate installation of identifying devices with location of access panels and doors.
D.
Install identifying devices before installing acoustical ceilings and similar concealment.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1
CONDUCTOR IDENTIFICATION MATERIALS
A.
Color-Coding Tape: Colored, self-adhesive vinyl tape not less than 3 mils thick by 3/4"
to 2 inches wide.
B.
Machine Printed Heat Shrink Wire and Conductor Markers:
1.
2.
3.
2.2
FLOOR MARKING TAPE
A.
2.3
Description: Machine printed heat shrink tubing type wire markers.
Locations: Each conductor at panelboard termination; pull boxes, outlet and
junction boxes where splices are made; and each load connection.
Legend:
a.
Power and Lighting Circuits: Panelboard number, branch circuit or
feeder number.
b.
Control Circuits: Control wire number indicated on shop drawings.
2-inch- wide, 5-mil pressure-sensitive vinyl tape, with yellow and black stripes and clear
vinyl overlay.
WARNING LABELS AND SIGNS
A.
Comply with NFPA 70.
B.
Self-Adhesive Warning Labels: Factory-printed, multicolor, pressure-sensitive adhesive
labels, configured for display on front cover, door, or other access to equipment unless
otherwise indicated.
C.
Baked-Enamel Warning Signs:
1.
Preprinted aluminum signs, punched or drilled for fasteners, with colors, legend,
and size required for application.
KIB DISTRICT OFFICE
RESTROOM IMPROVEMENTS
IDENTIFICATION FOR
ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
260553 - 2
2.
3.
D.
Metal-Backed, Butyrate Warning Signs:
1.
2.
3.
E.
Multiple Power Source Warning: "DANGER - ELECTRICAL SHOCK
HAZARD - EQUIPMENT HAS MULTIPLE POWER SOURCES."
INSTRUCTION SIGNS AND EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION LABELS
A.
Engraved, laminated acrylic or melamine plastic, minimum 1/16 inch thick for signs up
to 20 sq. inches and 1/8 inch thick for larger sizes.
1.
2.
3.
4.
B.
2.5
Weather-resistant, nonfading, preprinted, cellulose-acetate butyrate signs with
0.0396-inch galvanized-steel backing; and with colors, legend, and size required
for application.
1/4-inch grommets in corners for mounting.
Nominal size, 10 by 14 inches.
Warning label and sign shall include, but are not limited to, the following legends:
1.
2.4
1/4-inch grommets in corners for mounting.
Nominal size, 7 by 10 inches.
Engraved legend with black letters on white face unless otherwise indicated.
Punched or drilled for mechanical fasteners.
Framed with mitered acrylic molding and arranged for attachment at applicable
equipment.
Minimum letter height shall be 3/8 inch.
Adhesive Film Label: Machine printed, in black, by thermal transfer or equivalent process. Minimum letter height shall be 3/8 inch.
CABLE TIES
A.
General-Purpose Cable Ties: Fungus inert, self-extinguishing, one piece, self-locking,
Type 6/6 nylon.
1.
2.
3.
4.
B.
Minimum Width: 3/16 inch.
Tensile Strength at 73 deg. F, According to ASTM D 638: 12,000 psi.
Temperature Range: Minus 40 to plus 185 deg. F.
Color: Black except where used for color-coding.
UV-Stabilized Cable Ties: Fungus inert, designed for continuous exposure to exterior
sunlight, self-extinguishing, one piece, self-locking, Type 6/6 nylon.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Minimum Width: 3/16 inch.
Tensile Strength at 73 deg. F, According to ASTM D 638: 12,000 psi.
Temperature Range: Minus 40 to plus 185 deg. F.
Color: Black.
Plenum-Rated Cable Ties: Self-extinguishing, UV stabilized, one piece, selflocking.
KIB DISTRICT OFFICE
RESTROOM IMPROVEMENTS
IDENTIFICATION FOR
ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
260553 - 3
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
2.6
Minimum Width: 3/16 inch.
Tensile Strength at 73 deg. F, According to ASTM D 638: 7000 psi.
UL 94 Flame Rating: 94V-0.
Temperature Range: Minus 50 to plus 284 deg. F.
Color: Black.
MISCELLANEOUS IDENTIFICATION PRODUCTS
A.
Paint: Comply with requirements in painting Sections for paint materials and application
requirements. Select paint system applicable for surface material and location (exterior
or interior).
B.
Fasteners for Labels and Signs: Self-tapping, stainless-steel screws or stainless-steel machine screws with nuts and flat and lock washers.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION
A.
Verify identity of each item before installing identification products.
B.
Location: Install identification materials and devices at locations for most convenient
viewing without interference with operation and maintenance of equipment.
C.
Apply identification devices to surfaces that require finish after completing finish work.
D.
Self-Adhesive Identification Products: Clean surfaces before application, using materials
and methods recommended by manufacturer of identification device.
E.
Attach signs and plastic labels that are not self-adhesive type with mechanical fasteners
appropriate to the location and substrate.
F.
Cable Ties: For attaching tags. Use general-purpose type, except as listed below:
1.
2.
G.
3.2
Outdoors: UV-stabilized nylon.
In Spaces Handling Environmental Air: Plenum rated.
Underground-Line Warning Tape: During backfilling of trenches install continuous underground-line warning tape directly above line at 6 to 8 inches below finished grade.
Use multiple tapes where width of multiple lines installed in a common trench or concrete envelope exceeds 16 inches overall.
IDENTIFICATION SCHEDULE
A.
Accessible Raceways and Cables within Buildings: Identify the covers of each junction
and pull box of the following systems with paint. The raceways shall be identified with a
6-inch band of paint at 10-foot maximum intervals. System legends shall be as follows:
KIB DISTRICT OFFICE
RESTROOM IMPROVEMENTS
IDENTIFICATION FOR
ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
260553 - 4
1.
B.
Fire Alarm System – Red.
Power-Circuit Conductor Identification, 600 V or Less: For conductors in vaults, pull
and junction boxes, manholes, and handholes, use color-coding conductor tape to identify
the phase.
1.
Color-Coding for Phase and Voltage Level Identification, 600 V or Less: Use
colors listed below for ungrounded service, feeder, and branch-circuit conductors.
a.
Color shall be factory or field applied for sizes larger than No. 8 AWG.
b.
Colors for 208/120-V Circuits:
1) Phase A: Black.
2) Phase B: Red.
3) Phase C: Blue.
4) Neutral: White.
c.
Colors for 480/277-V Circuits:
5) Phase A: Brown.
6) Phase B: Orange.
7) Phase C: Yellow.
8) Neutral: Gray.
d.
C.
Field-Applied, Color-Coding Conductor Tape: Apply in half-lapped
turns for a minimum distance of 6 inches from terminal points and in
boxes where splices or taps are made. Apply last two turns of tape with
no tension to prevent possible unwinding. Locate bands to avoid obscuring factory cable markings.
Power-Circuit Conductor Identification, 600 V or Less:
1.
2.
3.
Identify conductors, cables, and terminals in enclosures and at junctions, terminals, and pull points. Identify by system and circuit designation.
Use machine printed heat shrink tube type wire markers with the conductor or
cable designation that is uniform and consistent with system used by manufacturer for factory-installed connections.
Coordinate identification with Project Drawings, manufacturer's wiring diagrams,
and the Operation and Maintenance Manual.
D.
Where wiring phase and voltage level identification color scheme in an existing system
being expanded by this work does not comply with the requirements above, conform with
the existing color scheme.
E.
Control-Circuit Conductor Identification: For conductors and cables in pull and junction
boxes, manholes, and handholes, use machine printed heat shrink tube type wire markers
with the conductor or cable designation, origin, and destination.
F.
Control-Circuit Conductor Termination Identification: For identification at terminations
use machine printed heat shrink tube type wire markers with the conductor or cable designation and originating panel or equipment.
KIB DISTRICT OFFICE
RESTROOM IMPROVEMENTS
IDENTIFICATION FOR
ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
260553 - 5
G.
Auxiliary Electrical Systems Conductor Identification: Identify field-installed alarm,
control, and signal connections.
1.
2.
3.
Identify conductors, cables, and terminals in enclosures and at junctions, terminals, and pull points. Identify by system and circuit designation.
Use machine printed heat shrink tube type wire markers with the conductor or
cable designation that is uniform and consistent with system used by manufacturer for factory-installed connections.
Coordinate identification with manufacturer's wiring diagrams.
H.
Workspace Indication: Install floor marking tape to show working clearances in the direction of access to live parts. Workspace shall be as required by NFPA 70 unless otherwise indicated. Do not install at flush-mounted panelboards and similar equipment in finished spaces.
I.
Equipment Identification Labels: On each unit of equipment, install unique designation
label that is consistent with schedules on Drawings.
Apply labels to disconnect switches and protection equipment, central or master units,
control panels, control stations, terminal cabinets, and racks of each system. Systems include, but are not limited to power, lighting, control, communication, signal, monitoring,
and alarm systems unless equipment is provided with its own identification.
1.
Labeling Instructions:
a.
Equipment: Engraved, laminated acrylic. Unless otherwise indicated,
provide a single line of text with 1/2-inch- high letters on 1-1/2-inchhigh label; where two lines of text are required, use labels 2 inches high.
1) Fasten labels with appropriate mechanical fasteners.
2.
Equipment to be Labeled:
a.
Panelboards: Typewritten directory of circuits in the location provided
by panelboard manufacturer. Panelboard identification shall be engraved, laminated acrylic or melamine label.
b.
Enclosures and electrical cabinets.
c.
Access doors and panels for concealed electrical items.
d.
Emergency system boxes and enclosures.
e.
Enclosed switches.
f.
Enclosed circuit breakers.
g.
Enclosed controllers.
h.
Contactors.
i.
Remote-controlled switches, dimmer modules, and control devices.
j.
Monitoring and control equipment.
END OF SECTION 260553
KIB DISTRICT OFFICE
RESTROOM IMPROVEMENTS
IDENTIFICATION FOR
ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
260553 - 6
SECTION 260943 - NETWORK LIGHTING CONTROLS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
Section Includes:
1.
B.
Related Sections:
1.
2.
3.
4.
1.2
Section 260503 – Equipment Wiring Connections: Execution requirements for
electric connections specified by this section.
Section 260533 – Raceway and Boxes for Electrical Systems: Product
requirements for raceway and boxes for placement by this section.
Section 260553 – Identification for Electrical Systems: Product requirements for
electrical identification items for placement by this section.
Section 262726 – Wiring Devices: Product requirements for wiring devices for
placement by this section.
REFERENCES
A.
Federal Communications Commission:
1.
B.
C.
NEMA 250 - Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1000 Volts Maximum).
National Fire Protection Association:
1.
D.
Standard for Radio Frequency Equipment.
National Electrical Manufacturers Association:
1.
NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code.
Underwriters Laboratories Inc.:
1.
2.
1.3
Networked lighting control system and components for interior lighting.
UL 50 - Enclosures for Electrical Equipment.
UL 67 - Panelboards.
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A.
Provide networked lighting control system consisting of components manufactured by
single source.
B.
Provide networked lighting control system consisting of:
KIB DISTRICT OFFICE
RESTROOM IMPROVEMENTS
NETWORK LIGHTING CONTROLS
260943 - 1
1.
2.
3.
C.
1.4
Networked lighting control system performs lighting control in areas indicated on the
Drawings.
SUBMITTALS
A.
Section 013300 – Submittal Procedures: Requirements for submittals.
B.
Shop Drawings: Indicate dimensioned drawings of lighting control system components
and accessories.
1.
2.
3.
4.
1.5
One Line Diagram: Indicating system configuration indicating panels, number
and type of switches, data line, and network time clock.
Drawings for each panel showing hardware configuration and numbering.
Panel wiring schedules.
Include typical wiring diagrams for each component.
C.
Product Data: Submit manufacturer’s standard product data for each system component.
D.
Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Submit for each system component.
E.
Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify Products meet or exceed specified requirements.
Submit in writing system has been installed, adjusted, and tested in accordance with
manufacturer's recommendations.
F.
Manufacturer's Field Reports: Submit system startup report indicating date of completion
and acknowledgment of programming completion. Indicate acceptance of component and
equipment installation, interconnecting wiring, and start-up of system software.
COMMISSIONING
A.
1.6
Room controllers supporting local control and lighting sequences as shown on
the Drawings.
Room controllers linked over low voltage network wiring for communications.
Central server with input and displays with remote client licenses for up to 6
locations and DDC access to lighting network. Client licenses will access server
over owner’s network.
Provide Pre-functional check and functional testing and training of equipment specified
in this section as part of Commissioning Process.
CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A.
Section 017000 – Execution and Closeout Requirements: Requirements for submittals.
B.
Project Record Documents: Record the following information:
1.
2.
Wiring diagrams reflecting field installed conditions with identified and
numbered system components and devices.
Drawings for each panel showing hardware configuration and numbering.
KIB DISTRICT OFFICE
RESTROOM IMPROVEMENTS
NETWORK LIGHTING CONTROLS
260943 - 2
C.
Operation and Maintenance Data:
1.
2.
3.
4.
1.7
1.8
1.9
Submit manufacturer’s published installation instructions, operating instructions,
programming instructions, and operator’s guide.
System user's guide and programmer's guide.
Instruction books and manufacturer’s printed materials.
Recommended renewal parts list.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Provide wiring materials located in plenums with peak optical density not greater than
0.5, average optical density not greater than 0.15, and flame spread not greater than 5 feet
(1.5 m) when tested in accordance with NFPA 262.
B.
Comply with NFPA 70 as applicable to electrical wiring work.
C.
Comply with NEMA 250 for type of electrical equipment enclosures.
D.
Provide panelboards with UL listing in accordance with UL 50, UL 67, and UL 916.
E.
Provide equipment complying with FCC emissions' standards in part 15 subpart J for
Class A application.
QUALIFICATIONS
A.
Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing lighting control system listed in
this section, with minimum three years documented experience.
B.
Installer: Company specializing in performing work of this section with minimum 3 years
documented experience and approved by manufacturer.
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A.
Section 016000 – Product Requirements: Requirements for transporting, handling,
storing, and protecting products.
B.
Accept system components on site in manufacturer’s packaging. Inspect for damage.
C.
Protect components by storing in manufacturer’s containers indoor protected from
weather.
1.10 WARRANTY
A.
Section 017000 – Execution and Closeout Requirements: Requirements for warranties.
KIB DISTRICT OFFICE
RESTROOM IMPROVEMENTS
NETWORK LIGHTING CONTROLS
260943 - 3
1.11 EXTRA MATERIALS
A.
Section 017000 – Execution and Closeout Requirements: Requirements for extra
materials.
B.
Furnish 10 percent of total number of each type of room controller and bridges/network
devices.
C.
Furnish two of each switch type.
D.
Furnish two of each occupancy sensor type.
E.
Furnish two of each photocell type.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1
NETWORKED LIGHTING CONTROL SYSTEM
A.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers
offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to,
the following:
1.
2.
3.
B.
Product Description: Networked lighting control system consisting of the following
components:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
2.2
Sensor Switch.
Lutron
Watt Stopper.
Network wiring
Programmable network wired switches
Programmable clock
Software
Capability of integration into building automation system.
Network room controllers and Bridges/network devices.
ROOM CONTROLLER
A.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers
offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to,
the following:
1.
2.
3.
Watt Stopper.
Sensor Switch.
Lutron
KIB DISTRICT OFFICE
RESTROOM IMPROVEMENTS
NETWORK LIGHTING CONTROLS
260943 - 4
B.
2.3
Product Description:
1.
On/Off Controller: Networked local room controller allowing integration of
occupancy and day-lighting sensors for lighting control with the following
features:
a.
120/277 Volt operation.
b.
Up to two relays.
c.
20 Amp Rating.
d.
On/Off or Bi-level switching.
e.
LED status indication.
f.
RJ45 jacks for Cat 5e cabling.
2.
Dimming Controller: Networked local room controller allowing integration of
occupancy and day-lighting sensors for lighting control with the following
features:
a.
120/277 Volt operation.
b.
Up to three relays.
c.
Minimum one 0 to 10V output per relay.
d.
20 Amp Rating.
e.
On/Off, Dimming for each load.
f.
Up to sixteen pre-set levels.
g.
LED status indication
h.
RJ45 jacks for Cat 5e cabling.
i.
Integral current monitoring of loads.
NETWORK BRIDGE
A.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers
offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to,
the following:
1.
2.
3.
B.
2.4
Watt Stopper.
Sensor Switch.
Lutron
Product Description: network connection for groups of local room controllers and
Network devices allowing local networks to be integrated into a larger system.
PROGRAMMABLE NETWORK WIRED SWITCHES
A.
Function: Allow individual overrides. Switches terminated to network wiring of each
panel.
B.
Configuration: Single, Dual, Quad, Octal, Dimming, Scene Control.
C.
Switch module buttons capable of being individually programmed to meet the sequence
of operation on the Drawings including the following functions:
KIB DISTRICT OFFICE
RESTROOM IMPROVEMENTS
NETWORK LIGHTING CONTROLS
260943 - 5
1.
2.
2.5
HEAD END
A.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers
offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to,
the following:
1.
2.
3.
B.
2.6
2.7
Watt Stopper.
Sensor Switch.
Lutron.
System shall be stand-alone at the Completion of this project. It shall also be capable of
integrating with high school Sensor Switch n-light network at a later date if desired by
the Owner (compatible system).
SOFTWARE
A.
Furnish plug-in capability for use in system commissioning, programming, monitoring,
and control.
B.
After programming of system parameters is completed, system allows each userdefinable feature such as schedules, relay groups, switch assignments to be field modified
without need for configuration software or system integration expertise.
NETWORK WIRING
A.
2.8
Control each individual relay or switch leg.
Control each group of switch leg for scene control.
Material: Plenum rated and meeting network lighting control manufacturer’s
requirements.
BAS INTEGRATION
A.
Photocell shall provide override of site lighting fixtures through the Network Lighting
Control controller or a separate relay.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION
A.
Mount switches, occupancy sensors, day-lighting controls, and photocells as indicated on
Drawings.
B.
Label each low voltage wire clearly indicating connecting relay panel. Refer to Section
260553 Identification for Electrical Systems.
KIB DISTRICT OFFICE
RESTROOM IMPROVEMENTS
NETWORK LIGHTING CONTROLS
260943 - 6
3.2
3.3
C.
Use only properly color coded, stranded wire. Install wire sizes as indicated on Drawings.
D.
Mount relay panels as indicated on Drawings. Wire numbered relays in panel to control
power to each load.
E.
Identify power wiring with circuit breaker number controlling load. When multiple
circuit breaker panels are feeding into relay panel, label wires to clearly indicate
originating panel’s designation.
F.
Terminate communication conductors and associated conduits external to factory
supplied equipment.
G.
Test relays and switches after installation to confirm proper operation.
H.
Label each low voltage wire with relay number at each switch or sensor.
I.
Install wiring schedule directory card affixed to rear of panel cover to identify circuits,
relays, and loads controlled.
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A.
Section 014000 - Quality Requirements and 017000 - Execution and Closeout
Requirements: Field inspecting, testing, adjusting, and balancing.
B.
Test controls and switches after installation to confirm proper operation and confirm
correct loads are recorded on directory card in each panel.
MANUFACTURER'S FIELD SERVICES
A.
Section 014000 - Quality Requirements: Requirements for manufacturer’s field services.
B.
System Startup: Furnish manufacturer trained, factory authorized technician to confirm
proper installation and operation of system components.
C.
Furnish services of factory trained representative for factory check, test, and start-up
supervision. Perform the following services:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
D.
Check installation of panelboards.
Test operation of remote controlled devices.
Test operation of network connections.
Test operation of central operator's station and associated printer.
Repair or replace defective components.
Programming: Furnish services of factory trained representative to perform programming
of system. Assist Owner’s personnel in developing control scenario for each application.
Program Owner furnished control scenario.
1.
2.
Explain operation of control programs to Owner and conduct demonstration of
project.
Provide programs on DVD RW.
KIB DISTRICT OFFICE
RESTROOM IMPROVEMENTS
NETWORK LIGHTING CONTROLS
260943 - 7
3.
3.4
3.5
3.6
Maintain copy of programmed information at factory.
ADJUSTING
A.
Section 017000 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Requirements for starting and
adjusting.
B.
Furnish factory trained technicians to functionally test each system component after
installation to verify proper operation.
COMMISSIONING
A.
Functional testing shall demonstrate 100% of lighting control sequences and overall
system integration with building automation system.
B.
Functional testing may be conducted immediately after Factory Field Services.
C.
Include integration with DDC controls as part of DDC commissioning.
DEMONSTRATION
A.
Section 017000 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Requirements for demonstration
and training.
B.
Demonstrate operation of the following system components:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
C.
Index system to occupied cycle and unoccupied cycle.
Operation of switches.
Operation of each type of occupancy sensors.
Operation of each type of day-lighting sensors.
Operation of each type of photocell.
Furnish services of manufacturer's technical representative to instruct Owner's personnel
in operation and maintenance of system. Schedule training with Owner, provide at least 7
day notice of training date.
END OF SECTION 260943
KIB DISTRICT OFFICE
RESTROOM IMPROVEMENTS
NETWORK LIGHTING CONTROLS
260943 - 8
SECTION 262726 - WIRING DEVICES
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
Section includes wall switches; receptacles; cord reels assemblies, device plates, and
decorative box covers.
B.
Related Sections:
1.
1.2
REFERENCES
A.
National Electrical Manufacturers Association:
1.
2.
1.3
1.4
NEMA WD 1 - General Requirements for Wiring Devices.
NEMA WD 6 - Wiring Devices-Dimensional Requirements.
SUBMITTALS
A.
Section 013000 - Submittal Procedures: Submittal procedures.
B.
Product Data: Submit manufacturer's catalog information showing dimensions, colors,
and configurations.
QUALIFICATIONS
A.
1.5
Section 20533 - Raceway and Boxes for Electrical Systems: Outlet boxes for
wiring devices.
Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing products specified in this section
with minimum three years documented experience.
EXTRA MATERIALS
A. Furnish one cover assembly for each floor box installed.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1
WALL SWITCHES
A.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers
offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to,
the following:
1.
2.
Hubbell 20A: 1221 Series.
Bryant 20A: 4901 Series.
KIB DISTRICT OFFICE
RESTROOM IMPROVEMENTS
WIRING DEVICES
262726 - 1
3.
4.
B.
Product Description: NEMA WD 1, Heavy-Duty, AC only general-use snap switch.
C.
Body and Handle: Ivory plastic with toggle handle.
D.
Indicator Light, Where Indicated: Separate pilot strap; red color lens.
E.
Locator Light: Lighted handle type switch.
F.
Ratings:
1.
2.
G.
H.
Voltage: 120-277 volts, AC.
Current: 20 amperes, unless otherwise noted.
Double Pole Switch:
1.
2.
Manufacturer shall be same as single pole switch, match type.
Substitutions: Not permitted.
Three-way Switch:
1.
2.
2.2
Leviton 4901 Series.
Substitutions: Section 016000 - Product Requirements.
Manufacturer shall be same as single pole switch, match type.
Substitutions: Not permitted.
RECEPTACLES
A.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers
offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to,
the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Hubbell 5362 series.
Bryant 5362 series.
Leviton 5362 series.
Substitutions: Section 016000 - Product Requirements.
B.
Product Description: NEMA WD 1, Heavy-duty general use receptacle.
C.
Device Body: Ivory plastic.
D.
Configuration: NEMA WD 6, type as indicated on Drawings.
E.
Convenience Receptacle: Type 5-20.
F.
GFCI Receptacle: Receptacle of the same quality as convenience receptacles with
integral ground fault circuit interrupter to meet regulatory requirements.
KIB DISTRICT OFFICE
RESTROOM IMPROVEMENTS
WIRING DEVICES
262726 - 2
2.3
WALL PLATES
A.
Manufacturers:
1.
2.
3.
4.
2.4
Hubbell.
Bryant.
Leviton.
Substitutions: Section 016000 - Product Requirements.
B.
Decorative Cover Plate: 302 stainless steel.
C.
Jumbo Cover Plate: 302 stainless steel.
D.
Weatherproof Cover Plate: Cast metal with hinged weatherproof while in use device
cover.
FLUSH-COVER-TYPE SINGLE OR MULTI-PURPOSE FLOOR BOXES
A. Manufacturers:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Wiremold.
Walker.
Hubbell.
FSR.
B.
Floor Boxes: NEMA OS 1, sheet or cast steel boxes 3 inches deep in multi-gang arrangements
where noted.
C.
Sheet or cast metal box with matching cover with access covers as indicated below.
D. Boxes shall allow adjustment before (up to 1-3/8 inch) and after (up to 1/2 inch) concrete
pour.
E.
2.5
Shape: Rectangular.
FLUSH-COVER-TYPE CONVENIENCE RECEPTACLE
A. Manufacturers:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Wiremold.
Walker.
Hubbell.
FSR.
B.
Material: Brass.
C.
Covers: Flanged brass cover with tile/carpet inserts in finished floor areas.
D. Configuration: Duplex flap opening.
KIB DISTRICT OFFICE
RESTROOM IMPROVEMENTS
WIRING DEVICES
262726 - 3
E.
2.6
May be combined in two or three gang assemblies where a multiple duplex communication
jacks are indicated on the drawings.
FLUSH-COVER-TYPE COMMUNICATION OUTLET
A. Manufacturers:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Wiremold.
Walker.
Hubbell.
FSR.
B.
Covers: Flanged brass cover with tile/carpet inserts in finished floor areas.
C.
Configuration: Duplex flap opening with mounting bracket to accept two Division 27
communication jacks. May be combined with duplex receptacles where noted.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1
3.2
EXAMINATION
A.
Section 013000 - Administrative Requirements: Coordination and project conditions.
B.
Verify outlet boxes are installed at proper height.
C.
Verify wall openings are neatly cut and completely covered by wall plates.
D.
Verify branch circuit wiring installation is completed, tested, and ready for connection to
wiring devices.
PREPARATION
A.
3.3
3.4
Clean debris from outlet boxes.
EXISTING WORK
A.
Disconnect and remove abandoned wiring devices.
B.
Modify installation to maintain access to existing wiring devices to remain active.
C.
Clean and repair existing wiring devices to remain or to be reinstalled.
INSTALLATION
A.
Install devices plumb and level.
B.
Install switches with OFF position down.
KIB DISTRICT OFFICE
RESTROOM IMPROVEMENTS
WIRING DEVICES
262726 - 4
3.5
3.6
C.
Install receptacles with grounding pole on bottom or right side where mounted
horizontally.
D.
Connect wiring device grounding terminal to outlet box with bonding jumper and branch
circuit equipment grounding conductor.
E.
Install wall plates on flush mounted switches, receptacles, and blank outlets.
F.
Install decorative plates on switch, receptacle, and blank outlets in finished areas.
G.
Connect wiring devices by wrapping solid conductor around screw terminal. Install
stranded conductor for branch circuits 10 AWG and smaller. When stranded conductors
are used in lieu of solid, use crimp on fork terminals for device terminations. Do not
place bare stranded conductors directly under device screws.
H.
Use jumbo size plates for outlets installed in masonry walls.
I.
Install galvanized steel plates on outlet boxes and junction boxes in unfinished areas,
above accessible ceilings, and on surface mounted outlets.
J.
Floor Box Requirements: Use cast floor boxes for installations in slab on grade; formed
steel boxes are acceptable for other installations.
K.
Set floor boxes level.
L.
Install boxes and fittings to preserve fire resistance rating of slabs and other elements,
using materials and methods specified in Division 07.
M.
Install blank cover plates for all unused power and/or communication gang positions in
floor boxes.
INTERFACE WITH OTHER PRODUCTS
A.
Coordinate locations of outlet boxes for wiring devices as indicated on drawings.
B.
Coordinate installation of wiring devices with floor box service fittings provided under
Section 260534.
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A.
Section 014000 - Quality Requirements and 017000 - Execution and Closeout
Requirements: Field inspecting, testing, adjusting, and balancing.
B.
Inspect each wiring device for defects.
C.
Operate each wall switch with circuit energized and verify proper operation.
D.
Verify each receptacle device is energized.
KIB DISTRICT OFFICE
RESTROOM IMPROVEMENTS
WIRING DEVICES
262726 - 5
3.7
3.8
E.
Test each receptacle device for proper polarity.
F.
Test each GFCI receptacle device for proper operation.
ADJUSTING
A.
Section 017000 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Testing, adjusting, and
balancing.
B.
Adjust devices and wall plates to be flush and level.
CLEANING
A.
Section 017000 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Final cleaning.
B.
Clean exposed surfaces to remove splatters and restore finish.
END OF SECTION 262726
KIB DISTRICT OFFICE
RESTROOM IMPROVEMENTS
WIRING DEVICES
262726 - 6
SECTION 262816 - ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
Section Includes:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
1.3
1.4
DEFINITIONS
A.
NC: Normally closed.
B.
NO: Normally open.
C.
SPDT: Single pole, double throw.
PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A.
Seismic Performance: Enclosed switches and circuit breakers shall withstand the effects
of earthquake motions determined according to ASCE/SEI 7.
1.
1.5
Fusible switches.
Non-fusible switches.
Receptacle switches.
Shunt trip switches.
Enclosed Molded-case circuit breakers (MCCBs).
Enclosed Molded-case switches.
The term "withstand" means "the unit will remain in place without separation of
any parts from the device when subjected to the seismic forces specified and the
unit will be fully operational after the seismic event."
SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each type of enclosed switch, circuit breaker, accessory, and
component indicated.
Include dimensioned elevations, sections, weights, and
manufacturers' technical data on features, performance, electrical characteristics, ratings,
accessories, and finishes.
1.
2.
Enclosure types and details shall include at a minimum.
Current and voltage ratings.
KIB DISTRICT OFFICE
RESTROOM IMPROVEMENTS
ENCLOSED SWITCHES
AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS
262 816 - 1
3.
4.
5.
6.
B.
Shop Drawings: For enclosed switches and circuit breakers. Include plans, elevations,
sections, details, and attachments to other work.
1.
Wiring Diagrams: For power, signal, and control wiring.
C.
Qualification Data: For qualified testing agency.
D.
Seismic Qualification Certificates: For enclosed switches and circuit breakers,
accessories, and components, from manufacturer.
1.
2.
3.
E.
F.
Basis for Certification: Indicate whether withstand certification is based on actual
test of assembled components or on calculation.
Dimensioned Outline Drawings of Equipment Unit: Identify center of gravity and
locate and describe mounting and anchorage provisions.
Detailed description of equipment anchorage devices on which the certification is
based and their installation requirements.
Field quality-control reports.
1.
2.
3.
1.6
Short-circuit current ratings (interrupting and withstand, as appropriate).
Include evidence of NRTL listing for series rating of installed devices.
Detail features, characteristics, ratings, and factory settings of individual
overcurrent protective devices, accessories, and auxiliary components.
Include time-current coordination curves (average melt) for each type and rating of
overcurrent protective device; include selectable ranges for each type of
overcurrent protective device.
Test procedures used.
Test results that comply with requirements.
Results of failed tests and corrective action taken to achieve test results that
comply with requirements.
Manufacturer's field service report.
CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A.
Operation and Maintenance Data: For enclosed switches and circuit breakers to include
in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. In addition to items specified in
Section 017823 "Operation and Maintenance Data," include the following:
1.
2.
Manufacturer's written instructions for testing and adjusting enclosed switches and
circuit breakers.
Time-current coordination curves (average melt) for each type and rating of
overcurrent protective device; include selectable ranges for each type of
overcurrent protective device.
KIB DISTRICT OFFICE
RESTROOM IMPROVEMENTS
ENCLOSED SWITCHES
AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS
262 816 - 2
1.7
MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS
A.
Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with
protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.
1.
2.
1.8
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Testing Agency Qualifications: Member company of NETA or an NRTL.
1.
1.9
Fuses: Equal to 10 percent of quantity installed for each size and type, but no
fewer than three of each size and type.
Fuse Pullers: Two for each size and type.
Testing Agency's Field Supervisor: Currently certified by NETA to supervise onsite testing.
B.
Source Limitations: Obtain enclosed switches and circuit breakers, overcurrent
protective devices, components, and accessories, within same product category, from
single source from single manufacturer.
C.
Product Selection for Restricted Space: Drawings indicate maximum dimensions for
enclosed switches and circuit breakers, including clearances between enclosures, and
adjacent surfaces and other items. Comply with indicated maximum dimensions.
D.
Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in
NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and
application.
E.
Comply with NFPA 70.
PROJECT CONDITIONS
A.
Environmental Limitations: Rate equipment for continuous operation under the
following conditions unless otherwise indicated:
1.
B.
Ambient Temperature: Not less than minus 22 deg F and not exceeding 104 deg F.
Interruption of Existing Electric Service: Do not interrupt electric service to facilities
occupied by Owner or others unless permitted under the following conditions and then
only after arranging to provide temporary electric service according to requirements
indicated:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Notify Owner no fewer than seven days in advance of proposed interruption of
electric service.
Indicate method of providing temporary electric service.
Do not proceed with interruption of electric service without Owner's written
permission.
Comply with NFPA 70E.
KIB DISTRICT OFFICE
RESTROOM IMPROVEMENTS
ENCLOSED SWITCHES
AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS
262 816 - 3
1.10
COORDINATION
A.
Coordinate layout and installation of switches, circuit breakers, and components with
equipment served and adjacent surfaces. Maintain required workspace clearances and
required clearances for equipment access doors and panels.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
FUSIBLE SWITCHES
A.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers
offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to,
the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
B.
Type HD, Heavy Duty, Single Throw, 240 or 600-V ac, 1200 A and Smaller: UL 98 and
NEMA KS 1, horsepower rated, with clips or bolt pads to accommodate indicated fuses,
lockable handle with capability to accept three padlocks, and interlocked with cover in
closed position.
C.
Type HD, Heavy Duty, Double Throw, 240 or 600-V ac, 1200 A and Smaller: UL 98
and NEMA KS 1, horsepower rated, with clips or bolt pads to accommodate indicated
fuses, lockable handle with capability to accept padlocks, and interlocked with cover in
closed position.
D.
Accessories:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
2.2
Eaton Electrical Inc.
General Electric Company.
Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc.
Square D.
Equipment Ground Kit: Internally mounted and labeled for copper ground
conductors.
Neutral Kit: Internally mounted; insulated, capable of being grounded and bonded;
labeled for copper neutral conductors.
Isolated Ground Kit: Internally mounted; insulated, capable of being grounded and
bonded; labeled for copper neutral conductors.
Class R Fuse Kit: Provides rejection of other fuse types when Class R fuses are
specified.
Auxiliary Contact Kit: One set NO/NC (Form "C") auxiliary contact(s), arranged
to activate before switch blades open.
Lugs: Mechanical type, suitable for number, size, and conductor material.
Service-Rated Switches: Labeled for use as service equipment.
NONFUSIBLE SWITCHES
A.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers
offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to,
the following]:
KIB DISTRICT OFFICE
RESTROOM IMPROVEMENTS
ENCLOSED SWITCHES
AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS
262 816 - 4
1.
2.
3.
4.
B.
Type HD, Heavy Duty, Single Throw, 240 or 600-V ac, 1200 A and Smaller: UL 98 and
NEMA KS 1, horsepower rated, lockable handle with capability to accept three padlocks,
and interlocked with cover in closed position.
C.
Type HD, Heavy Duty, Double Throw, 240 or 600-V ac, 1200 A and Smaller: UL 98
and NEMA KS 1, horsepower rated, lockable handle with capability to accept padlocks,
and interlocked with cover in closed position.
D.
Accessories:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
2.3
2.4
Eaton Electrical Inc.
General Electric Company.
Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc.
Square D.
Equipment Ground Kit: Internally mounted and labeled for copper ground
conductors.
Neutral Kit: Internally mounted; insulated, capable of being grounded and bonded;
labeled for copper neutral conductors.
Isolated Ground Kit: Internally mounted; insulated, capable of being grounded and
bonded; labeled for copper neutral conductors.
Auxiliary Contact Kit: One NO/NC (Form "C") auxiliary contact(s), arranged to
activate before switch blades open.
Lugs: Mechanical type, suitable for number, size, and conductor material.
MOLDED-CASE CIRCUIT BREAKERS
A.
Provide circuit breakers types and related accessories as indicated on the Drawings or
specified further below.
B.
General Requirements: Comply with UL 489, NEMA AB 1, and NEMA AB 3, with
interrupting capacity to comply with available fault currents.
C.
Refer to Section 262814 "Circuit Breakers".
MOLDED-CASE SWITCHES
A.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers
offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to,
the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
B.
Eaton Electrical Inc.
General Electric Company.
Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc.
Square D.
General Requirements: MCCB with fixed, high-set instantaneous trip only, and shortcircuit withstand rating equal to equivalent breaker frame size interrupting rating.
KIB DISTRICT OFFICE
RESTROOM IMPROVEMENTS
ENCLOSED SWITCHES
AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS
262 816 - 5
C.
Features and Accessories:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
2.5
Standard frame sizes and number of poles.
Lugs: Mechanical type, suitable for number, size, trip ratings, and conductor
material.
Shunt Trip: Trip coil energized from separate circuit, with coil-clearing contact.
Auxiliary Contacts (XC): One SPDT switch with "a" and "b" contacts; "a"
contacts mimic switch contacts, "b" contacts operate in reverse of switch contacts.
Accessory Control Power Voltage: Integrally mounted, self-powered120-V ac
unless indicated otherwise.
ENCLOSURES
A.
Enclosed Switches and Circuit Breakers: NEMA AB 1, NEMA KS 1, NEMA 250, and
UL 50, to comply with environmental conditions at installed location.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Indoor, Dry and Clean Locations: NEMA 250, Type 1.
Outdoor Locations: NEMA 250, Type 4X stainless steel.
Kitchen or Wash-Down Areas: NEMA 250, Type 4X, stainless steel.
Other Wet or Damp, Indoor Locations: NEMA 250, Type 4.
Indoor Locations Subject to Dust, Falling Dirt, and Dripping Noncorrosive
Liquids: NEMA 250, Type 12.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
3.2
EXAMINATION
A.
Examine elements and surfaces to receive enclosed switches and circuit breakers for
compliance with installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the
Work.
B.
Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
INSTALLATION
A.
Install individual wall-mounted switches and circuit breakers with tops at uniform height
unless otherwise indicated.
B.
Comply with mounting and anchoring requirements specified in Section 260548
"Vibration and Seismic Controls for Electrical Systems."
C.
Temporary Lifting Provisions: Remove temporary lifting eyes, channels, and brackets
and temporary blocking of moving parts from enclosures and components.
D.
Install fuses in fusible devices.
E.
Comply with NECA 1.
KIB DISTRICT OFFICE
RESTROOM IMPROVEMENTS
ENCLOSED SWITCHES
AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS
262 816 - 6
3.3
IDENTIFICATION
A.
Comply with requirements in Section 260553 "Identification for Electrical Systems."
1.
2.
3.4
Identify field-installed conductors, interconnecting wiring, and components;
provide warning signs.
Label each enclosure with engraved metal or laminated-plastic nameplate with the
following format:
Acronym (1/2 inch high)
Full Name (1/4 inch high)
Fed From (1/4 inch high)
Supplies (1/4 inch high)
System Voltage xxx/xxxVAC, xPH, xWIRE (1/4 inch high)
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A.
Perform tests and inspections.
B.
Acceptance Testing Preparation:
1.
2.
C.
Test insulation resistance for each enclosed switch and circuit breaker, component,
connecting supply, feeder, and control circuit.
Test continuity of each circuit.
Tests and Inspections:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Perform each visual and mechanical inspection and electrical test stated in
manufacturer’s instructions and NETA Acceptance Testing Specification. Certify
compliance with test parameters.
Correct malfunctioning units on-site, where possible, and retest to demonstrate
compliance; otherwise, replace with new units and retest.
Perform the following infrared scan tests and inspections and prepare reports:
a.
Initial Infrared Scanning: No more than 10 days before Substantial
Completion, or not more than 5 days after Substantial Completion, perform
an infrared scan of each enclosed switch and circuit breaker. Remove front
panels so joints and connections are accessible to portable scanner.
b.
Instruments and Equipment: Use an infrared scanning device designed to
measure temperature or to detect significant deviations from normal values.
Provide calibration record for device.
Test and adjust controls, remote monitoring, and safeties. Replace damaged and
malfunctioning controls and equipment.
D.
Enclosed switches and circuit breakers will be considered defective if they do not pass
tests and inspections.
E.
Prepare test and inspection reports, including a certified report that identifies enclosed
switches and circuit breakers and that describes scanning results. Include notation of
deficiencies detected, remedial action taken, and observations after remedial action.
KIB DISTRICT OFFICE
RESTROOM IMPROVEMENTS
ENCLOSED SWITCHES
AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS
262 816 - 7
3.5
ADJUSTING
A.
Adjust moving parts and operable components to function smoothly, and lubricate as
recommended by manufacturer.
B.
Set field-adjustable circuit-breaker trip ranges as specified in Section 260573
"Overcurrent Protective Device Coordination Study."
END OF SECTION 262816
KIB DISTRICT OFFICE
RESTROOM IMPROVEMENTS
ENCLOSED SWITCHES
AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS
262 816 - 8
SECTION 262913 - ENCLOSED CONTROLLERS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
Section includes the following enclosed controllers rated 600 V and less:
1.
2.
1.3
1.4
1.5
Full-voltage manual.
Full-voltage magnetic.
RELATED SECTION
A.
Section 019100, Commissioning.
B.
Division 23, Variable-Frequency Motor Controllers associated with fans and pumps.
DEFINITIONS
A.
CPT: Control power transformer.
B.
MCP: Motor circuit protector.
C.
N.C.: Normally closed.
D.
N.O.: Normally open.
E.
OCPD: Overcurrent protective device.
F.
SCR: Silicon-controlled rectifier.
PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A.
Seismic Performance: Enclosed controllers shall withstand the effects of earthquake motions determined according to ASCE/SEI 7.
1.
The term "withstand" means "the unit will remain in place without separation of
any parts from the device when subjected to the seismic forces specified and the
unit will be fully operational after the seismic event."
KIB DISTRICT OFFICE
RESTROOM IMPROVEMENTS
ENCLOSED CONTROLLERS
262913 - 1
1.6
SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each type of enclosed controller. Include manufacturer's technical data on features, performance, electrical characteristics, ratings, and enclosure types and
finishes.
B.
Shop Drawings: For each enclosed controller. Include dimensioned plans, elevations,
sections, details, and required clearances and service spaces around controller enclosures.
1.
2.
C.
Qualification Data: For qualified testing agency.
D.
Seismic Qualification Certificates: For enclosed controllers, accessories, and components, from manufacturer.
1.
2.
3.
1.7
Show tabulations of the following:
a.
Each installed unit's type and details.
b.
Factory-installed devices.
c.
Nameplate legends.
d.
Short-circuit current rating of integrated unit.
e.
Listed and labeled for integrated short-circuit current (withstand) rating
of OCPDs in combination controllers by an NRTL acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
f.
Features, characteristics, ratings, and factory settings of individual
OCPDs in combination controllers.
Wiring Diagrams: For power, signal, and control wiring.
Basis for Certification: Indicate whether withstand certification is based on actual test of assembled components or on calculation.
Dimensioned Outline Drawings of Equipment Unit: Identify center of gravity
and locate and describe mounting and anchorage provisions.
Detailed description of equipment anchorage devices on which the certification is
based and their installation requirements.
E.
Field quality-control reports.
F.
Load-Current and Overload-Relay Heater List: Compile after motors have been installed,
and arrange to demonstrate that selection of heaters suits actual motor nameplate full-load
currents.
G.
Load-Current and List of Settings of Adjustable Overload Relays: Compile after motors
have been installed, and arrange to demonstrate that switch settings for motor running
overload protection suit actual motors to be protected.
COMMISSIONING
A.
Provide pre-functional check and functional testing of equipment specified in this section
as part of Commissioning Process for the systems they control.
B.
Functional testing shall include thermal imaging of interior terminations and verification
of thermal overload and other safety devices.
KIB DISTRICT OFFICE
RESTROOM IMPROVEMENTS
ENCLOSED CONTROLLERS
262913 - 2
1.8
CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A.
Operation and Maintenance Data: For enclosed controllers to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. In addition to items specified in Section 017823 "Operation and Maintenance Data," include the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
1.9
MATERIALS MAINTENANCE
A.
Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.
1.
2.
3.
1.10
1.11
Routine maintenance requirements for enclosed controllers and installed components.
Manufacturer's written instructions for testing and adjusting circuit breaker and
MCP trip settings.
Manufacturer's written instructions for setting field-adjustable overload relays.
Manufacturer's written instructions for testing, adjusting, and reprogramming reduced-voltage solid-state controllers.
Fuses for Fused Switches: Equal to 10 percent of quantity installed for each size
and type, but no fewer than three of each size and type.
Control Power Fuses: Equal to 10 percent of quantity installed for each size and
type, but no fewer than two of each size and type.
Non-LED Indicating Lights: Two of each type and color installed.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in
NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.
B.
Comply with NFPA 70.
C.
IEEE Compliance: Fabricate and test enclosed controllers according to IEEE 344 to
withstand seismic forces defined in Section 260548 "Vibration and Seismic Controls for
Electrical Systems."
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A.
Store enclosed controllers indoors in clean, dry space with uniform temperature to prevent condensation. Protect enclosed controllers from exposure to dirt, fumes, water, corrosive substances, and physical damage.
B.
If stored in areas subject to weather, cover enclosed controllers to protect them from
weather, dirt, dust, corrosive substances, and physical damage. Remove loose packing
and flammable materials from inside controllers; connect factory-installed space heaters
to temporary electrical service.
KIB DISTRICT OFFICE
RESTROOM IMPROVEMENTS
ENCLOSED CONTROLLERS
262913 - 3
1.12
PROJECT CONDITIONS
A.
Environmental Limitations: Rate equipment for continuous operation under the following conditions unless otherwise indicated:
1.
2.
B.
Interruption of Existing Electrical Systems: Do not interrupt electrical systems in facilities occupied by Owner or others unless permitted under the following conditions and
then only after arranging to provide temporary electrical service according to requirements indicated:
1.
2.
3.
4.
1.13
Ambient Temperature, Circuit Breaker Equipment: Not less than 2 deg F and not
exceeding 104 deg F.
Ambient Temperature, Fused Equipment: Not less than minus 22 deg F and not
exceeding 104 deg F.
Notify Owner no fewer than 7 days in advance of proposed interruption of electrical systems.
Indicate method of providing temporary utilities.
Do not proceed with interruption of electrical systems without Owner’s written
permission.
Comply with NFPA 70E.
COORDINATION
A.
Coordinate layout and installation of enclosed controllers with other construction including conduit, piping, equipment, and adjacent surfaces. Maintain required workspace
clearances and required clearances for equipment access doors and panels.
B.
Coordinate sizes and locations of concrete bases with actual equipment provided. Cast
anchor-bolt inserts into bases. Concrete, reinforcement, and formwork requirements are
specified with concrete.
C.
Coordinate installation of roof curbs, equipment supports, and roof penetrations.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1
FULL-VOLTAGE CONTROLLERS
A.
General Requirements for Full-Voltage Controllers: Comply with NEMA ICS 2, general
purpose, Class A.
B.
Motor-Starting Switches, without Overload Protection: "Quick-make, quick-break" toggle or push-button action; marked to show whether unit is off or on.
1.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not
limited to, the following:
a.
With pilot light
KIB DISTRICT OFFICE
RESTROOM IMPROVEMENTS
ENCLOSED CONTROLLERS
262913 - 4
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
C.
1)
Square D.
2)
Eaton Electrical Inc.
3)
General Electric Company.
4)
Rockwell Automation, Inc.
5)
Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc.
b.
Snap-switch style without pilot light:
1)
Hubbell
2)
Leviton
3)
Pass & Seymour
Configuration: Non-reversing unless otherwise indicated.
First option in first subparagraph below is available only with NEMA 250,
Type 1 enclosures but not from all listed manufacturers. Consult manufacturers
for availability of flush enclosures and finishes for flush cover plates because
each manufacturer offers different types.
Flush or Surface mounting.
Not all manufacturers offer a green pilot light; pilot lights are not available in
hazardous and some cast-type enclosures.
Red pilot light, illuminated when the switch is in the ON position.
Handle Guard/Lock-Off: Accepts padlock.
Additional Nameplates as required: FORWARD and REVERSE for reversing
switches, HIGH and LOW for two-speed switches, etc.
Manual Controllers, with Overload Protection; Fractional and Integral Horsepower:
"Quick-make, quick-break" toggle or push-button action; marked to show whether unit is
off, on, or tripped.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the
following:
a.
Square D.
1)
Class 2510 or 2512, Type F, for Fractional Horsepower.
2)
Class 2510, 2511 or 2512, Types M and T, for Integral Horsepower.
Comparable Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the
above or comparable product by one of the following:
a.
Eaton Electrical Inc.
b.
General Electric Company.
c.
Rockwell Automation, Inc.
d.
Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc.
Configuration: Non-reversing unless otherwise indicated.
Overload Relays: Inverse-time-current characteristics; NEMA ICS 2, Class 10
tripping characteristics; heaters and sensors in each phase, matched to nameplate
full-load current of actual protected motor and having appropriate adjustment for
duty cycle; external reset push button; bimetallic type or melting alloy type.
Flush or Surface mounting.
Red pilot light, illuminated when the controller is ON.
Handle Guard/Lock-Off, Fractional Horsepower: Accepts padlock.
Lock-Off Mechanism, Integral Horsepower: Accepts padlock.
Additional Nameplates as required: FORWARD and REVERSE for reversing
controllers, HIGH and LOW for two-speed controllers, RESET for overload reset
push button, etc.
KIB DISTRICT OFFICE
RESTROOM IMPROVEMENTS
ENCLOSED CONTROLLERS
262913 - 5
10.
D.
Magnetic Controllers: Full voltage, across the line, electrically held.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
7.
8.
9.
E.
Provide one N.O. and one N.C. auxiliary contact on all Integral Horsepower Controllers.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not
limited to, the following:
a.
Eaton Electrical Inc.
b.
General Electric Company.
c.
Rockwell Automation, Inc.
d.
Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc.
e.
Square D.
Configuration: Non-reversing, unless indicated otherwise.
Contactor Coils: Pressure-encapsulated type.
a.
Operating Voltage: Depending on contactor NEMA size and linevoltage rating, manufacturer's standard matching control power or line
voltage.
Power Contacts: Totally enclosed, double-break, silver-cadmium oxide; assembled to allow inspection and replacement without disturbing line or load wiring.
Control Circuits: 120-V ac unless otherwise indicated; obtained from integral
CPT, with primary and secondary fuses or line input for units controlling 120
volt single phase motors. Control circuit capacity to operate integral devices and
remotely located pilot, indicating, and control devices.
a.
CPT Spare Capacity: 50 VA minimum.
b.
Melting Alloy Overload Relays:
c.
Inverse-time-current characteristic.
d.
Class 20 tripping characteristic unless required otherwise for application.
e.
Heaters in each phase matched to nameplate full-load current of actual
protected motor and with appropriate adjustment for duty cycle.
Solid State Overload Relay:
a.
Switch or dial selectable for motor running overload protection.
b.
Sensors in each phase.
c.
Class 10/20 selectable tripping characteristic selected to protect motor
against voltage and current unbalance and single phasing.
d.
Class II ground-fault protection, with start and run delays to prevent nuisance trip on starting.
Isolated overload alarm contact, closes when relay is tripped.
External overload reset push button.
Combination Magnetic Controller: Factory-assembled combination of magnetic controller, OCPD, and disconnecting means.
1.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not
limited to, the following:
a.
Eaton Electrical Inc.
b.
General Electric Company.
c.
Rockwell Automation, Inc.
d.
Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc.
KIB DISTRICT OFFICE
RESTROOM IMPROVEMENTS
ENCLOSED CONTROLLERS
262913 - 6
2.
3.
4.
2.4
ENCLOSURES
A.
Enclosed Controllers: NEMA ICS 6, to comply with environmental conditions at installed location.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
2.5
e.
Square D.
Fusible Disconnecting Means:
a.
NEMA KS 1, heavy-duty, horsepower-rated, fusible switch with clips or
bolt pads to accommodate Class R fuses.
b.
Lockable Handle: Accepts padlocks and interlocks with cover in closed
position.
Auxiliary Contacts: N.O./N.C., arranged to activate before switch blades open.
MCP Disconnecting Means:
a.
UL 489, NEMA AB 1, and NEMA AB 3, with interrupting capacity to
comply with available fault currents, instantaneous-only circuit breaker
with front-mounted, field-adjustable, short-circuit trip coordinated with
motor locked-rotor amperes.
b.
Lockable Handle: Accepts padlocks and interlocks with cover in closed
position.
c.
Auxiliary contacts "a" and "b" arranged to activate with MCP handle.
Dry and Clean Indoor Locations: Type 1.
Outdoor Locations: Type 4X stainless steel unless otherwise indicated.
Kitchen and Wash-Down Areas: Type 4X, stainless steel.
Other Wet or Damp Indoor Locations: Type 4.
Indoor Locations Subject to Dust, Falling Dirt, and Dripping Noncorrosive Liquids: Type 12.
ACCESSORIES
A.
General Requirements for Control Circuit and Pilot Devices: NEMA ICS 5; factory installed in controller enclosure cover unless otherwise indicated.
1.
Push Buttons, Pilot Lights, and Selector Switches: Heavy-duty, oiltight type.
a.
Push Buttons: Recessed types; momentary as indicated.
b.
Pilot Lights: LED types; colors as indicated.
c.
Selector Switches: Rotary type.
B.
Control Relays: Auxiliary and adjustable solid-state time-delay relays.
C.
Phase-Failure, Phase-Reversal, and Undervoltage and Overvoltage Relays: Solid-state
sensing circuit with isolated output contacts for hard-wired connections. Provide adjustable undervoltage, overvoltage, and time-delay settings.
D.
Breather and drain assemblies, to maintain interior pressure and release condensation in
Type 4, or Type 4X enclosures installed outdoors, in kitchens and wash down areas or in
unconditioned interior spaces subject to humidity and temperature swings.
KIB DISTRICT OFFICE
RESTROOM IMPROVEMENTS
ENCLOSED CONTROLLERS
262913 - 7
E.
Space heaters, with N.C. auxiliary contacts, to mitigate condensation in Type 4X or
Type 12 enclosures installed outdoors or in unconditioned interior spaces subject to humidity and temperature swings.
F.
Cover gaskets for Type 1 enclosures in dusty areas.
G.
Terminals for connecting power factor correction capacitors to the line side of overload
relays.
H.
Control wiring terminal blocks; factory wired to components in the controller.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1
3.2
EXAMINATION
A.
Examine areas and surfaces to receive enclosed controllers, with Installer present, for
compliance with requirements and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.
B.
Examine enclosed controllers before installation. Reject enclosed controllers that are
wet, moisture damaged, or mold damaged.
C.
Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
INSTALLATION
A.
Wall-Mounted Controllers: Install enclosed controllers on walls with tops at uniform
height unless otherwise indicated, and by bolting units to wall or mounting on lightweight
structural-steel channels bolted to wall. For controllers not at walls, provide freestanding
racks complying with Section 260529 "Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems."
B.
Install anchor bolts to elevations required for proper attachment to supported equipment.
C.
Seismic Bracing: Comply with requirements specified in Section 260548 "Vibration and
Seismic Controls for Electrical Systems."
D.
Temporary Lifting Provisions: Remove temporary lifting eyes, channels, and brackets
and temporary blocking of moving parts from enclosures and components.
E.
Install fuses in each fusible-switch enclosed controller.
F.
Install fuses in control circuits if not factory installed.
G.
Install heaters in thermal overload relays. Select heaters based on actual nameplate fullload amperes after motors have been installed.
H.
Install, connect, and fuse thermal-protector monitoring relays furnished with motordriven equipment.
I.
Install power factor correction capacitors. Connect to the line side of overload relays.
KIB DISTRICT OFFICE
RESTROOM IMPROVEMENTS
ENCLOSED CONTROLLERS
262913 - 8
J.
3.3
Comply with NECA 1.
IDENTIFICATION
A.
Identify enclosed controllers, components, and control wiring. Comply with requirements for identification specified in Section 260553 "Identification for Electrical Systems."
1.
2.
Identify field-installed conductors, interconnecting wiring, and components; provide warning signs.
Label each enclosure with nameplate with the following format:
Acronym (1 inch high)
Full Name (1/4 inch high)
Fed From (1/4 inch high)
System Voltage xxx/xxxVAC, xPH, xWIRE (1/4 inch high)
3.
3.4
CONTROL WIRING INSTALLATION
A.
Install wiring between enclosed controllers and remote devices.
B.
Bundle, train, and support wiring in enclosures.
C.
Connect selector switches and other automatic-control selection devices where applicable.
1.
2.
3.5
Label each enclosure.
Connect selector switches to bypass only those manual- and automatic-control
devices that have no safety functions when switch is in manual-control position.
Connect selector switches with enclosed-controller circuit in both manual and automatic positions for safety-type control devices such as Fire Alarm shutdown,
low- and high-pressure cutouts, high-temperature cutouts, and motor overload
protectors.
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A.
Perform tests and inspections.
1.
B.
Acceptance Testing Preparation:
1.
C.
Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative
to inspect components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections, and to assist in testing.
Test continuity of each circuit.
Tests and Inspections:
KIB DISTRICT OFFICE
RESTROOM IMPROVEMENTS
ENCLOSED CONTROLLERS
262913 - 9
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
3.6
Inspect controllers, wiring, components, connections, and equipment installation. Test and adjust controllers, components, and equipment.
Test insulation resistance for each enclosed-controller element, component, connecting motor supply, feeder, and control circuits.
Test continuity of each circuit.
Verify that voltages at controller locations are within plus or minus 10 percent of
motor nameplate rated voltages. If outside this range for any motor, notify Owner before starting the motor(s).
Test each motor for proper phase rotation.
Perform each electrical test and visual and mechanical inspection stated in
NETA Acceptance Testing Specification. Certify compliance with test parameters.
Correct malfunctioning units on-site, where possible, and retest to demonstrate
compliance; otherwise, replace with new units and retest.
Perform the following infrared (thermographic) scan tests and inspections and
prepare reports:
a.
Initial Infrared Scanning: No more than 10 days before Substantial
Completion, or not more than 5 days after Substantial Completion, perform an infrared scan of each enclosed switch and circuit breaker. Remove front panels so joints and connections are accessible to portable
scanner.
b.
Instruments and Equipment: Use an infrared scanning device designed
to measure temperature or to detect significant deviations from normal
values. Provide calibration record for device.
Test and adjust controls, remote monitoring, and safeties. Replace damaged and
malfunctioning controls and equipment.
D.
Enclosed controllers will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections.
E.
Prepare test and inspection reports including a certified report that identifies enclosed
controllers and that describes scanning results. Include notation of deficiencies detected,
remedial action taken and observations after remedial action.
ADJUSTING
A.
Set field-adjustable switches, auxiliary relays, time-delay relays, timers, and overloadrelay pickup and trip ranges.
B.
Adjust overload-relay heaters or settings if power factor correction capacitors are connected to the load side of the overload relays.
C.
Adjust the trip settings of MCPs and thermal-magnetic circuit breakers with adjustable
instantaneous trip elements.
Initially adjust to six times the motor nameplate full-load ampere ratings and attempt to
start motors several times, allowing for motor cooldown between starts. If tripping occurs on motor inrush, adjust settings in increments until motors start without tripping. Do
not exceed eight times the motor full-load amperes (or 11 times for NEMA Premium Efficient motors if required). Where these maximum settings do not allow starting of a motor, notify Construction Manager before increasing settings.
KIB DISTRICT OFFICE
RESTROOM IMPROVEMENTS
ENCLOSED CONTROLLERS
262913 - 10
3.7
3.8
D.
Set field-adjustable switches and program microprocessors for required start and stop sequences in reduced-voltage solid-state controllers.
E.
Set field-adjustable circuit-breaker trip ranges as indicated.
PROTECTION
A.
Temporary Heating: Apply temporary heat to maintain temperature according to manufacturer's written instructions until enclosed controllers are ready to be energized and
placed into service.
B.
Replace controllers whose interiors have been exposed to water or other liquids prior to
Substantial Completion.
DEMONSTRATION
A.
Train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain enclosed controllers, and to use and reprogram microprocessor-based, reduced-voltage solid-state controllers.
END OF SECTION 262913
KIB DISTRICT OFFICE
RESTROOM IMPROVEMENTS
ENCLOSED CONTROLLERS
262913 - 11
[This page intentionally left blank.]
KIB DISTRICT OFFICE
RESTROOM IMPROVEMENTS
ENCLOSED CONTROLLERS
262913 - 12
SECTION 265100 - INTERIOR LIGHTING
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
Section Includes:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
B.
Interior lighting fixtures, ballasts, and lamps.
Exit signs.
Emergency power supply unit.
Emergency Relay.
Lighting fixture supports.
Related Sections:
1. Section 260923 – Lighting Control Devices.
2. Section 262726 – Wiring Devices.
3. Section 260943 – Network Lighting Controls.
1.3
1.4
DEFINITIONS
A.
BF: Ballast factor.
B.
CCT: Correlated color temperature.
C.
CRI: Color-rendering index.
D.
LER: Luminaire efficacy rating.
E.
Lumen: Measured output of lamp and luminaire, or both.
F.
Luminaire: Complete lighting fixture, including ballast housing if provided.
SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each type of lighting fixture, arranged in order of fixture designation,
Emergency Power Supply, Emergency Relay, and Lighting Fixture Supports. Include
data on features, accessories, finishes, and the following:
1. Physical description of including dimensions.
2. Emergency lighting units including battery and charger.
KIB DISTRICT OFFICE
RESTROOM IMPROVEMENTS
INTERIOR LIGHTING
265100 - 1
3.
4.
5.
6.
Ballast, including BF.
Energy-efficiency data.
Life, output (lumens, CCT, and CRI), and energy-efficiency data for lamps.
Photometric data and adjustment factors based on laboratory tests, complying with
IESNA Lighting Measurements Testing & Calculation Guides, of each lighting
fixture type. The adjustment factors shall be for lamps, ballasts, and accessories
identical to those indicated for the lighting fixture as applied in this Project.
7. Manufacturer Certified Data: Photometric data shall be certified by a manufacturer's
laboratory with a current accreditation under the National Voluntary Laboratory
Accreditation Program for Energy Efficient Lighting Products.
8. Certify LED Fixtures are tested to in accordance with IESNA LM-79 and LM-80.
B.
Shop Drawings: For Emergency Power Supply and nonstandard or custom lighting
fixtures. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work.
1. Detail equipment assemblies and indicate dimensions, weights, loads, required
clearances, method of field assembly, components, and location and size of each field
connection.
2. Wiring Diagrams: For power, signal, and control wiring.
1.5
C.
Installation instructions.
D.
Qualification Data: For qualified agencies providing photometric data for lighting
fixtures.
E.
Product Certificates: For each type of ballast for dimmer-controlled fixtures, from
manufacturer.
CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A.
Operation and Maintenance Data: Emergency Power Supply, Emergency Relay,
Lighting Fixtures, Ballasts, Lamps, Exit Signs, equipment and accessories shall be
included in operation, and maintenance manuals.
1. Provide a list of all lamp types used on Project; use manufacturers' codes in
Operation and Maintenance Manuals.
1.6
MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS
A.
Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with
protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.
1. Lamps: 5 for every 100 of each type and rating installed. Furnish at least one of
each type.
2. Ballasts: One for every 100 of each type and rating installed. Furnish at least one of
each type.
KIB DISTRICT OFFICE
RESTROOM IMPROVEMENTS
INTERIOR LIGHTING
265100 - 2
1.7
1.8
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Luminaire Photometric Data Testing Laboratory Qualifications: Provided by
manufacturers' laboratories that are accredited under the National Volunteer Laboratory
Accreditation Program for Energy Efficient Lighting Products.
B.
Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in
NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and
application.
C.
Comply with NFPA 70 National Electrical Code (NEC), latest adopted edition.
D.
FM Global Compliance: Lighting fixtures for hazardous locations shall be listed and
labeled for indicated class and division of hazard by FM Global.
COORDINATION
A.
1.9
Coordinate layout and installation of lighting fixtures and suspension system with other
construction that penetrates ceilings or is supported by them, including HVAC
equipment, fire-suppression system, and partition assemblies.
WARRANTY
A.
Special Warranty for Emergency Power Supply and integral fixture mounted emergency
power supply: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer of Emergency
Power Supply agrees to repair or replace components and batteries that fail in materials
or workmanship within specified warranty period.
1.
Warranty Period for Emergency Power Supply: 5 years from date of Substantial
Completion. Full warranty shall apply for first year, and prorated warranty for the
remaining four years.
2.
Warranty Period for Emergency Fluorescent Ballast and Self-Powered Exit Sign
Batteries: 5 years from date of Substantial Completion. Full warranty shall apply
for first year, and prorated warranty for the remaining 4 years.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MANUFACTURERS
A.
Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be
incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, product(s) indicated on
Drawings.
KIB DISTRICT OFFICE
RESTROOM IMPROVEMENTS
INTERIOR LIGHTING
265100 - 3
2.2
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR LIGHTING FIXTURES AND COMPONENTS
A.
Recessed Fixtures: Comply with NEMA LE 4 for ceiling compatibility for recessed
fixtures.
B.
Fluorescent Fixtures: Comply with UL 1598. Where LER is specified, test according to
NEMA LE 5 and NEMA LE 5A as applicable.
C.
Metal Parts: Free of burrs and sharp corners and edges.
D.
Sheet Metal Components: Steel unless otherwise indicated. Form and support to prevent
warping and sagging.
E.
Doors, Frames, and Other Internal Access: Smooth operating, free of light leakage under
operating conditions, and designed to permit relamping without use of tools. Designed to
prevent doors, frames, lenses, diffusers, and other components from falling accidentally
during re-lamping and when secured in operating position.
F.
Diffusers and Globes:
1. Acrylic Lighting Diffusers: 100 percent virgin acrylic plastic. High resistance to
yellowing and other changes due to aging, exposure to heat, and UV radiation.
a.
Lens Thickness: At least 0.125 inch minimum unless otherwise indicated.
b.
UV stabilized.
2. Glass: Annealed crystal glass unless otherwise indicated.
G.
Factory-Applied Labels: Comply with UL 1598. Include recommended lamps and
ballasts. Labels shall be located where they will be readily visible to service personnel,
but not seen from normal viewing angles when lamps are in place.
1. Label shall include the following lamp and ballast characteristics:
a.
"USE ONLY" and include specific lamp type.
b.
Lamp type, wattage, bulb type (ED17, BD56, etc.) and coating (clear or
coated) for HID luminaires.
c.
Start type (Programmed Rapid Start, unless other indicated in the Schedule
on the Drawings) for fluorescent and compact fluorescent luminaires.
d.
ANSI ballast type (M98, M57, etc.) for HID luminaires.
e.
CCT and CRI for all luminaires.
2.3
BALLASTS FOR LINEAR FLUORESCENT LAMPS
A.
General Requirements for Electronic Ballasts:
1. Comply with UL 935 and with ANSI C82.11.
2. Designed for type and quantity of lamps served.
3. Ballasts shall be designed for full light output unless another BF, dimmer, or bi-level
control is indicated.
4. Sound Rating: Class A.
5. Total Harmonic Distortion Rating: Less than 10 percent.
KIB DISTRICT OFFICE
RESTROOM IMPROVEMENTS
INTERIOR LIGHTING
265100 - 4
6. Transient Voltage Protection: IEEE C62.41.1 and IEEE C62.41.2, Category A or
better.
7. Operating Frequency: 42 kHz or higher.
8. Lamp Current Crest Factor: 1.7 or less.
9. BF: 0.88 or higher.
10. Power Factor: 0.98 or higher.
11. Parallel Lamp Circuits: Multiple lamp ballasts shall comply with ANSI C82.11 and
shall be connected to maintain full light output on surviving lamps if one or more
lamps fail.
B.
Luminaires controlled by occupancy sensors shall have programmed-start ballasts.
C.
Electronic Programmed-Start Ballasts: Comply with ANSI C82.11 and the following:
D.
Ballasts for Dimmer-Controlled Lighting Fixtures: Electronic type.
1. Dimming Range: 100 to 1 percent of rated lamp lumens.
2. Ballast Input Watts: Can be reduced to 20 percent of normal.
3. Compatibility: Certified by manufacturer for use with specific dimming control
system and lamp type indicated.
4. Control: Coordinate wiring from ballast to control device to ensure that the ballast,
controller, and connecting wiring are compatible.
2.4
2.5
LED DRIVERS
A.
Description: As supplied with luminaire.
B.
Provide driver suitable for control means shown in sequence of operation on Drawings.
C.
Voltage: As shown in Schedule on Drawings.
FLUORESCENT LAMPS
A.
T8 rapid-start lamps, as indicated in schedule on Drawings.
B.
T5HO rapid-start, high-output lamps:
1. Basis of design Sylvania HO XL Ecologic; Model FP54/800/HO/XL/ECO, or
approved equal.
2. Low mercury, Toxicity Characteristic Leaching Procedure (TCLP) and reduction of
Hazardous Substance Directive (RoHS) compliant.
C.
2.6
Compact Fluorescent Lamps: as indicated in schedule on Drawings.
EMERGENCY POWER SUPPLY
A.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers
offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to,
the following:
KIB DISTRICT OFFICE
RESTROOM IMPROVEMENTS
INTERIOR LIGHTING
265100 - 5
1. Lithonia Lighting.
B.
Product Description: Fast Transfer AC Inverter Power System with the following
features:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
2.7
2.8
Solid state pulse width modulated.
Sinusoidal output waveform.
Input: 480Y/277 volt, 3-phase, 4-wire.
Output: 480Y/277 volt, 3-phase, 4-wire.
Free standing inverter and battery cabinets.
C.
Inverter for Service One Area: Model EAC NC 3FT 12500 277-480 OB8 OTA NOFF
MODEM, with 8 each 20A single-pole Circuit Breakers
D.
Inverter for Service Two Area: Model EAC NC 3FT 40000 277-480 OB2 OTA NOFF
MODEM, with 1 each 30A, three-pole and 1 each 40A, three-pole Circuit Breakers
EMERGENCY RELAY
A.
Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by
The Bodine Company.
B.
Description: Emergency Transfer Device shall allow emergency lights to be switched
without blocking life safety function in the event of normal power failure. The device
shall sense loss of normal power and switch the connected ballasts and/or lamps input
power to an unswitched, emergency power source. The device shall include all
components in a single factory enclosure. Mounted in the fixture enclosure, or remotely
in the vicinity of connected fixture(s).
LIGHTING FIXTURE SUPPORT COMPONENTS
A.
Comply with Section 260529 Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems for channeland angle-iron supports and nonmetallic channel and angle supports.
B.
Single-Stem Hangers: 1/2-inch steel tubing with swivel ball fittings and ceiling canopy.
Finish same as fixture.
C.
Twin-Stem Hangers: Two, 1/2-inch steel tubes with single canopy designed to mount a
single fixture. Finish same as fixture.
D.
Wires: ASTM A 641/A 641M, Class 3, soft temper, zinc-coated steel, 12 gauge.
E.
Wires for Humid Spaces: ASTM A 580/A 580M, Composition 302 or 304, annealed
stainless steel, 12 gauge.
F.
Rod Hangers: 3/16-inchminimum diameter, cadmium-plated, threaded steel rod.
G.
Hook Hangers: Integrated assembly matched to fixture and line voltage and equipped
with threaded attachment, cord, and locking-type plug.
KIB DISTRICT OFFICE
RESTROOM IMPROVEMENTS
INTERIOR LIGHTING
265100 - 6
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION
A.
Lighting fixtures:
1. Set level, plumb, and square with ceilings and walls unless otherwise indicated.
2. Install lamps in each luminaire.
B.
Temporary Lighting: Do not use permanent luminaires for temporary lighting
C.
Remote Mounting of Ballasts and LED Drivers: Distance between the ballast and fixture
or LED driver and fixture shall not exceed that recommended by ballast or inverter
manufacturer. Verify, with manufacturers, maximum distance between ballast or LED
driver and luminaire.
D.
Lay-in Ceiling Lighting Fixtures Supports: Use grid as a support element.
1. Install ceiling support system rods or wires for each fixture to comply with CISCA 34. Locate not more than 3 inches from lighting fixture corners.
2. Support Clips: Fasten to lighting fixtures and to ceiling grid members at or near each
fixture corner with clips that are UL listed for the application.
3. Fixtures of Sizes Less Than Ceiling Grid: Install as indicated on reflected ceiling
plans or center in acoustical panel, and support fixtures independently with at least
two 3/4-inchmetal channels spanning and secured to ceiling tees.
4. Install at least two independent support rods or No. 12 gauge minimum wires from
structure to tabs on opposing corners of lighting fixture. Wire or rod shall have
breaking strength of the weight of fixture at a safety factor of 3.
E.
Suspended Lighting Fixture Support:
1. Pendants and Rods: Where longer than 48 inches brace to limit swinging.
2. Stem-Mounted, Single-Unit Fixtures: Suspend with twin-stem hangers.
3. Continuous Rows: Use tubing or stem for wiring at one point and tubing or rod for
suspension for each unit length of fixture chassis, including one at each end.
4. Do not use grid as support for pendant luminaires. Connect support wires or rods to
building structure.
F.
Connect wiring according to Section 260519 Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors
and Cables.
KIB DISTRICT OFFICE
RESTROOM IMPROVEMENTS
INTERIOR LIGHTING
265100 - 7
3.2
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A.
3.3
STARTUP SERVICE
A.
3.4
Test for Emergency Lighting: Interrupt power supply to demonstrate proper operation.
Verify transfer from normal power to battery and retransfer to normal.
Burn-in all lamps that require specific aging period to operate properly, prior to
occupancy by Owner. Burn-in fluorescent and compact fluorescent lamps intended to be
dimmed, for at least 100 hours at full voltage.
ADJUSTING
A.
Occupancy Adjustments: Within 12 months of date of Substantial Completion, provide
on-site assistance in adjusting aimable luminaires to suit actual occupied conditions.
Provide up to two visits to Project during normal occupancy hours for this purpose.
Some of this work may be required after dark.
1. Adjust aimable luminaires in the presence of Owner’s designated personnel.
END OF SECTION 265100
[This page intentionally left blank.]
KIB DISTRICT OFFICE
RESTROOM IMPROVEMENTS
INTERIOR LIGHTING
265100 - 8
SECTION 270526 - GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
Section Includes:
1.
2.
3.
1.2
RELATED SECTIONS:
A.
1.3
Section 260526 - Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems.
REFERENCES
A.
Building Industry Consulting Service International, Inc.
1.
B.
C.
TIA/EIA 607 - Commercial Building Grounding and Bonding Requirements for
Telecommunications.
Underwriters Laboratory.
1.
UL 467 – Grounding and Bonding Equipment
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A.
Communications grounding systems use the following elements as grounding electrodes:
1.
B.
Building grounding electrode.
Do not use the following elements as grounding electrodes:
1.
2.
1.5
NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code.
Telecommunication Industry Association/Electronic Industries Alliance:
1.
D.
BICSI TDM Manual - Telecommunications Distribution Methods Manual.
National Fire Protection Association:
1.
1.4
Wire.
Mechanical connectors.
Exothermic connections.
Building plumbing system.
Transformer grounding points.
PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A.
Grounding System Resistance: 25 ohms maximum.
KIB DISTRICT OFFICE
RESTROOM IMPROVEMENTS
GROUNDING AND BONDING
FOR COMM SYSTEMS
270526 - 1
1.6
SUBMITTALS
A.
Section 013300 - Submittal Procedures: Requirements for submittals.
B.
Product Data: Submit data on grounding electrodes and connections.
1.
2.
3.
1.7
1.8
CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A.
Section 017000 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Requirements for submittals.
B.
Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of components and grounding
electrodes.
C.
Test Reports: Indicate overall resistance to ground between main grounding bar and
building electrode connection.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
1.9
1.10
Wire.
Mechanical Connectors.
Ground Bus Bars.
Provide grounding, surge protection and lightning protection of telecommunications
system in accordance with latest version of Grounding, Bonding and Electrical Protection
chapter of the BICSI TDM Manual, TIA/EIA 607, and NFPA 70.
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A.
Section 016000 - Product Requirements: Requirements for transporting, handling,
storing, and protecting products.
B.
Accept materials on site in original factory packaging, labeled with manufacturer's
identification.
C.
Protect from weather and construction traffic, dirt, water, chemical, and mechanical
damage, by storing in original packaging.
COORDINATION
A.
Section 013000 - Administrative Requirements: Requirements for coordination.
B.
Complete grounding and bonding of building reinforcing steel prior concrete placement.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1
WIRE
A.
Conductor Material: Stranded copper.
KIB DISTRICT OFFICE
RESTROOM IMPROVEMENTS
GROUNDING AND BONDING
FOR COMM SYSTEMS
270526 - 2
B.
Insulation : Type XHHW or XHHW-2
1.
2.
3.
2.2
C.
Grounding Conductor: Copper conductor - bare.
D.
Bonding Conductors: Copper conductor – insulated.
MECHANICAL CONNECTORS
A.
Manufacturers:
1.
2.
3.
4.
B.
Apache Grounding/Erico Inc.
Erico, Inc.
O-Z Gedney Co.
Thomas & Betts, Electrical
Description:
1.
2.
3.
2.3
Green for sizes 14 AWG through 2 AWG.
Black with green marking for sizes above 2 AWG.
Reference Section 260519 Low Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables
for additional requirements.
Non-reversible compression connectors, suitable for grounding and bonding
applications, in configurations required for particular installation.
Bronze connectors, suitable for grounding and bonding applications, in
configurations required for particular installation.
Bonding bushings with jumpers, ground clamps, lugs connectors at ends of
sleeve penetrations and backbone conduits.
TELECOMMUNICATIONS GROUNDING BUS BARS
A.
Description: Nominal 2” x 18” or 2” x 24” grounding bar 1/4 inch thick bare copper,
predrilled with insulated standoff spacers, unless otherwise noted.
B.
Manufacturers:
1.
2.
3.
C.
Telecommunications Grounding Busbar (TGB):
1.
2.
D.
Erico, Inc.
B-Line.
Hargar.
Located in each Distribution Service Area Telecom Room
Minimum size: 2-inch x 18-inch
Telecommunications Main Grounding Busbar (TMGB):
1.
2.
Located in Main Telecommunications Room
Minimum 2-inch x 24-inch
KIB DISTRICT OFFICE
RESTROOM IMPROVEMENTS
GROUNDING AND BONDING
FOR COMM SYSTEMS
270526 - 3
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1
PREPARATION
A.
3.2
Remove surface contaminants at connection points.
INSTALLATION
A.
Install in accordance with BICSI TDM Manual, and TIA/EIA 607.
B.
Install grounding and bonding conductors concealed from view or routed neatly along the
edge of ladder or basket cable tray or backboards. Secure grounding and bonding
conductors to ladder or basket cable trays and backboards using cable ties at intervals not
exceeding 24-inches. Use screw-ring type cable ties to secure to backboards or other
surfaces. “Sticky-back” cable tie mounts are not allowed.
C.
Install grounding for each rack, cabinet or equipment using a minimum 4 AWG insulated
copper stranded conductor, to the communication grounding bus bar located in the
communications room.
D.
Bond main telecommunications grounding system to building grounding electrode
system at main electrical service entrance location with a 1/0 AWG insulated copper
stranded conductor.
E.
Route grounding conductors as short and direct as practicable, but parallel or
perpendicular to building lines in all cases. Route grounding and bonding conductors
with telecom pathways to the extent possible.
F.
Install bonding conductors continuous from end to end (e.g., from TGB in remote
Telecom Rooms to TMGB in Main Telecommunications Room; or from telecom
equipment rack to TGB). Splices are not allowed.
G.
Install bonding connections with Listed bolts, crimp pressure connectors, clamps, or lugs.
Exothermic welding may be used.
H.
Provide dedicated TGB for each telecommunications room, directly bonded with 2 AWG
copper conductor to the TMGB in the Main Telecom Room.
I.
Position busbars near associated equipment on isolated supports.
J.
Ground all data cabinets, racks, cable trays, and mounting hardware located in
communications rooms to the TGB.
K.
Label grounding conductors and grounding bus bars in accordance with BICSI
guidelines.
L.
Permanently attach equipment and grounding conductors prior to energizing equipment.
KIB DISTRICT OFFICE
RESTROOM IMPROVEMENTS
GROUNDING AND BONDING
FOR COMM SYSTEMS
270526 - 4
3.3
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A.
Section 014000 - Quality Requirements: Field inspecting, testing, adjusting, and
balancing.
B.
Visually inspect entire length of all installed grounding and bonding conductors, from
each TGB to the TMGB and the main TBB from the TMGB to the electrode connection
at the main electrical service. Replace damaged conductors and conductors with damaged
insulation.
C.
Perform physical “tug” test on each mechanical and exothermic weld connection. Reterminate all loose connections.
D.
Test in accordance with BICSI TDM Manual, and TIA/EIA 607.
END OF SECTION 270526
KIB DISTRICT OFFICE
RESTROOM IMPROVEMENTS
GROUNDING AND BONDING
FOR COMM SYSTEMS
270526 - 5
[This page intentionally left blank.]
KIB DISTRICT OFFICE
RESTROOM IMPROVEMENTS
GROUNDING AND BONDING
FOR COMM SYSTEMS
270526 - 6
SECTION 270533 - CONDUITS AND BACKBOXES FOR COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1
1.2
1.3
SUMMARY
A.
Section includes conduit and tubing, surface raceways, wireways, outlet boxes, pull and
junction boxes, and hand-holes.
B.
Section includes large capacity fire rated penetration sleeves. All devices shall be
specification grade with an intumescent insert material allowing for 0 to 100-percent visual
fill of conductors.
Related Sections:
A.
Section 078400 - Firestopping.
B.
Section 260529 - Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems.
C.
Section 260533 - Raceway and Boxes for Electrical Systems.
D.
Section 270526 - Grounding and Bonding for Communications Systems.
E.
Section 270553 - Identification for Communications Systems.
REFERENCES
A.
American National Standards Institute:
1.
2.
3.
B.
National Electrical Manufacturers Association:
1.
2.
3.
4.
1.4
ANSI C80.1 - Rigid Steel Conduit, Zinc Coated.
ANSI C80.3 - Specification for Electrical Metallic Tubing, Zinc Coated.
ANSI C80.5 - Aluminum Rigid Conduit - (ARC).
NEMA 250 - Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1000 Volts Maximum).
NEMA FB 1 - Fittings, Cast Metal Boxes, and Conduit Bodies for Conduit and
Cable Assemblies.
NEMA OS 1 - Sheet Steel Outlet Boxes, Device Boxes, Covers, and Box Supports.
NEMA TC 3 - PVC Fittings for Use with Rigid PVC Conduit and Tubing.
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A.
Raceway and boxes located as indicated on drawings, and at other locations required for
splices, taps, wire pulling, equipment connections, and compliance with regulatory
KIB DISTRICT OFFICE
RESTROOM IMPROVEMENTS
CONDUIT AND BACK BOXES
FOR COMMUNICATION SYSTEMS
270533 - 1
requirements. Raceway and boxes, when shown, are shown in approximate locations unless
dimensioned. Provide raceway to complete wiring system. Backbone conduits shall include
fabric inner duct installed.
1.5
B.
In or under slab-on-grade: Provide rigid steel conduit and intermediate metal conduit.
Provide cast metal boxes.
C.
In-slab above grade: Provide rigid steel conduit, intermediate metal conduit and electrical
metallic tubing. Provide cast or sheet metal boxes.
D.
Wet and Damp Locations: Provide rigid steel conduit, and intermediate metal conduit.
Provide cast metal outlet, junction, and pull boxes. Provide flush mounted outlet boxes in
finished areas.
E.
Concealed Dry Locations: Provide rigid steel conduit, intermediate metal conduit and
electrical metallic tubing. Provide sheet-metal boxes. Provide flush mounted outlet boxes in
finished areas. Provide hinged enclosure for large pull boxes.
F.
Exposed Dry Locations: Provide rigid steel conduit, intermediate metal conduit, and
electrical metallic tubing. Provide sheet-metal boxes. Provide flush mounted outlet boxes in
finished areas. Provide hinged enclosure for large pull boxes.
DESIGN REQUIREMENTS
A.
Minimum Raceway Size:
1.
2.
1.6
1.7
One-inch trade size conduit.
2200 Series surface raceway, or approved equivalent.
SUBMITTALS
A.
Section 013300 - Submittal Procedures: Submittal procedures.
B.
Product Data: Submit manufacturers’ product information.
1.
Outlet Boxes.
2.
Pull and Junction Boxes.
3.
Fire rated pathways
4.
Surface raceway and associated fittings and boxes.
5.
Communications (Inner) Raceway.
CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A.
Section 017000 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Requirements for submittals.
B.
Project Record Documents:
1.
Record actual dimensioned routing of conduits larger than 2 inches in diameter.
KIB DISTRICT OFFICE
RESTROOM IMPROVEMENTS
CONDUIT AND BACK BOXES
FOR COMMUNICATION SYSTEMS
270533 - 2
2.
3.
1.8
1.9
Record actual dimensioned routing of conduits run in slab or below grade.
Record actual locations and mounting heights of pull, and junction boxes greater
than 12 inch square or for future expansion such as laboratory and classroom areas.
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A.
Section 016000 - Product Requirements: Product storage and handling requirements.
B.
Protect conduit from corrosion and entrance of debris by storing above grade. Provide
appropriate covering.
COORDINATION
A.
Section 013000 - Administrative Requirements: Coordination and project conditions.
B.
Coordinate installation of outlet boxes for equipment connected under Section 260503.
C.
Coordinate mounting heights, orientation and locations of outlets mounted above counters,
benches, and backsplashes.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1
2.2
2.3
METAL CONDUIT
A.
Rigid Steel Conduit: ANSI C80.1.
B.
Intermediate Metal Conduit (IMC): Rigid steel.
C.
Fittings: NEMA FB 1 all steel fittings with insulated throats or bushings.
ELECTRICAL METALLIC TUBING (EMT)
A.
Product Description: ANSI C80.3; galvanized tubing.
B.
Fittings: NEMA FB 1; steel or malleable iron, compression fittings with insulated throats or
bushings..
OUTLET BOXES
A.
Sheet Metal Outlet Boxes: NEMA OS 1, galvanized steel, minimum 4-11/16 or 5 inch
square x 2-1/8 inch deep.
B.
Cast Boxes: NEMA FB 1, Type FD, cast feralloy. Furnish gasketed cover by box
manufacturer. Furnish threaded hubs.
KIB DISTRICT OFFICE
RESTROOM IMPROVEMENTS
CONDUIT AND BACK BOXES
FOR COMMUNICATION SYSTEMS
270533 - 3
2.4
C.
In-Slab Floor Boxes: See Section 260534 Floor Boxes for Electrical Systems.
D.
Wall Plates for Finished Areas: As specified in Section 262726.
E.
Wall Plates for Unfinished Areas: Furnish gasketed cover.
F.
Larger Sizes in accordance with EIT/TIA 569.
PULL AND JUNCTION BOXES
A.
Sheet Metal Boxes: NEMA OS 1, galvanized steel.
B.
Hinged Enclosures: As specified in Section 262716.
C.
Surface Mounted Cast Metal Box: NEMA 250, Type 4; flat-flanged, surface mounted
junction box:
1.
2.
2.5
Material: Galvanized cast iron.
Cover: Furnish with ground flange, neoprene gasket, and stainless steel cover
screws.
FIRE RATED CABLING DEVICES
A.
Acceptable Manufacturers include, but are not limited to, the following:
1.
2.
3.
EZ-PATH Fire Rated Pathway
Hilti Speed Sleeve
Other manufacturer meeting the requirements of the contract documents.
B.
Cables passing through fire-rated floors or walls shall pass through fire-rated wiring devices
which contain an intumescent insert material that adjusts automatically to cable additions or
subtractions.
C.
The device (per code requirements) shall include both internal and external firestopping.
D.
Cables penetrating through fire-rated floors or walls shall utilize fire-rated pathway devices
capable of providing an F rating equal to the rating of the barrier in which the device is
installed.
E.
The device shall be tested for smoke leakage (L rating) and shall not require the use of any
optional sealing materials to achieve the published rating.
F.
The device shall utilize a fire and smoke sealing system that automatically adjusts to the
addition or removal of cables.
G.
Devices shall be capable of allowing a 0 to 100-percent visual fill of cables.
KIB DISTRICT OFFICE
RESTROOM IMPROVEMENTS
CONDUIT AND BACK BOXES
FOR COMMUNICATION SYSTEMS
270533 - 4
2.6
H.
Devices shall be of a sufficient size to accommodate the quantity and size of cables planned
for each location, with 25 percent future capacity.
I.
The installed device shall require no maintenance and shall accommodate future cable
changes without mechanical adjustment and/or removal or replacement of protective
materials.
J.
Devices shall be provided with steel wall plates allowing for single or multiple devices to be
ganged together.
K.
The device shall be modular and shall provide mechanical installation options for common
wall and floor constructions as well as common construction conditions including over-sized
or damaged openings or existing sleeves.
Communication (Inner) Raceway
A.
Manufacturers: Maxcell or approved equal.
B.
Description: Nylon flexible optical and communication raceway with multiple cells with
plenum rated pull tape preinstalled.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1
3.2
EXAMINATION
A.
Section 013000 - Administrative Requirements: Coordination and project conditions.
B.
Verify outlet locations, routing and termination locations of raceway prior to rough-in.
EXISTING WORK
A.
Remove exposed abandoned raceway, including abandoned raceway above accessible
ceiling finishes. Cut raceway flush with walls and floors, and patch surfaces.
B.
Remove concealed abandoned raceway to its source.
C.
Disconnect abandoned outlets and remove devices. Remove abandoned outlets when
raceway is abandoned and removed. Install blank cover for abandoned outlets not removed.
D.
Maintain access to existing boxes and other installations remaining active and requiring
access. Modify installation or provide access panel.
E.
Extend existing raceway and box installations using materials and methods compatible with
existing electrical installations, or as specified.
F.
Clean and repair existing raceway and boxes to remain or to be reinstalled.
KIB DISTRICT OFFICE
RESTROOM IMPROVEMENTS
CONDUIT AND BACK BOXES
FOR COMMUNICATION SYSTEMS
270533 - 5
3.3
INSTALLATION
A.
Ground and bond raceway and boxes in accordance with Section 270526.
B.
Provide minimum 10 AWG bonding jumper between conduit and cable tray in locations
where conduits are stubbed into trays. Provide Listed cast metal bonding bushing with lug at
end of conduit to be bonded. Provide Listed lug attached to tray with clamp or tapped
threaded fastener.
C.
Fasten raceway and box supports to structure and finishes in accordance with Section
26 05 29.
D.
Identify raceway and boxes in accordance with Section 270553.
E.
Installation shall match requirements of Section 260533, Part 3 with the following
exceptions:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
F.
Provide communication inner raceways for new backbone installations
1.
2.
3.
3.4
3.5
Install no more than equivalent of two 90 degree bends between boxes.
Conduit bodies shall not be used.
Provide long radius bends in all conduits.
Box sizes shall comply with BICSI standards.
Do not make angle pulls at pull boxes without oversizing boxes and provisions to
maintain cable bending radius within box.
Four inch conduits: 1 each 3-cell of 3 inch size and 1 each 3-cell of 4 inch size
Two inch conduits: 1 each 3-cell of 2 inch size.
Cable trays: 1 each 3-cell of 3 inch size.
INTERFACE WITH OTHER PRODUCTS
A.
Install conduit to preserve fire resistance rating of partitions and other elements, using
materials and methods in accordance with Division 7.
B.
Route conduit through roof openings for piping and ductwork or through suitable roof jack
with pitch pocket. Coordinate location with roofing installation.
ADJUSTING
A.
Section 017000 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Testing, adjusting, and balancing.
B.
Adjust flush-mounted outlets to make front flush with finished wall material.
C.
Install knockout closures in unused openings in boxes.
KIB DISTRICT OFFICE
RESTROOM IMPROVEMENTS
CONDUIT AND BACK BOXES
FOR COMMUNICATION SYSTEMS
270533 - 6
3.6
CLEANING
A.
Section 017000 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Final cleaning.
B.
Clean interior of boxes to remove dust, debris, and other material.
C.
Clean exposed surfaces and restore finish.
END OF SECTION 270533
KIB DISTRICT OFFICE
RESTROOM IMPROVEMENTS
CONDUIT AND BACK BOXES
FOR COMMUNICATION SYSTEMS
270533 - 7
[This page intentionally left blank.]
KIB DISTRICT OFFICE
RESTROOM IMPROVEMENTS
CONDUIT AND BACK BOXES
FOR COMMUNICATION SYSTEMS
270533 - 8
SECTION 270553 - IDENTIFICATION FOR COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
Section Includes:
1.
2.
3.
4.
1.2
1.3
RELATED SECTIONS
A.
Section 099000 - Painting and Coating: Execution requirements for painting specified by
this section.
B.
Section 260553 - Identification for Electrical Systems.
SUBMITTALS
A.
Section 013300 - Submittal Procedures: Submittal procedures.
B.
Product Data: Submit manufacturer’s product data.
1.
2.
3.
C.
D.
Nameplates.
Labels.
Wire Markers.
Equipment Identification:
1.
1.4
Nameplates.
Labels.
Wire markers.
Conduit markers.
Submit electrical identification schedule including list of wording, symbols, letter
size, color coding, tag number, location, and function.
Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate installation instructions, special procedures,
and installation for each identification product except paint.
CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A.
Section 017000 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Requirements for submittals.
B.
Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of identified equipment and devices;
include identification data.
KIB DISTRICT OFFICE
RESTROOM IMPROVEMENTS
IDENTIFICATION FOR
COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS
270553 - 1
1.5
1.6
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A.
Section 016000 - Product Requirements: Requirements for transporting, handling, storing,
and protecting products.
B.
Accept identification products on site in original containers. Inspect for damage.
C.
Accept materials on site in original factory packaging, labeled with manufacturer's
identification, including product density and thickness.
D.
Protect insulation from weather and construction traffic, dirt, water, chemical, and
mechanical damage, by storing in original wrapping.
ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS
A.
Section 016000 - Product Requirements: Environmental conditions affecting products on
site.
B.
Install labels and nameplates only when ambient temperature and humidity conditions for
adhesive are within range recommended by manufacturer.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1
NAMEPLATES
A.
2.2
Product Description: Laminated three-layer plastic with engraved white letters on blue
contrasting background color. Melamine plastic, 0.125 inch thick, white letters on blue
background unless noted otherwise, with matte finish and square corners. Minimum size: 3/4
x 2 inch, minimum lettering 1/4 inch
LABELS
A.
Labels: Clear adhesive Mylar or plastic type, minimum 3/16 inch size with black letters by a
Kroy or similar lettering type device.
B.
Letter size:
1.
2.
2.3
Device plates 3/16 inch minimum.
Patch Panels: 1/4" inch high.
WIRE MARKERS
A.
Description: Machine printed heat-shrink tubing type.
KIB DISTRICT OFFICE
RESTROOM IMPROVEMENTS
IDENTIFICATION FOR
COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS
270553 - 2
2.4
CONDUIT AND RACEWAY MARKERS
A.
Description: Color code all raceway system junction boxes blue (except those visible in
finished areas) by spray paint.
B.
Description: Conduits shall have painted color code.
C.
Legend:
1.
Communication backbone and service raceway shall be stenciled with Telecom
Room termination endpoints.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1
3.2
3.3
REPARATION
A.
Degrease and clean surfaces to receive adhesive for identification materials.
B.
Prepare surfaces in accordance with Division 9 for painting.
EXISTING WORK
A.
Install identification on existing to remain in accordance with this section.
B.
Install identification on unmarked existing equipment.
C.
Replace lost or damaged nameplates, labels and markers.
INSTALLATION
A.
Install identifying devices after completion of painting.
B.
Nameplate Installation:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Install nameplate parallel to equipment lines.
Install nameplate for each electrical distribution and control equipment enclosure
with corrosive-resistant mechanical fasteners, or adhesive.
Install nameplates for each control panel and major control components located
outside panel with corrosive-resistant mechanical fasteners, or adhesive.
Secure nameplate to equipment front using mechanical fasteners or adhesive.
Secure nameplate to inside surface of door on recessed panelboard in finished
locations.
Install nameplates for the following:
a.
Racks
b.
Cabinets
KIB DISTRICT OFFICE
RESTROOM IMPROVEMENTS
IDENTIFICATION FOR
COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS
270553 - 3
C.
Wire Marker Installation:
1.
2.
3.
Label Comp
Outlet #
Values
###
Level #
0,1, 2, 3, or
4
0, 2 or 3
Telecom
Room
D.
Port #
####
Sample
1-0-923
3.
4.
0 = Equipment Room located in lower level serving lower and
main levels.; 2 = Telecom Room located on level 2 serving
level; 3 = Telecom Room located on level 3 serving level 3 and
Penthouse (level 4) and roof.
Unique three digit identifier of patch number supplied from
telecom room.
Patch number 923, located on level 1, Equipment Room 0
Install label parallel to equipment lines.
Install label for identification of individual device plates and jack locations within
patch panels or fiber trays.
Labels shall have same information as wire markers below. Device plate shall be
labeled with Outlet, Level and Telecom Room. Individual jacks will be labeled with
Patch #
Install patch panel labels with 1/4" high lettering.
Conduit and Pull Box Marker Installation:
1.
2.
3.
4.
F.
Description
Sequential numbering of outlets within each supplied from
telecom room
Floor on which outlet/patch is located
Label Installation:
1.
2.
E.
Mark data cabling at each end.
Install additional marking at accessible locations along the cable run.
Install labels at data outlets identifying outlet, floor#, telecom room, and patch
number designation.
Provide conduit marker for each conduit longer than 6 feet.
Provide box marking for all pull boxes over 8” square.
Conduit Marker Spacing: 20 feet on center and at wall, floor or ceiling penetration.
Raceway Painting: Identify conduit using field painting in accordance with Section
099000.
Stencil Installation:
1.
Apply stencil painting in accordance with Section 099000.
END OF SECTION 270553
KIB DISTRICT OFFICE
RESTROOM IMPROVEMENTS
IDENTIFICATION FOR
COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS
270553 - 4
SECTION 271500 - COMMUNICATIONS HORIZONTAL CABLING
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
Section Includes:
1.
2.
3.
4.
B.
Related Requirements:
1.
1.3
UTP cabling.
Cable connecting hardware, patch panels, and cross-connects.
Telecommunications outlet/connectors.
Cabling system identification products.
Section 271300 Communications Backbone Cabling for voice and data cabling
associated with system panels and devices.
DEFINITIONS
A.
BICSI: Building Industry Consulting Service International.
B.
Cross-Connect: A facility enabling the termination of cable elements and their interconnection or cross-connection.
C.
EMI: Electromagnetic interference.
D.
IDC: Insulation displacement connector.
E.
LAN: Local area network.
F.
Outlet/Connectors: A connecting device in the work area on which horizontal cable or
outlet cable terminates.
G.
RCDD: Registered Communications Distribution Designer.
H.
UTP: Unshielded twisted pair.
KIB DISTRICT OFFICE
RESTROOM IMPROVEMENTS
COMMUNICATIONS
HORIZONTAL CABLING
271500 - 1
1.4
1.5
ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS
A.
Coordinate layout and installation of telecommunications cabling with Owner's telecommunications and LAN equipment and service suppliers.
B.
Coordinate telecommunications outlet/connector locations with location of power receptacles at each work area.
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each type of product.
B.
Shop Drawings:
1.
2.
3.
4.
1.6
1.7
INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A.
Qualification Data: For Installer, qualified layout technician, installation supervisor, and
field inspector.
B.
Source quality-control reports.
C.
Field quality-control reports.
CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A.
1.8
System Labeling Schedules: Electronic copy of labeling schedules, in software
and format selected by Owner.
Cabling administration drawings and printouts.
Wiring diagrams to show typical wiring schematics, including the following:
a.
Cross-connects.
b.
Patch panels.
c.
Patch cords.
Cross-connects and patch panels. Detail mounting assemblies, and show elevations and physical relationship between the installed components.
Maintenance Data: For splices and connectors to include in maintenance manuals.
MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS
A.
Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.
1.
Device Plates: One of each type.
KIB DISTRICT OFFICE
RESTROOM IMPROVEMENTS
COMMUNICATIONS
HORIZONTAL CABLING
271500 - 2
1.9
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Installer Qualifications: Cabling Installer must have personnel certified by BICSI on
staff.
1.
2.
Layout Responsibility: Preparation of Shop Drawings and Cabling Administration Drawings by an RCDD.
Installation Supervision: Installation shall be under the direct supervision of
Registered Technician, who shall be present at all times when Work of this Section is performed at Project site.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1
HORIZONTAL CABLING DESCRIPTION
A.
Horizontal cable and its connecting hardware provide the means of transporting signals
between the telecommunications outlet/connector and the horizontal cross-connect located in the communications equipment room. This cabling and its connecting hardware are
called a "permanent link," a term that is used in the testing protocols.
1.
2.
3.
2.2
TIA/EIA-568-B.1 requires that a minimum of two telecommunications outlet/connectors be installed for each work area.
Horizontal cabling shall contain no more than one transition point or consolidation point between the horizontal cross-connect and the telecommunications outlet/connector.
Bridged taps and splices shall not be installed in the horizontal cabling.
B.
A work area is approximately 100 sq. ft., and includes the components that extend from
the telecommunications outlet/connectors to the station equipment.
C.
The maximum allowable horizontal cable length is 295 feet. This maximum allowable
length does not include an allowance for the length of 16 feet to the workstation equipment or in the horizontal cross-connect.
PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A.
General Performance: Horizontal cabling system shall comply with transmission standards in TIA/EIA-568-B.1 when tested according to test procedures of this standard.
B.
Surface-Burning Characteristics: Comply with ASTM E 84; testing by a qualified testing
agency. Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency.
1.
2.
C.
Flame-Spread Index: 25 or less.
Smoke-Developed Index: 50 or less.
Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in
NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.
KIB DISTRICT OFFICE
RESTROOM IMPROVEMENTS
COMMUNICATIONS
HORIZONTAL CABLING
271500 - 3
D.
2.3
Grounding: Comply with J-STD-607-A.
UTP CABLE
A.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the
following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
B.
Description: 100-ohm, four-pair UTP, covered with a blue thermoplastic jacket.
1.
2.
3.
4.
2.4
Belden Inc.
Berk-Tek.
CommScope, Inc.
Superior Essex Inc.
Tyco Electronics.
Comply with ICEA S-90-661 for mechanical properties.
Comply with TIA/EIA-568-B.1 for performance specifications.
Comply with TIA/EIA-568-B.2, Category 6.
Listed and labeled by an NRTL acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction as
complying with UL 444 and NFPA 70 for the following types:
a.
Communications, Plenum Rated: Type CMP, complying with
NFPA 262.
UTP CABLE HARDWARE
A.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the
following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Hubbell Premise Wiring.
Leviton Network Solutions.
Panduit Corp.
Siemon Co.
Tyco Electronics Corporation.
B.
General Requirements for Cable Connecting Hardware: Comply with TIA/EIA-568-B.2,
IDC type, with modules designed for punch-down caps or tools. Cables shall be terminated with connecting hardware of same category or higher.
C.
Connecting Blocks: 110-style IDC for Category 6. Provide blocks for the number of cables terminated on the block, plus 25 percent spare. Integral with connector bodies, including plugs and jacks where indicated.
D.
Cross-Connect: Modular array of connecting blocks arranged to terminate building cables and permit interconnection between cables.
1.
Number of Terminals per Field: One for each conductor in assigned cables.
KIB DISTRICT OFFICE
RESTROOM IMPROVEMENTS
COMMUNICATIONS
HORIZONTAL CABLING
271500 - 4
E.
Patch Panel: Modular panels housing multiple-numbered jack units with IDC-type connectors at each jack for permanent termination of pair groups of installed cables.
1.
F.
Jacks and Jack Assemblies: Modular, color-coded, eight-position modular receptacle
units with integral IDC-type terminals.
G.
Patch Cords: Factory-made, four-pair cables in 48-inch ( lengths; terminated with eightposition modular plug at each end.
1.
2.5
A.
Jacks: 100-ohm, balanced, twisted-pair connector; four-pair, eight-position modular.
Comply with TIA/EIA-568-B.1.
B.
Workstation Outlets: Six-port-connector assemblies mounted in single faceplate.
2.
3.
2.7
2.8
Patch cords shall have color-coded boots for circuit identification.
TELECOMMUNICATIONS OUTLET/CONNECTORS
1.
2.6
Number of Jacks per Field: One for each four-pair UTP cable indicated, plus
spares and blank positions adequate to suit specified expansion criteria.
Plastic Faceplate: High-impact plastic. Coordinate color with Section 262726
Wiring Devices.
For use with snap-in jacks accommodating any combination of UTP, optical fiber, and coaxial work area cords.
a.
Flush mounting jacks, positioning the cord at a 45-degree angle.
Legend: Snap-in, clear-label covers and machine-printed paper inserts.
GROUNDING
A.
Comply with requirements in Section 260526 Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems for grounding conductors and connectors.
B.
Comply with J-STD-607-A.
IDENTIFICATION PRODUCTS
A.
Comply with TIA/EIA-606-A and UL 969 for labeling materials, including label stocks,
laminating adhesives, and inks used by label printers.
B.
Comply with requirements in Section 260553 Identification for Electrical Systems.
SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL
A.
Factory test UTP cables according to TIA/EIA-568-B.2.
B.
Cable will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.
KIB DISTRICT OFFICE
RESTROOM IMPROVEMENTS
COMMUNICATIONS
HORIZONTAL CABLING
271500 - 5
C.
Prepare test and inspection reports.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1
ENTRANCE FACILITIES
A.
3.2
Coordinate backbone cabling with the protectors and demarcation point provided by
communications service provider.
WIRING METHODS
A.
Install cables in pathways and cable trays except within consoles, cabinets, desks, and
counters. Conceal pathways and cables except in unfinished spaces.
1.
2.
B.
Wiring within Enclosures:
1.
2.
3.
3.3
Comply with requirements in Section 270533 Conduit and Backboxes for Communications Systems.
Comply with requirements in Section 270536 Cable Trays for Communications
Systems.
Bundle, lace, and train conductors to terminal points with no excess and without
exceeding manufacturer's limitations on bending radii.
Install lacing bars and distribution spools.
Install conductors parallel with or at right angles to sides and back of enclosure.
INSTALLATION OF CABLES
A.
Comply with NECA 1.
B.
General Requirements for Cabling:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
Comply with TIA/EIA-568-B.1.
Comply with BICSI ITSIM, Ch. 6, "Cable Termination Practices."
Install 110-style IDC termination hardware unless otherwise indicated.
Terminate conductors; no cable shall contain unterminated elements. Make terminations only at indicated outlets, terminals, cross-connects, and patch panels.
Cables shall be terminated using pin/pair assignment in accordance with Owner’s
standard.
Cables may not be spliced. Secure and support cables at intervals not exceeding
30 inches and not more than 6 inches from cabinets, boxes, fittings, outlets,
racks, frames, and terminals.
Install lacing bars to restrain cables, to prevent straining connections, and to prevent bending cables to smaller radii than minimums recommended by manufacturer.
Bundle, lace, and train conductors to terminal points without exceeding manufacturer's limitations on bending radii, but not less than radii specified in
KIB DISTRICT OFFICE
RESTROOM IMPROVEMENTS
COMMUNICATIONS
HORIZONTAL CABLING
271500 - 6
9.
10.
11.
12.
C.
UTP Cable Installation:
1.
2.
D.
Comply with TIA/EIA-568-B.2.
Do not untwist UTP cables more than 1/2 inch from the point of termination to
maintain cable geometry.
Open-Cable Installation:
1.
2.
3.
E.
BICSI ITSIM, "Cabling Termination Practices" Chapter. Install lacing bars and
distribution spools.
Do not install bruised, kinked, scored, deformed, or abraded cable. Do not splice
cable between termination, tap, or junction points. Remove and discard cable if
damaged during installation and replace it with new cable.
Cold-Weather Installation: Bring cable to room temperature before dereeling.
Heat lamps shall not be used for heating.
In the communications equipment room, install a 10-foot- long service loop on
each end of cable.
Pulling Cable: Comply with BICSI ITSIM, Ch. 4, "Pulling Cable." Monitor cable pull tensions.
Install cabling with horizontal and vertical cable guides in telecommunications
spaces with terminating hardware and interconnection equipment.
Suspend UTP cable not in a wireway or pathway a minimum of 8 inches above
ceilings by cable supports not more than 60 inches apart.
Cable shall not be run through structural members or in contact with pipes, ducts,
or other potentially damaging items.
Installation of Cable Routed Exposed under Raised Floors:
1.
2.
3.
Install plenum-rated cable only.
Install cabling after the flooring system has been installed in raised floor areas.
Coil cable 6 feet long not less than 12 inches in diameter below each feed point.
F.
Group connecting hardware for cables into separate logical fields.
G.
Separation from EMI Sources:
1.
Comply with BICSI TDMM and TIA-569-B for separating unshielded copper
voice and data communication cable from potential EMI sources, including electrical power lines and equipment.
2.
Separation between open communications cables or cables in nonmetallic raceways and unshielded power conductors and electrical equipment shall be as follows:
a.
Electrical Equipment Rating Less Than 2 kVA: A minimum of 5 inches.
b.
Electrical Equipment Rating between 2 and 5 kVA: A minimum of 12
inches.
c.
Electrical Equipment Rating More Than 5 kVA: A minimum of 24 inches.
3.
Separation between communications cables in grounded metallic raceways and
unshielded power lines or electrical equipment shall be as follows:
a.
Electrical Equipment Rating Less Than 2 kVA: A minimum of 2-1/2
inches.
KIB DISTRICT OFFICE
RESTROOM IMPROVEMENTS
COMMUNICATIONS
HORIZONTAL CABLING
271500 - 7
b.
4.
5.
6.
3.4
3.5
3.6
Electrical Equipment Rating between 2 and 5 kVA: A minimum of 6
inches.
c.
Electrical Equipment Rating More Than 5 kVA: A minimum of 12 inches.
Separation between communications cables in grounded metallic raceways and
power lines and electrical equipment located in grounded metallic conduits or
enclosures shall be as follows:
a.
Electrical Equipment Rating Less Than 2 kVA: No requirement.
b.
Electrical Equipment Rating between 2 and 5 kVA: A minimum of 3
inches.
c.
Electrical Equipment Rating More Than 5 kVA: A minimum of 6 inches.
Separation between Communications Cables and Electrical Motors and Transformers, 5 kVA or HP and Larger: A minimum of 48 inches.
Separation between Communications Cables and Fluorescent Fixtures: A minimum of 5 inches.
FIRESTOPPING
A.
Comply with requirements in Section 078413 "Penetration Firestopping."
B.
Comply with TIA-569-B, Annex A, "Firestopping."
C.
Comply with BICSI TDMM, "Firestopping Systems" Article.
GROUNDING
A.
Install grounding according to BICSI TDMM, "Grounding, Bonding, and Electrical Protection" Chapter.
B.
Comply with J-STD-607-A.
C.
Bond metallic equipment to the grounding bus bar, using not smaller than No. 6 AWG
equipment grounding conductor.
IDENTIFICATION
A.
Identify system components, wiring, and cabling complying with TIA/EIA-606-A.
Comply with requirements for identification specified in Section 270553 "Identification
for Communication Systems."
1.
2.
B.
Administration Class: [1] [2] [3] [4].
Color-code cross-connect fields. Apply colors to voice and data service backboards, connections, covers, and labels.
Comply with requirements in Section 099123 "Interior Painting" for painting backboards.
For fire-resistant plywood, do not paint over manufacturer's label.
KIB DISTRICT OFFICE
RESTROOM IMPROVEMENTS
COMMUNICATIONS
HORIZONTAL CABLING
271500 - 8
C.
Paint and label colors for equipment identification shall comply with TIA/EIA-606-A for
[Class 2] [Class 3] [Class 4] level of administration, including optional identification requirements of this standard.
D.
Cable Schedule: Post in prominent location in each equipment room and wiring closet.
List incoming and outgoing cables and their designations, origins, and destinations. Protect with rigid frame and clear plastic cover. Furnish an electronic copy of final comprehensive schedules for Project.
E.
Cabling Administration Drawings: Show building floor plans with cabling administration-point labeling. Identify labeling convention and show labels for telecommunications
closets, backbone pathways and cables, entrance pathways and cables, terminal hardware
and positions, horizontal cables, work areas and workstation terminal positions, grounding buses and pathways, and equipment grounding conductors. Follow convention of
TIA/EIA-606-A. Furnish electronic record of all drawings, in software and format selected by Owner.
F.
Cable and Wire Identification:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
G.
Labels shall be preprinted or computer-printed type with printing area and font color that
contrasts with cable jacket color but still complies with requirements in TIA/EIA-606-A.
1.
3.7
Label each cable within 4 inches of each termination and tap, where it is accessible in a cabinet or junction or outlet box, and elsewhere as indicated.
Each wire connected to building-mounted devices is not required to be numbered
at device if color of wire is consistent with associated wire connected and numbered within panel or cabinet.
Exposed Cables and Cables in Cable Trays and Wire Troughs: Label each cable
at intervals not exceeding 15 feet.
Label each terminal strip and screw terminal in each cabinet, rack, or panel.
a.
Individually number wiring conductors connected to terminal strips, and
identify each cable or wiring group being extended from a panel or cabinet to a building-mounted device shall be identified with name and number of particular device as shown.
b.
Label each unit and field within distribution racks and frames.
Identification within Connector Fields in Equipment Rooms and Wiring Closets:
Label each connector and each discrete unit of cable-terminating and connecting
hardware. Where similar jacks and plugs are used for both voice and data communication cabling, use a different color for jacks and plugs of each service.
Cables use flexible vinyl or polyester that flex as cables are bent.
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A.
Perform the following tests and inspections:
1.
Visually inspect UTP cable jacket materials for NRTL certification markings.
Inspect cabling terminations in communications equipment rooms for compliance
with color-coding for pin assignments, and inspect cabling connections for compliance with TIA/EIA-568-B.1.
KIB DISTRICT OFFICE
RESTROOM IMPROVEMENTS
COMMUNICATIONS
HORIZONTAL CABLING
271500 - 9
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Visually confirm Category 6, marking of outlets, cover plates, outlet/connectors,
and patch panels.
Visually inspect cable placement, cable termination, grounding and bonding,
equipment and patch cords, and labeling of all components.
Test UTP backbone copper cabling for DC loop resistance, shorts, opens, intermittent faults, and polarity between conductors. Test operation of shorting bars
in connection blocks. Test cables after termination but not cross-connection.
a.
Test instruments shall meet or exceed applicable requirements in
TIA/EIA-568-B.2. Perform tests with a tester that complies with performance requirements in "Test Instruments (Normative)" Annex, complying with measurement accuracy specified in "Measurement Accuracy
(Informative)" Annex. Use only test cords and adapters that are qualified
by test equipment manufacturer for channel or link test configuration.
UTP Performance Tests:
a.
Test for each outlet. Perform the following tests according to TIA/EIA568-B.1 and TIA/EIA-568-B.2:
1)
Wire map.
2)
Length (physical vs. electrical, and length requirements).
3)
Insertion loss.
4)
Near-end crosstalk (NEXT) loss.
5)
Power sum near-end crosstalk (PSNEXT) loss.
6)
Equal-level far-end crosstalk (ELFEXT).
7)
Power sum equal-level far-end crosstalk (PSELFEXT).
8)
Return loss.
9)
Propagation delay.
10)
Delay skew.
tests according to TIA/EIA-568-B.1 and TIA/EIA-568-B.3.
Final Verification Tests: Perform verification tests for UTP after the complete
communications cabling and workstation outlet/connectors are installed.
a.
Voice Tests: These tests assume that dial tone service has been installed.
Connect to the network interface device at the demarcation point. Go
off-hook and listen and receive a dial tone. If a test number is available,
make and receive a local, long distance, and digital subscription line telephone call.
b.
Data Tests: These tests assume the Information Technology Staff has a
network installed and is available to assist with testing. Connect to the
network interface device at the demarcation point. Log onto the network
to ensure proper connection to the network.
B.
Document data for each measurement. Data for submittals shall be printed in a summary
report that is formatted similar to Table 10.1 in BICSI TDMM, or transferred from the instrument to the computer, saved as text files, and printed and submitted.
C.
End-to-end cabling will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.
D.
Prepare test and inspection reports.
KIB DISTRICT OFFICE
RESTROOM IMPROVEMENTS
COMMUNICATIONS
HORIZONTAL CABLING
271500 - 10
3.8
DEMONSTRATION
A.
Train Owner's maintenance personnel in cable-plant management operations, including
changing signal pathways for different workstations, rerouting signals in failed cables,
and keeping records of cabling assignments and revisions when extending wiring to establish new workstation outlets.
END OF SECTION 271500
KIB DISTRICT OFFICE
RESTROOM IMPROVEMENTS
COMMUNICATIONS
HORIZONTAL CABLING
271500 - 11
[This page intentionally left blank.]
KIB DISTRICT OFFICE
RESTROOM IMPROVEMENTS
COMMUNICATIONS
HORIZONTAL CABLING
271500 - 12
SECTION 283111 - DIGITAL, ADDRESSABLE FIRE-ALARM SYSTEM
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
SUMMARY
A.
1.3
1.4
Section Includes:
1.
System smoke detectors.
2.
Notification appliances.
3.
Magnetic door holders.
4.
Addressable interface device.
DEFINITIONS
A.
FACP: Fire Alarm Control Panel.
B.
LED: Light-emitting diode.
C.
NAC: Notification Appliance Circuit.
D.
NICET: National Institute for Certification in Engineering Technologies.
E.
SLC: Signal Line Circuit.
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A.
1.5
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
UPGRADE Existing EST3 fire alarm panel for relocated and enw devices shown. Provide control modules, accessories, and programming required for a complete and functional system.
PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A.
Seismic Performance: Fire-alarm control Panel and raceways shall withstand the effects
of earthquake motions determined according to SEI/ASCE 7.
1.
1.6
The term "withstand" means "the equipment will remain in place without separation of any parts from the device when subjected to the seismic forces specified
and the equipment will be fully operational after the seismic event.
SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
KIB DISTRICT OFFICE
RESTROOM IMPROVEMENTS
DIGITAL, ADDRESSABLE
FIRE-ALARM STSTEM
SECTION 283111 - 1
B.
Shop Drawings: For fire-alarm system. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and
attachments to other work.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
C.
General Submittal Requirements:
1.
2.
D.
2.
3.
1.7
Submittals shall be approved by authorities having jurisdiction prior to submitting them to Architect.
Shop Drawings shall be prepared by persons with the following qualifications:
a.
Trained and certified by manufacturer in fire-alarm system design.
b.
NICET-certified fire-alarm technician, Level IV minimum.
Seismic Qualification Certificates: For fire-alarm control panel, accessories, and components, from manufacturer.
1.
E.
Comply with recommendations in the "Documentation" Section of the "Fundamentals of Fire Alarm Systems" Chapter in NFPA 72.
Include voltage drop calculations for notification appliance circuits.
Include battery-size calculations.
Include performance parameters and installation details for each detector, verifying that each detector is listed for complete range of air velocity, temperature,
and humidity possible when air-handling system is operating.
Include plans, sections, and elevations of heating, ventilating, and airconditioning ducts, drawn to scale and coordinating installation of duct smoke
detectors and access to them. Show critical dimensions that relate to placement
and support of sampling tubes, detector housing, and remote status and alarm indicators. Locate detectors according to manufacturer's written recommendations.
Include floor plans to indicate final outlet locations showing address of each addressable device. Show size and route of cable and conduits.
Basis for Certification: Indicate whether withstand certification is based on actual test of assembled components or on calculation.
Dimensioned Outline Drawings of Equipment: Identify center of gravity and locate and describe mounting and anchorage provisions.
Detailed description of equipment anchorage devices on which the certification is
based and their installation requirements.
Field quality-control reports.
CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A.
Operation and Maintenance Data: For fire-alarm systems and components to include in
emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. In addition to items specified in Section 017823 "Operation and Maintenance Data," include the following:
1.
2.
3.
Comply with the "Records" Section of the "Inspection, Testing and Maintenance"
Chapter in NFPA 72.
Provide "Record of Completion Documents" according to NFPA 72 article "Permanent Records" in the "Records" Section of the "Inspection, Testing and
Maintenance" Chapter.
Record copy of site-specific software.
KIB DISTRICT OFFICE
RESTROOM IMPROVEMENTS
DIGITAL, ADDRESSABLE
FIRE-ALARM STSTEM
SECTION 283111 - 2
4.
5.
6.
1.8
MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS
A.
Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
1.9
1.10
Provide "Maintenance, Inspection and Testing Records" according to NFPA 72
article of the same name and include the following:
a.
Frequency of testing of installed components.
b.
Frequency of inspection of installed components.
c.
Requirements and recommendations related to results of maintenance.
d.
Manufacturer's user training manuals.
Manufacturer's required maintenance related to system warranty requirements.
Abbreviated operating instructions for mounting at fire-alarm control panel.
Smoke Detectors: Quantity equal to 10 percent of amount of each type installed,
but no fewer than 1 unit of each type.
Detector Bases: Quantity equal to 2 percent of amount of each type installed, but
no fewer than 1 unit of each type.
Keys and Tools: One extra set for access to locked and tamper proofed components.
Audible and Visual Notification Appliances: Four of each type installed.
Fuses: Four of each type installed in the system.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Installer Qualifications: Personnel shall be trained and certified by manufacturer for installation of units required for this Project.
B.
Source Limitations for Fire-Alarm System and Components: Obtain fire-alarm system
from single source from single manufacturer. Components shall be compatible with, and
operate as, an extension of existing system.
C.
Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in
NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.
PROJECT CONDITIONS
A.
Interruption of Existing Fire-Alarm Service: Do not interrupt fire-alarm service to facilities occupied by Owner or others unless permitted under the following conditions and
then only after arranging to provide temporary guard service according to requirements
indicated:
1.
2.
Notify Owner no fewer than 4 working days in advance of proposed interruption
of fire-alarm service.
Do not proceed with interruption of fire-alarm service without Owner's written
permission.
KIB DISTRICT OFFICE
RESTROOM IMPROVEMENTS
DIGITAL, ADDRESSABLE
FIRE-ALARM STSTEM
SECTION 283111 - 3
1.11
SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING
A.
Existing Fire-Alarm Equipment: Maintain existing equipment fully operational until new
equipment has been tested and accepted. As new equipment is installed, label it "NOT
IN SERVICE" until it is accepted. Remove labels from new equipment when put into
service and label existing fire-alarm equipment "NOT IN SERVICE" until removed from
the building.
B.
Provide remote fire alarm annunciation during the multiple phases of the project to meet
Fire Department Requirements.
C.
Maintain operation of areas to remain in service during construction of other spaces.
Provide temporary conduit, cables and devices required to keep continued use of nonconstruction areas.
D.
Equipment Removal: After acceptance of new fire-alarm system components or area,
remove existing disconnected fire-alarm equipment and wiring.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1
MANUFACTURERS
A.
2.2
Devices compatible with existing EST3 panel and existing NAC, IDC and SLC.
SYSTEMS OPERATIONAL DESCRIPTION
A.
Fire-alarm signal initiation shall be by one or more of the following devices added by this
project (in addition to existing programming):
1.
Smoke detectors.
2.
Verified automatic alarm operation of smoke detectors.
B.
Fire-alarm signal shall initiate the following actions:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
Continuously operate alarm notification appliances.
Identify alarm at fire-alarm control panel and where installed, remote annunciators.
Transmit an alarm signal to the remote alarm receiving station.
Unlock electric door locks in designated egress paths.
Release fire and smoke doors held open by magnetic door holders.
Where used, activate voice/alarm communication system.
Switch heating, ventilating, and air-conditioning equipment controls to fire-alarm
mode.
Close smoke dampers in air ducts of designated air-conditioning duct systems.
Recall elevators to primary or alternate recall floors.
Activate emergency shutoffs for gas and fuel supplies when kitchen hood suppression system is activated.
Record events in the system memory.
KIB DISTRICT OFFICE
RESTROOM IMPROVEMENTS
DIGITAL, ADDRESSABLE
FIRE-ALARM STSTEM
SECTION 283111 - 4
C.
System trouble signal initiation shall be by one or more of the following devices and actions:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
D.
System Trouble and Supervisory Signal Actions:
1.
2.
2.3
Open circuits, shorts, and grounds in designated circuits.
Opening, tampering with, or removing alarm-initiating and supervisory signalinitiating devices.
Loss of primary power at fire-alarm control panel.
Ground or a single break in fire-alarm control panel internal circuits.
Abnormal ac voltage at fire-alarm control panel.
Break in standby battery circuitry.
Failure of battery charging.
Abnormal position of any switch at fire-alarm control panel or annunciator.
Fire-pump power failure, including a dead-phase or phase-reversal condition.
Low-air-pressure switch operation on a dry-pipe or preaction sprinkler system.
Annunciate at fire-alarm control panel and remote annunciators.
Record events in the system memory.
FIRE-ALARM CONTROL PANEL
A.
The existing FACP will be utilized for existing and new SLC and NAC circuits.
B.
Circuits:
1.
2.
3.
Initiating Device Circuits: NFPA 72, Class B.
a.
Install no more than 70 percent capacity of addressable devices on each
initiating device circuit.
Signaling Line Circuits: NFPA 72, Class B Style 4.
a.
Install no more than 70 percent capacity of addressable devices on each
signaling line circuit.
Notification Appliance Circuits: NFPA 72, Class B.
a.
Install no more than 70 percent capacity of devices on each notification
appliance circuit.
C.
Notification Appliance Circuit: Operation shall sound in a temporal pattern, complying
with ANSI S3.41.
D.
Door Controls: Door hold-open devices that are controlled by smoke detectors at doors
in smoke barrier walls shall be connected to fire-alarm system.
E.
Transmission to Remote Alarm Receiving Station: Automatically transmit alarm, supervisory, and trouble signals to a remote alarm station.
F.
Primary Power: 24-V dc obtained from 120-V ac service and a power-supply module.
Initiating devices, notification appliances, signaling lines, trouble signals, supervisory
and digital alarm communicator transmitters shall be powered by 24-V dc source.
1.
Alarm current draw of entire fire-alarm system shall not exceed 80 percent of the
power-supply module rating.
KIB DISTRICT OFFICE
RESTROOM IMPROVEMENTS
DIGITAL, ADDRESSABLE
FIRE-ALARM STSTEM
SECTION 283111 - 5
G.
Secondary Power: 24-V dc supply system with batteries, automatic battery charger, and
automatic transfer switch.
1.
H.
2.4
Instructions: Computer printout or typewritten instruction card mounted behind a plastic
or glass cover in a stainless-steel or aluminum frame. Include interpretation and describe
appropriate response for displays and signals. Briefly describe the functional operation
of the system under normal, alarm, and trouble conditions.
SYSTEM SMOKE DETECTORS
A.
General Requirements for System Smoke Detectors:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
B.
Comply with UL 268; operating at 24-V dc, nominal.
Detectors shall be two-wire type.
Integral Addressable Module: Arranged to communicate detector status (normal,
alarm, or trouble) to fire-alarm control panel.
Base Mounting: Detector and associated electronic components shall be mounted in a twist-lock module that connects to a fixed base. Provide terminals in the
fixed base for connection to building wiring.
Self-Restoring: Detectors do not require resetting or readjustment after actuation
to restore them to normal operation.
Integral Visual-Indicating Light: LED type indicating detector has operated and
power-on status.
Photoelectric Smoke Detectors:
1.
2.
2.5
Batteries: Sealed, valve-regulated, recombinant lead acid.
Detector address shall be accessible from fire-alarm control panel and shall be
able to identify the detector's location within the system and its sensitivity setting.
An operator at fire-alarm control panel, having the designated access level, shall
be able to manually access the following for each detector:
a.
Primary status.
b.
Device type.
c.
Present average value.
d.
Present sensitivity selected.
e.
Sensor range (normal, dirty, etc.).
NOTIFICATION APPLIANCES
A.
General Requirements for Notification Appliances: Connected to notification appliance
signal circuits, zoned as indicated, equipped for mounting as indicated and with screw
terminals for system connections.
1.
B.
Combination Devices: Factory-integrated audible and visible devices in a singlemounting assembly, equipped for mounting as indicated and with screw terminals for system connections.
Chimes, Low-Level Output: Vibrating type, 75-dBA minimum rated output.
KIB DISTRICT OFFICE
RESTROOM IMPROVEMENTS
DIGITAL, ADDRESSABLE
FIRE-ALARM STSTEM
SECTION 283111 - 6
C.
Chimes, High-Level Output: Vibrating type, 81-dBA minimum rated output.
D.
Horns: Electric-vibrating-polarized type, 24-V dc; with provision for housing the operating mechanism behind a grille. Comply with UL 464. Horns shall produce a soundpressure level of 90 dBA, measured 10 feet from the horn, using the coded signal prescribed in UL 464 test protocol.
E.
Visible Notification Appliances: Xenon strobe lights comply with UL 1971, with clear or
nominal white polycarbonate lens mounted on an aluminum faceplate. The word "FIRE"
is engraved in minimum 1-inch- high letters on the lens.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
2.6
MAGNETIC DOOR HOLDERS
A.
Description: Units are equipped for wall or floor mounting as indicated and are complete
with matching doorplate.
1.
2.
3.
4.
B.
2.7
Rated Light Output:
a.
15/30/75/110 cd, selectable in the field.
Mounting: Wall mounted unless otherwise indicated.
For units with guards to prevent physical damage, light output ratings shall be determined with guards in place.
Flashing shall be in a temporal pattern, synchronized with other units.
Strobe Leads: Factory connected to screw terminals.
Mounting Faceplate: Factory finished, white.
Electromagnet: Requires no more than 3 W to develop 25-lbf holding force.
Door holder magnets in exit corridors shall develop 50-lbf holding force.
Wall-Mounted Units: Flush mounted unless otherwise indicated.
Rating: 120-V ac.
Material and Finish: Match door hardware. Coordinate door holders with architectural
door hardware in Division 08.
ADDRESSABLE INTERFACE DEVICE
A.
Description: Microelectronic monitor module, NRTL listed for use in providing a system
address for alarm-initiating devices for wired applications with normally open contacts.
B.
Integral Relay Capable of Providing a Direct Signal:
1.
To motor controller for fan shutdown.
2.
To access control system to release doors normally locked.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1
EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION
A.
Comply with NFPA 72 for installation of fire-alarm equipment.
B.
Connecting to Existing Equipment: Verify that existing fire-alarm system is operational
before making changes or connections.
KIB DISTRICT OFFICE
RESTROOM IMPROVEMENTS
DIGITAL, ADDRESSABLE
FIRE-ALARM STSTEM
SECTION 283111 - 7
1.
2.
3.
C.
Smoke- or Heat-Detector Spacing:
1.
2.
3.
3.2
Comply with NFPA 72, "Smoke-Sensing Fire Detectors" Section in the "Initiating Devices" Chapter, for smoke-detector spacing.
Comply with NFPA 72, "Heat-Sensing Fire Detectors" Section in the "Initiating
Devices" Chapter, for heat-detector spacing.
Spacing of detectors for irregular areas, for irregular ceiling construction, and for
high ceiling areas shall be determined according to Appendix A in NFPA 72.
D.
Remote Status and Alarm Indicators/ Test Switches: Install near each smoke detector
and each sprinkler water-flow switch and valve-tamper switch that is not readily visible
from normal viewing position.
E.
Audible Alarm-Indicating Devices: Install not less than 6 inches below the ceiling or as
indicated on the Drawings. Install bells and horns on flush-mounted back boxes with the
device-operating mechanism concealed behind a grille.
F.
Visible/Audible Alarm-Indicating Devices: Install adjacent to each alarm bell or alarm
horn and at least 6 inches below the ceiling or as indicated on the Drawings.
G.
Visible Alarm-Indicating Devices: Install at least 6 inches below the ceiling or as indicated on the Drawings.
CONNECTIONS
A.
For fire-protection systems related to doors in fire-rated walls and partitions and to doors
in smoke partitions, comply with requirements in Section 087100 "Door Hardware."
Connect hardware and devices to fire-alarm system.
1.
B.
3.3
Connect new equipment to existing control panel in existing part of the building.
Connect new equipment to existing monitoring equipment at the supervising station.
Expand, modify, and supplement existing control and monitoring equipment as
necessary to extend existing control and monitoring functions to the new points.
New components shall be capable of merging with existing configuration without
degrading the performance of either system.
Verify that hardware and devices are NRTL listed for use with fire-alarm system
in this Section before making connections.
Make addressable connections with a supervised interface device to the following devices
and systems. Install the interface device less than 3 feet from the device controlled.
Make an addressable confirmation connection when such feedback is available at the device or system being controlled.
IDENTIFICATION
A.
Identify system components, wiring, cabling, and terminals. Comply with requirements
for identification specified in Section 260553 "Identification for Electrical Systems."
KIB DISTRICT OFFICE
RESTROOM IMPROVEMENTS
DIGITAL, ADDRESSABLE
FIRE-ALARM STSTEM
SECTION 283111 - 8
3.4
B.
Install framed instructions in a location visible from fire-alarm control panel.
C.
Update system graphics to include relocated and added devices.
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A.
Perform tests and inspections.
1.
2.
B.
Tests and Inspections:
1.
2.
3.
3.5
Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative
to inspect components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections, and to assist in testing.
Field services shall be conducted for each phase of work prior to acceptance of
completed area for Owner occupancy.
Visual Inspection: Conduct visual inspection prior to testing.
a.
Inspection shall be based on completed Record Drawings and system
documentation that is required by NFPA 72 in its "Completion Documents, Preparation" Table in the "Documentation" Section of the "Fundamentals of Fire Alarm Systems" Chapter.
b.
Comply with "Visual Inspection Frequencies" Table in the "Inspection"
Section of the "Inspection, Testing and Maintenance" Chapter in NFPA
72; retain the "Initial/Reacceptance" column and list only the installed
components.
System Testing: Comply with "Test Methods" Table in the "Testing" Section of
the "Inspection, Testing and Maintenance" Chapter in NFPA 72.
Factory-authorized service representative shall prepare the "Fire Alarm System
Record of Completion" in the "Documentation" Section of the "Fundamentals of
Fire Alarm Systems" Chapter in NFPA 72 and the "Inspection and Testing Form"
in the "Records" Section of the "Inspection, Testing and Maintenance" Chapter in
NFPA 72.
C.
Reacceptance Testing: Perform reacceptance testing to verify the proper operation of
added or replaced devices and appliances.
D.
Fire-alarm system will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.
E.
Prepare and submit test and inspection reports.
DEMONSTRATION
A.
Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain fire-alarm system.
END OF SECTION 283111
KIB DISTRICT OFFICE
RESTROOM IMPROVEMENTS
DIGITAL, ADDRESSABLE
FIRE-ALARM STSTEM
SECTION 283111 - 9
[This page intentionally left blank.]
KIB DISTRICT OFFICE
RESTROOM IMPROVEMENTS
DIGITAL, ADDRESSABLE
FIRE-ALARM STSTEM
SECTION 283111 - 10